Professional Documents
Culture Documents
SBC 301 CR, 2018 - Saudi Building Code For Loading and Forces (Saudi Building Code National Commitee)
SBC 301 CR, 2018 - Saudi Building Code For Loading and Forces (Saudi Building Code National Commitee)
SBC 301 - CR
Code Requirements
ﻛﻮد اﻻﺣﻤﺎل واﻟﻘﻮى
2018
Saudi Building Code for Loading and Forces
SBC 301
Key List of the Saudi Codes: Designations and brief titles
Title Code Req.1 Code & Com.2 Arabic Prov. 3
The General Building Code SBC 201-CR SBC 201-CC SBC 201-AR
Structural – Loading and Forces SBC 301-CR SBC 301-CC SBC 301-AR
Structural – Construction SBC 302- CR SBC 302-AR
Structural – Soil and Foundations SBC 303- CR SBC 303-CC SBC 303-AR
Structural – Concrete Structures SBC 304- CR SBC 304-CC SBC 304-AR
Structural – Masonry Structures SBC 305- CR SBC 305-CC SBC 305-AR
Structural – Steel Structures
Electrical Code SBC 401- CR SBC 401-AR
Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR SBC 501-CC SBC 501-AR
Energy Conservation- Nonresidential SBC 601- CR SBC 601- CC SBC 601- AR
Energy Conservation-Residential SBC 602- CR SBC 602- CC SBC 602- AR
Plumbing Code SBC 701- CR SBC 701-CC SBC 701-AR
Private sewage Code SBC 702- CR SBC 702-AR
Fire Code SBC 801- CR SBC 801-CC SBC 801-AR
Existing Buildings Code SBC 901- CR SBC 901-CC SBC 901-AR
Green Construction Code SBC 1001- CR SBC 1001-CC SBC 1001-AR
Residential Building Code* SBC 1101- CR SBC 1101-CC SBC 1101-AR
Fuel Gas Code* SBC 1201- CR SBC 1201-CC SBC 1201-AR
1. CR: Code Requirements without Commentary
2. CC: Code Requirements with Commentary
3. AR: Arabic Code Provisions
* Under Development
COPYRIGHT © 2018
by
The Saudi Building Code National Committee (SBCNC).
(Printed: May-2019)
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. All intellectual property rights of this Saudi Code are owned by the National
Committee of Saudi Building Code as per the Saudi laws of the intellectual property. No part of this code may
be reproduced, distributed or leased in any form or by any means, including but not limited to publishing on
cloud sites, computer networks or any electronic means of communication, without prior written permission
from the National Committee of the Saudi Building Code. The purchase of an electronic or a paper copy does
not exempt the individual or entity from complying with the above limitations.
SBC 301-CR-18 i
TECHNICAL COMMITTEE (SBC 301):
1 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Chairman
2 Prof. Abdelhamid Charif Member
3 Dr. Abdulrahman S. Albidah Member
4 Dr. Fadi Al Nahhas Member
5 Eng. Rais Mirza Member
REVIEW COMMITTEE:
1 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Chairman
2 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member
3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-enizi Member
4 Eng. Saeed K. Kadasah Member
5 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
SBC 301-CR-18 ii
PREFACE
PREFACE
Saudi Building Code SBC 301 provides minimum load requirements for the design of buildings and
other structures. The first edition of SBC 301 was published in the year 2007. SBC 301-18 is the
second edition and provides an up-to-date and coordinated loading standard for general structural
design. SBC 301 describes the means for determining design loads including dead, live, soil, flood,
rain, earthquake, and wind as well as how to assess load combinations.
The current edition of the Code has been substantially reorganized and reformatted relative to
its 2007 edition. The code is reorganized into 31 chapters and four appendices. The reorganization
was in response to past requests concerning the difficulty in finding provisions. The new layout is
more user-friendly and will better facilitate the use of the design load provisions.
ASCE/SEI 7-10 is the base code in the development of this Code. Saudi Building Code National
Committee (SBCNC) has made an agreement with the American Society of Civil Engineers, through
its Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI) to use their materials and modify them as per the
local construction needs and regulatory requirements of Saudi Arabia. ASCE/SEI is not responsible
for any modifications or changes the SBCNC has made to accommodate local conditions.
The writing process of SBC 301-18 followed the methodology approved by the Saudi
Building Code National Committee. Many changes and modifications were made in its base code
(ASCE/SEI 7-10) to meet the local weather, materials, construction and regulatory requirements.
The committees responsible for SBC 301 Code have taken all precautions to avoid
ambiguities, omissions, and errors in the document. Despite these efforts, the users of SBC 301 may
find information or requirements that may be subject to more than one interpretation or may be
incomplete. The SBCNC alone possesses the authority and responsibility for updating, modifying
and interpreting the Code.
It is a common assumption that engineering knowledge is a prerequisite in understanding code
provisions and requirements; thus, the code is oriented towards individuals who possess the
background knowledge to evaluate the significance and limitations of its content and
recommendations. They shall be able to determine the applicability of all regulatory limitations
before applying the Code and must comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
The requirements related to administration and enforcement of this Code are advisory only.
SBCNC and governmental organizations, in charge of enforcing this Code, possess the authority to
modify these administrative requirements.
SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS
The entire SBC 301-18 is divided into 31 chapters and 4 appendices. A brief outline of these chapters and appendices is
given below:
Chapter 1. General—This chapter includes a number of provisions that explain where SBC 301 Code applies and how
it is to be interpreted. It also gives the definition of various terminology used in this Code. The requirements related to
construction documents, structural strength, stability, integrity and serviceability are provided in this chapter.
Classification of buildings and other structures based on the risk to human life, health, and welfare are given in this
chapter. This chapter also provides information when an existing building needs to be strengthened and when a load test
of any construction needs to be conducted.
Chapter 2. Combination of Loads—This chapter provides the load factors and load combinations for using with
strength and allowable stress design methods. Chapter 2 also provides the load combinations for extraordinary (i.e., low-
probability) events, such as fires, explosions, and vehicular impact.
Chapter 3. Dead Loads, Soil Loads, and Hydrostatic Pressure — This chapter provides the values of minimum
design dead loads from various components of the buildings. It also provides minimum densities of various materials for
computing the dead loads. Design lateral soil loads from different types of soils are also given in this chapter. One of the
sections of this chapter clarifies that if a portion or the whole of the adjacent soil is below a free-water surface,
computations shall be based upon the weight of the soil diminished by buoyancy, plus full hydrostatic pressure.
Chapter 4. Live Lads—This chapter provides the minimum uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads for the
design of floors, roofs, and other similar surfaces. Live loads for the design of handrail, guardrail, grab bar and vehicle
barrier systems, and fixed ladders are given in this chapter. Impact loads, reduction in live loads, reduction in roof live
loads, and crane loads are also covered in this chapter.
Chapter 5. Flood Loads—Flood loads are of two basic types: hydrostatic and hydrodynamic. Hydrostatic loads are
those caused by water either above or below the ground surface, free or confined, stagnant or move at velocities less than
1.5 m/s. Hydrodynamic loads are those loads induced by the flow of water moving at moderate to high velocity above the
ground level. The provisions of this chapter apply to buildings and other structures located in areas prone to flooding.
Chapter 6. Reserved for future provisions—This chapter is intentionally left blank.
Chapter 7. Snow Loads —This chapter is intentionally left blank because Snow loads are not applicable to the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia, no provisions related to snow loads are given in this chapter.
Chapter 8. Rain Loads— This chapter provides the method for computing the design load of all rainwater that will
accumulate on a roof if the primary drainage system is blocked plus the uniform load caused by water that rises above the
inlet of the secondary drainage system at its design flow.
Chapter 9. Reserved for future provisions—This chapter is intentionally left blank.
Chapter 10. Ice Loads-Atmospheric Icing — This chapter is intentionally left blank because Ice loads are not
applicable to the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, no provisions related to ice loads are given in this chapter.
Chapter 11. SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA —This chapter presents criteria for the design and construction of
buildings and other structures subject to earthquake ground motions. The specified earthquake loads are based upon post-
elastic energy dissipation in the structure, and because of this fact, the requirements for design, detailing, and
constructions shall be satisfied even for structures and members for which load combinations that do not contain
earthquake loads indicate larger demands than combinations that include earthquake loads
Chapter 12. Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures —This chapter provides a set of coordinated
seismic design requirements that must be used together for an acceptable seismic performance of building structures.
This chapter requires a building structure to include complete lateral and vertical force-resisting systems capable of
providing adequate strength, stiffness, and energy dissipation capacity to withstand the design ground motions within the
prescribed limits of deformation and strength demand. This chapter presents the seismic analysis and design procedures
to be used in the design of building structures and their members. It covers critical topics including: (1) Structural design
basis ; (2) the basic lateral and vertical seismic force-resisting system; (3) diaphragm flexibility, configuration
irregularities, and redundancy; (4) Seismic load effects and combinations; (5) Direction of loading; (6) Analysis
procedure selection; (7) Modeling criteria; (8) Equivalent lateral force procedure; (9) Modal response spectrum analysis;
(10) Diaphragms, chords, and collectors; (11) Structural walls and their anchorage; (12) Drift and deformation; (13)
Foundation design; and, (14) Simplified alternative structural design criteria for simple bearing wall or building frame
systems.
Chapter 13. Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural Components—This chapter defines minimum design
criteria for architectural, mechanical, electrical, and other nonstructural components that are permanently attached to
structures and to their supports and attachments. Where the weight of a nonstructural component is greater than or equal
SBC 301-CR-18 iv
to 25 percent of the effective seismic weight of the structure, the component shall be classified as a nonbuilding structure
and shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 15.
Chapter 14. Material Specific Seismic Design and Detailing Requirements—Material specific seismic design and
detailing requirements were examined by the relevant Saudi Building Code Committees and all of these requirements
were incorporated in the Saudi Building Code and referenced in this chapter. For example, Seismic design and
detailing requirements for steel and wood have been incorporated in Chapter 22 and 23 of SBC 201 respectively.
Similarly, the requirements related to concrete and masonry have been incorporated in SBC 304 and SBC 305
respectively.
Chapter 15. Seismic Design Requirements for Nonbuilding Structures—Nonbuilding structures include all self-
supporting structures that carry gravity loads and that may be required to resist the effects of earthquake. There are two
types of nonbuilding structures: those with structural systems similar to buildings and those with structural systems not
similar to buildings. The chapter provides an appropriate link so that the industry reference documents can be used with
the seismic ground motions established in the code.
Chapter 16. Seismic Response History Procedures—The requirements of this chapter need to be satisfied where linear
response history procedure is performed. The code does not require the use of linear response history analysis for design
of a structure. The use of such analysis may be useful in validation of the results from the analysis methods presented in
CHAPTER 12, or as a step in a series of analyses that culminate in a nonlinear response history analysis.
Chapter 17. Seismic Design Requirements for Seismically Isolated Structures — This chapter covers seismic
isolation, commonly referred to as base isolation. It is a method used to substantially decouple the response of a structure
from potentially damaging earthquake motions. This decoupling can result in response that is reduced significantly from
that of a conventional, fixed-base building. The chapter provides general design requirements applicable to a wide range
of possible seismic isolation systems. Because the design requirements are general, testing of isolation system hardware
is required to confirm the engineering parameters used in the design and to verify the overall adequacy of the isolation
system. Use of isolation systems whose adequacy is not proved by testing is prohibited.
Chapter 18. Seismic Design Requirements for Structures with Damping Systems— The requirements of this chapter
apply to all types of damping systems, including both displacement-dependent damping devices of hysteretic or friction
systems and velocity-dependent damping devices of viscous or viscoelastic systems. Where damping devices are used
across the isolation interface of a seismically isolated structure, displacements, velocities, and accelerations shall be
determined in accordance with CHAPTER 17. Compliance with these requirements is intended to produce performance
comparable to that of a structure with a conventional seismic force-resisting system, but the same methods can be used to
achieve higher performance.
Chapter 19. Soil–Structure Interaction for Seismic Design— The response of a structure to earthquake shaking is
affected by interactions among three linked systems: the structure, the foundation, and the geologic media underlying and
surrounding the foundation. A seismic soil-structure interaction (SSI) analysis evaluates the collective response of these
systems to a specified free-field ground motion. SSI effects are absent for the theoretical condition of rigid foundation
and soil conditions. Accordingly, SSI effects reflect the differences between the actual response of the structure and the
response for the theoretical, rigid base condition. Visualized within this context, three SSI effects can significantly affect
the response of building structures.
Chapter 20. Site Classification Procedure for Seismic Design—Site classification procedures are given for the
purpose of classifying the site and determining site coefficients and site-adjusted maximum considered earthquake
ground motions in accordance with Section 11.4.3. Site classification procedures are also used to define the site
conditions for which site-specific site response analyses are required to obtain site ground motions in accordance with
Section 11.4.7 and CHAPTER 21.
Chapter 21. Site-Specific Ground Motion Procedures for Seismic Design—The objective of a site-specific ground-
motion analysis is to determine ground motions for local seismic and site conditions. Site-specific ground motion
analysis can consist of one of the following approaches: (a) Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis (PSHA) and possibly
Deterministic Seismic Hazard Analysis (DSHA) if the site is near an active fault, (b) PSHA/DSHA followed by dynamic
site response analysis, and (c) dynamic site response analysis only. The requirements of this chapter need to be satisfied
where site response analysis is performed. Site-specific ground motions are permitted for design of any structure and
required for design of certain structures and certain site soil conditions.
Chapter 22. Seismic Ground Motion Long-Period Transition and Risk Coefficient Maps— This Chapter contains
the following maps: (a) Risk-targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake Ground Motions Maps which provide the
risk-targeted maximum considered earthquake ground motion parameters SS and S1; (b) Risk Coefficient Maps which
provide the risk coefficients CRS and CR1; (c) Long-Period Transition Maps which provides the long-period
transition periods TL for use in applying the seismic provisions of this code; (d) Maximum Considered Earthquake
Geometric Mean (MCEG) PGA Map which provides the maximum considered earthquake geometric mean (MCEG)
peak ground accelerations as a percentage of g for Site Class B.
SBC 301-CR-18 v
Chapter 23. SEISMIC DESIGN REFERENCE DOCUMENTS—This section lists the documents that are referenced
in CHAPTER 11 through CHAPTER 22. The referenced documents are listed herein by the promulgating agency of the
reference document, the reference document identification, the title, and effective date. Unless identified by an asterisk,
the following reference documents are consensus Standards and are to be considered part of this code to the extent
referenced in the specified section. Those reference documents identified by an asterisk (*) are documents developed
within the industry and represent acceptable procedures for design and construction to the extent referred to in the
specified section.
Chapter 24. Reserved for Future Provisions—This chapter is intentionally left blank.
Chapter 25. Reserved for Future Provisions—This chapter is also intentionally left blank.
Chapter 26. Wind Loads: General Requirements — The wind load provisions are presented in CHAPTER 26 through
CHAPTER 31. This chapter provides the basic wind design parameters that are applicable to the various wind load
determination methodologies outlined in Chapter 27 through Chapter 31. Items covered in Chapter 26 include
definitions, ultimate wind speed, exposure categories, internal pressures, enclosure classification, gust-effects, and
topographic factors, among others.
Chapter 27. Wind Loads on Buildings -MWFRS (directional procedure)—This chapter applies to the determination
of main wind force resisting system (MWFRS) wind loads on enclosed, partially enclosed, and open buildings of all
heights using the Directional Procedure. The requirements of this chapter are presented in the two parts. Part 1 applies to
buildings of all heights where it is necessary to separate applied wind loads onto the windward, leeward, and side walls
of the building to properly assess the internal forces in the MWFRS members.; and Part 2 applies to a special class of
buildings designated as enclosed simple diaphragm buildings with h ≤ 50 m.
Chapter 28. Wind Loads on Buildings-MWFRS (Envelope Procedure)—This chapter applies to the determination of
the main wind force resisting system (MWFRS) wind loads on low-rise buildings using the Envelope Procedure. The
requirements of this chapter are presented in two parts. Part 1 applies to all low-rise buildings where it is necessary to
separate applied wind loads onto the windward, leeward, and side walls of the building to properly assess the internal
forces in the MWFRS members. Part 2, however, applies to a special class of low-rise buildings designated as enclosed
simple diaphragm buildings as defined in Section 26.2.
Chapter 29. Wind Loads on Other Structures and Building Appurtenances-MWFRS— This chapter applies to the
determination of wind loads on building appurtenances (such as rooftop structures and rooftop equipment) and other
structures of all heights (such as solid freestanding walls and freestanding solid signs, chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice
frameworks, and trussed towers) using the Directional Procedure.
Chapter 30. Wind Loads – Components and Claddings (C&C)—This chapter applies to the determination of wind
pressures on components and cladding (C&C) on buildings. The prime contents of this chapter are presented in six parts:
(1) Part 1 is applicable to an enclosed or partially enclosed building where the building has a flat roof, gable roof,
multispan gable roof, hip roof, monoslope roof, stepped roof, or sawtooth roof and the wind pressures are calculated from
a wind pressure equation for low-rise building and building with h ≤18 m; Part 2 is a simplified approach and is
applicable to an enclosed building where the building has a flat roof, gable roof, or hip roof and the wind pressures are
determined directly from a table for low-rise building and building with h ≤ 18 m; (3) Part 3 is applicable to an enclosed
or partially enclosed building where the building has a flat roof, pitched roof, gable roof, hip roof, mansard roof, arched
roof, or domed roof and the wind pressures are calculated from a wind pressure equation for building with h > 18 m; (4)
Part 4 is a simplified approach and is applicable to an enclosed building where the building has a flat roof, gable roof, hip
roof, monoslope roof, or mansard roof and the wind pressures are determined directly from a table for Building with h ≤
50 m; (5) Part 5 is applicable to an open building of all heights having a pitched free roof, monoslope free roof, or trough
free roof; and (6) Part 6 is applicable to building appurtenances such as roof overhangs and parapets and rooftop
equipment.
Chapter 31. Wind Tunnel Procedure—This chapter provides the details where wind tunnel procedure or wind tunnel
testing are desired or necessary to be used. The provisions of this chapter are important as For some building shapes wind
tunnel testing can reduce the conservatism due to enveloping of wind loads inherent in the Directional Procedure,
Envelope Procedure, or Analytical Procedure for Components and Cladding. Also, wind tunnel testing accounts for
shielding or channeling and can more accurately determine wind loads for a complex building shape than the Directional
Procedure, Envelope Procedure, or Analytical Procedure for Components and Cladding.
Appendix A. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS— Minimum requirements for quality assurance for seismic
force resisting systems are covered in Chapter 17 of SBC 201, Special Inspections and Tests.
Appendix B. EXISTING BUILDING PROVISIONS— The provisions of this appendix apply to the design and
construction of alterations and additions to existing structures with a change in use.
Appendix C. SERVICEABILITY CONSIDERATIONS—This appendix is not a mandatory part of the code but
provides guidance for design for serviceability in order to maintain the function of a building and the comfort of its
SBC 301-CR-18 vi
occupants during normal usage. Serviceability limits (e.g., maximum static deformations, accelerations, etc.) shall be
chosen with due regard to the intended function of the structure.
Appendix D. Buildings Exempted for Torsional Wind Load Cases—This appendix explains when the torsional wind
load cases need not be considered for a building.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE III
SUMMARY OF CHAPTERS .............................................................................................................................. IV
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................... VIII
CHAPTER 1 —GENERAL...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 —SCOPE.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 —DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 —CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 —BASIC REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 —GENERAL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY ..................................................................................................................... 5
1.6 —CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES ................................................................................... 7
1.7 —ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES .................................................................................. 8
1.8 —LOAD TESTS ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
1.9 —CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................ 8
CHAPTER 2 —COMBINATIONS OF LOADS ............................................................................................. 12
2.1 —GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.2 —SYMBOLS .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.3 —COMBINING FACTORED LOADS USING STRENGTH DESIGN .................................................................................. 12
2.4 —COMBINING NOMINAL LOADS USING ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN .................................................................... 13
2.5 —LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR EXTRAORDINARY EVENTS ....................................................................................... 14
CHAPTER 3 —DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE ................................... 16
3.1 —DEAD LOADS ..................................................................................................................................................... 16
3.2 —SOIL LOADS AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE........................................................................................................ 16
3.3 —CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................... 16
CHAPTER 4 —LIVE LOADS........................................................................................................................ 23
4.1 —DEFINITIONS...................................................................................................................................................... 23
4.2 —LOADS NOT SPECIFIED ....................................................................................................................................... 23
4.3 —UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LIVE LOADS ............................................................................................................. 23
4.4 —CONCENTRATED LIVE LOADS ............................................................................................................................ 24
4.5 —LOADS ON HANDRAIL, GUARDRAIL, GRAB BAR AND VEHICLE BARRIER SYSTEMS, AND FIXED LADDERS ............ 24
4.6 —IMPACT LOADS .................................................................................................................................................. 24
4.7 —REDUCTION IN LIVE LOADS ............................................................................................................................... 25
4.8 —REDUCTION IN ROOF LIVE LOADS ...................................................................................................................... 25
4.9 —CRANE LOADS ................................................................................................................................................... 26
4.10 —CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCED DOCUMENTS ................................................................. 26
CHAPTER 5 FLOOD LOADS....................................................................................................................... 34
5.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................................. 34
5.2 DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
5.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................................ 34
5.4 LOADS DURING FLOODING .................................................................................................................................... 35
5.5 CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. ....................................................................... 37
CHAPTER 6 —RESERVED FOR FUTURE PROVISIONS ......................................................................... 41
CHAPTER 7 —SNOW LOADS .................................................................................................................... 42
CHAPTER 8 —RAIN LOADS ....................................................................................................................... 44
8.1 —SYMBOLS .......................................................................................................................................................... 44
8.2 —ROOF DRAINAGE ............................................................................................................................................... 44
8.3 —DESIGN RAIN LOADS .......................................................................................................................................... 44
8.4 —PONDING INSTABILITY....................................................................................................................................... 44
8.5 —CONTROLLED DRAINAGE ................................................................................................................................... 44
SBC 301-CR-18 ix
CHAPTER 17 —SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR SEISMICALLY ISOLATED STRUCTURES 153
17.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................ 153
17.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 156
17.3 GROUND MOTION FOR ISOLATED SYSTEMS.................................................................................................... 157
17.4 ANALYSIS PROCEDURE SELECTION. ............................................................................................................... 158
17.5 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 158
17.6 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................ 161
17.7 DESIGN REVIEW ............................................................................................................................................. 163
17.8 TESTING ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
CHAPTER 18 —SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES WITH DAMPING SYSTEMS
168
18.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................ 168
18.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 171
18.3 NONLINEAR PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................................. 173
18.4 RESPONSE-SPECTRUM PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................ 174
18.5 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 176
18.6 DAMPED RESPONSE MODIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 179
18.7 SEISMIC LOAD CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ............................................................................. 182
18.8 DESIGN REVIEW ............................................................................................................................................. 184
18.9 TESTING ......................................................................................................................................................... 184
CHAPTER 19 —SOIL–STRUCTURE INTERACTION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN ......................................... 189
19.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................ 189
19.2 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 189
19.3 MODAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURE...................................................................................................................... 191
CHAPTER 20 —SITE CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE FOR SEISMIC DESIGN .................................... 196
20.1 —SITE CLASSIFICATION ................................................................................................................................. 196
20.2 —SITE RESPONSE ANALYSIS FOR SITE CLASS F SOIL ....................................................................................... 196
20.3 —SITE CLASS DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 196
20.4 —DEFINITIONS OF SITE CLASS PARAMETERS .................................................................................................. 197
CHAPTER 21 —SITE-SPECIFIC GROUND MOTION PROCEDURES FOR SEISMIC DESIGN ............... 199
21.1 SITE RESPONSE ANALYSIS .............................................................................................................................. 199
21.2 RISK-TARGETED MAXIMUM CONSIDERED EARTHQUAKE (MCER) GROUND MOTION HAZARD ANALYSIS .... 199
21.3 DESIGN RESPONSE SPECTRUM ........................................................................................................................ 200
21.4 DESIGN ACCELERATION PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................... 200
21.5 MAXIMUM CONSIDERED EARTHQUAKE GEOMETRIC MEAN (MCEG) PEAK GROUND ACCELERATION ........... 201
CHAPTER 22 —SEISMIC GROUND MOTION LONG-PERIOD TRANSITION AND RISK COEFFICIENT
MAPS 203
22.1 —SEISMIC MAPS ............................................................................................................................................ 203
CHAPTER 23 —SEISMIC DESIGN REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .............................................................. 217
23.1 —CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .................................................................. 217
CHAPTER 24 —RESERVED FOR FUTURE PROVISIONS ....................................................................... 220
CHAPTER 25 —RESERVED FOR FUTURE PROVISIONS ....................................................................... 222
CHAPTER 26 —WIND LOADS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 223
26.1 —PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................................................. 223
26.2 —DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 223
26.3 —SYMBOLS .................................................................................................................................................... 225
26.4 —GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 227
26.5 —WIND HAZARD MAP ................................................................................................................................... 227
26.6 —WIND DIRECTIONALITY .............................................................................................................................. 227
26.7 —EXPOSURE .................................................................................................................................................. 227
26.8 —TOPOGRAPHIC EFFECTS .............................................................................................................................. 229
SBC 301-CR-18 x
26.9 —GUST-EFFECTS ............................................................................................................................................ 229
26.10 —ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 230
26.11 —INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT ............................................................................................................. 231
CHAPTER 27 —WIND LOADS ON BUILDINGS-MWFRS (DIRECTIONAL PROCEDURE) ..................... 240
27.1 —SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 240
27.2 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 240
27.3 —VELOCITY PRESSURE .................................................................................................................................. 240
27.4 —WIND LOADS—MAIN WIND FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM .............................................................................. 241
CHAPTER 28 —WIND LOADS ON BUILDINGS-MWFRS (ENVELOPE PROCEDURE) .......................... 255
28.1 —SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 255
28.2 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 255
28.3 —VELOCITY PRESSURE .................................................................................................................................. 255
28.4 —WIND LOADS-MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 256
28.5 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 256
28.6 —WIND LOADS-MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 256
CHAPTER 29 —WIND LOADS ON OTHER STRUCTURES AND BUILDING APPURTENANCES-MWFRS
266
29.1 —SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 266
29.2 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 266
29.3 —VELOCITY PRESSURE .................................................................................................................................. 266
29.4 —DESIGN WIND LOADS—SOLID FREESTANDING WALLS AND SOLID SIGNS .................................................... 267
29.5 —DESIGN WIND LOADS—OTHER STRUCTURES .............................................................................................. 267
29.6 —PARAPETS ................................................................................................................................................... 268
29.7 —ROOF OVERHANGS ...................................................................................................................................... 268
29.8 —MINIMUM DESIGN WIND LOADING .............................................................................................................. 268
CHAPTER 30 —WIND LOADS–COMPONENTS AND CLADDING (C&C) ................................................ 274
30.1 —SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 274
30.2 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 274
30.3 —VELOCITY PRESSURE .................................................................................................................................. 275
30.4 — BUILDING TYPES- PART 1: LOW-RISE BUILDING- ....................................................................................... 275
30.5 —BUILDING TYPES-PART 2: LOW-RISE BUILDINGS (SIMPLIFIED) ................................................................... 276
30.6 —BUILDING TYPES- PART 3: BUILDINGS WITH H > 18 M ................................................................................ 276
30.7 —BUILDING TYPES-PART 4: BUILDINGS WITH H ≤ 50 M (SIMPLIFIED) ............................................................ 277
30.8 —BUILDING TYPES-PART 5: OPEN BUILDINGS ............................................................................................... 278
30.9 —PARAPETS-PART 6: BUILDING APPURTENANCES AND ROOFTOP STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT .................. 278
30.10 —ROOF OVERHANGS ...................................................................................................................................... 279
30.11 —ROOFTOP STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT FOR BUILDINGS WITH H ≤ 18 M .................................................... 279
CHAPTER 31 —WIND TUNNEL PROCEDURE .......................................................................................... 317
31.1 —SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 317
31.2 —TEST CONDITIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 317
31.3 —DYNAMIC RESPONSE ................................................................................................................................... 317
31.4 —LOAD EFFECTS ............................................................................................................................................ 317
31.5 —WIND-BORNE DEBRIS.................................................................................................................................. 318
APPENDIX A —QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS ............................................................................... 319
A.1 —GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................... 319
APPENDIX B —EXISTING BUILDING PROVISIONS ................................................................................... 321
B.1 —SCOPE................................................................................................................................................................. 321
B.2 —STRUCTURALLY INDEPENDENT ADDITIONS......................................................................................................... 321
B.3 —STRUCTURALLY DEPENDENT ADDITIONS ............................................................................................................ 321
B.4 —ALTERATIONS..................................................................................................................................................... 321
B.5 —CHANGE OF USE.................................................................................................................................................. 321
APPENDIX C —SERVICEABILITY CONSIDERATIONS .............................................................................. 324
SBC 301-CR-18 xi
C.1 —SERVICEABILITY CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................................................................... 324
C.2 —DEFLECTION, VIBRATION, AND DRIFT ................................................................................................................. 324
C.3 —DESIGN FOR LONG-TERM DEFLECTION ................................................................................................................ 324
C.4 —CAMBER ............................................................................................................................................................. 324
C.5 —EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION ......................................................................................................................... 324
C.6 —DURABILITY ....................................................................................................................................................... 324
APPENDIX D —BUILDINGS EXEMPTED FROM TORSIONAL WIND LOAD CASES ................................ 330
D.1 —SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................................ 330
D.2 —ONE AND TWO STORY BUILDINGS MEETING THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 330
D.3 —BUILDINGS CONTROLLED BY SEISMIC LOADING ................................................................................................. 330
D.4 —BUILDINGS CLASSIFIED AS TORSIONALLY REGULAR UNDER WIND LOAD ............................................................ 330
D.5 —BUILDINGS WITH DIAPHRAGMS THAT ARE FLEXIBLE AND DESIGNED FOR INCREASED WIND LOADING ............... 330
D.6 —CLASS 1 AND CLASS 2 SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM BUILDINGS (H ≤ 50 M) MEETING THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS .. 330
CHAPTER 1 —GENERAL
SBC 301-CR-18 1
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
Risk Category—A categorization of buildings and 𝑊𝑥 The portion of the total dead load of the
other structures for determination of flood, structure, 𝐷, located or assigned to level 𝑥
wind and earthquake loads based on the 𝐷 Dead load
risk associated with unacceptable 𝐿 Roof live load greater than 1 kN/m2 and
performance. See Table 1-2. floor live load
Strength Design—A method of proportioning 𝐿𝑟 Roof live load of 1 kN/m2 or less
structural members such that the computed 𝑁 Lateral notional load used to evaluate
forces produced in the members by the conformance with minimum structural
factored loads do not exceed the member integrity criteria
design strength (also called “load and 𝑅 Rain load
resistance factor design”).
Temporary Facilities—Buildings or other
structures that are to be in service for a 1.3 —Construction documents
limited time and have a limited exposure
period for environmental loadings. 1.3.1 General. Construction documents shall
Toxic Substance—As defined in SBC201. show the size, section and relative locations of
structural members with floor levels, column
HIGHLY TOXIC. A material which produces a centers and offsets fully dimensioned. The design
lethal dose or lethal concentration that falls within loads and other information pertinent to the
any of the following categories: structural design required by Sections 1.3.1.1
1. A chemical that has a median lethal dose through 1.3.1.8 shall be clearly indicated on the
(LD50) of 50 milligrams or less per construction documents for parts of the building or
kilogram of body weight when administered structure.
orally to albino rats weighing between 200 1.3.1.1 Floor Live Load. The uniformly
and 300 grams each. distributed, concentrated and impact floor live load
2. A chemical that has a median lethal dose used in the design shall be indicated for floor areas.
(LD50) of 200 milligrams or less per Live load reduction of the uniformly distributed
kilogram of body weight when administered floor live loads in accordance with Section 4.7, if
by continuous contact for 24 hours (or less used in the design, shall be indicated for each type
if death occurs within 24 hours) with the of live load used in the design.
bare skin of albino rabbits weighing 1.3.1.2 Roof Live Load. The roof live load used
between 2 and 3 kilograms each. in the design shall be indicated for roof areas. Roof
3. A chemical that has a median lethal live load reduction in accordance with Section 4.8,
concentration (LC50) in air of 200 parts per if used in the design, shall be indicated.
million by volume or less of gas or vapor, or 1.3.1.3 Wind Design Data. The following
2 milligrams per liter or less of mist, fume information related to wind loads shall be shown,
or dust, when administered by continuous regardless of whether wind loads govern the design
inhalation for 1 hour (or less if death occurs of the lateral-force resisting system of the building:
within 1 hour) to albino rats weighing
1. Ultimate wind speed (3-second gust),
between 200 and 300 grams each. Mixtures
km/hr.
of these materials with ordinary materials,
such as water, might not warrant 2. Risk category.
classification as highly toxic. While this 3. Wind exposure, if more than one wind
system is basically simple in application, exposure is utilized, the wind exposure and
any hazard evaluation that is required for the applicable wind direction shall be
precise categorization of this type of indicated.
material shall be performed by experienced, 4. Applicable internal pressure coefficient.
technically competent persons.
5. Design wind pressures to be used for
1.2.2 Symbols exterior component and cladding materials
not specifically designed by the registered
𝐹𝑥 A minimum design lateral force applied to
design professional responsible for the
level 𝑥 of the structure and used for
design of the structure, kN/m2.
purposes of evaluating structural integrity
in accordance with Section 1.5.8
SBC 301-CR-18 2
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
1.3.1.4 Earthquake Design Data. The following 1.3.1.8 System and Components Requiring
information related to seismic loads shall be shown, Special Inspections for Seismic Resistance.
regardless of whether seismic loads govern the
1.3.1.8.1 Construction documents or
design of the lateral force-resisting system of the
specifications shall be prepared for those systems
structure:
and components requiring special inspection for
1. Risk Category seismic resistance as specified in Chapter 17 of
2. Seismic importance factor, 𝐼𝑒 . SBC 201 by the registered design professional
3. Mapped spectral response accelerations 𝑆𝑆 responsible for their design and shall be submitted
and 𝑆1 . for approval.
4. Site class. 1.3.2 Restrictions on Loading. It shall be
5. Design spectral response accelerations 𝑆𝐷𝑆 unlawful to place, or cause or permit to be placed,
and 𝑆𝐷1 . on any floor or roof of a building, structure or
portion thereof, a load greater than is permitted by
6. Seismic design category. these requirements.
7. Basic seismic-force-resisting system(s).
1.3.3 Live Loads Posted. Where the live loads
8. Design base shear(s). for which each floor or portion thereof of a
9. Seismic response coefficient(s), 𝐶𝑆 . commercial or industrial building is or has been
10. Response modification coefficient(s), 𝑅. designed to exceed 2.50 kN/m2, such design live
11. Analysis procedure used. loads shall be conspicuously posted by the owner in
that part of each story in which they apply, using
1.3.1.5 Geotechnical Information. The design durable signs. It shall be unlawful to remove or
load bearing values of soils shall be shown on the deface such notices.
construction documents.
1.3.4 Occupancy Permits for Changed Loads.
1.3.1.6 Flood Load. For buildings located in flood Construction documents for other than residential
hazard areas as established in Section 5.3, the buildings filed with the building official with
following information shall be shown, regardless of applications for permits shall show on each drawing
whether flood loads govern the design of the the live loads per square meter (m2) of area covered
building: for which the building is designed. Occupancy
1. In flood hazard areas not subject to high- permits for buildings hereafter erected shall not be
velocity wave action, the elevation of issued until the floor load signs, required by Section
proposed lowest floor, including 1.3.3 , have been installed.
basement.
2. In flood hazard areas not subject to high- 1.4 —Basic requirements
velocity wave action, the elevation to
which any nonresidential building will be 1.4.1 Strength and Stiffness.
dry flood-proofed. 1.4.1.1 General
3. In flood hazard areas subject to high-
velocity wave action, the proposed 1.4.1.1.1 Buildings and other structures, and
elevation of the bottom of the lowest all parts thereof, shall be designed and constructed
horizontal structural member of the lowest with adequate strength and stiffness to provide
floor, including basement. structural stability, protect nonstructural
components and systems, and meet the
1.3.1.7 Special Loads. Special loads that are serviceability requirements of Section 1.4.2 .
applicable to the design of the building, structure or
portions thereof shall be indicated along with the 1.4.1.1.2 Acceptable strength shall be
specified section of this code that addresses the demonstrated using one or more of the following
special loading condition. procedures:
SBC 301-CR-18 3
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
iii. Subject to the approval of the Building 1.4.1.4.2 Testing. Testing used to
Official for individual projects, the substantiate the performance capability of structural
Performance-Based Procedures of and nonstructural components and their
Section 1.4.1.4 . connections under load shall accurately represent
the materials, configuration, construction, loading
1.4.1.1.3 It shall be permitted to use
intensity, and boundary conditions anticipated in
alternative procedures for different parts of a
the structure. Where an approved industry standard
structure and for different load combinations,
or practice that governs the testing of similar
subject to the limitations of CHAPTER 2 . Where
components exists, the test program and
resistance to extraordinary events is considered, the
determination of design values from the test
procedures of Section 2.5 shall be used. Loads and
program shall be in accordance with those industry
forces for occupancies or uses not covered in this
standards and practices. Where such standards or
chapter shall be subject to the approval of the
practices do not exist, specimens shall be
building official.
constructed to a scale similar to that of the intended
1.4.1.1.4 Lateral force-resisting systems application unless it can be demonstrated that scale
shall meet seismic detailing requirements and effects are not significant to the indicated
limitations prescribed in this code even when wind performance. Evaluation of test results shall be
load effects are greater than seismic load effects. made on the basis of the values obtained from not
1.4.1.2 Strength Procedures. less than 3 tests, provided that the deviation of any
value obtained from any single test does not vary
1.4.1.2.1 Structural and nonstructural from the average value for all tests by more than
components and their connections shall have 15%. If such deviation from the average value for
adequate strength to resist the applicable load any test exceeds 15%, then additional tests shall be
combinations of Section 2.3 of this Code without performed until the deviation of any test from the
exceeding the applicable strength limit states for the average value does not exceed 15% or a minimum
materials of construction. of 6 tests have been performed. No test shall be
1.4.1.3 Allowable Stress Procedures. eliminated unless a rationale for its exclusion is
given.
1.4.1.3.1 Structural and nonstructural Test reports shall document the location, the time
components and their connections shall have and date of the test, the characteristics of the tested
adequate strength to resist the applicable load specimen, the laboratory facilities, the test
combinations of Section 2.4 of this Code without configuration, the applied loading and deformation
exceeding the applicable allowable stresses for the under load, and the occurrence of any damage
materials of construction. sustained by the specimen, together with the
1.4.1.4 Performance-Based Procedures. loading and deformation at which such damage
Structural and nonstructural components and their occurred.
connections shall be demonstrated by analysis or by 1.4.1.4.3 Documentation. The procedures
a combination of analysis and testing to provide a used to demonstrate compliance with this section
reliability not less than that expected for similar and the results of analysis and testing shall be
components designed in accordance with the documented in one or more reports submitted to the
Strength Procedures of Section 1.4.1.2 when Building Official and to an independent peer
subject to the influence of dead, live, review.
environmental, and other loads. Consideration shall
be given to uncertainties in loading and resistance. 1.4.1.4.4 Peer Review. The procedures and
results of analysis, testing, and calculation used to
1.4.1.4.1 Analysis. Analysis shall employ demonstrate compliance with the requirements of
rational methods based on accepted principles of this section shall be subject to an independent peer
engineering mechanics and shall consider all review approved by the Building Official. The peer
significant sources of deformation and resistance. review shall comprise one or more persons having
Assumptions of stiffness, strength, damping, and the necessary expertise and knowledge to evaluate
other properties of components and connections compliance, including knowledge of the expected
incorporated in the analysis shall be based on performance, the structural and component
approved test data or referenced standards. behavior, the particular loads considered, structural
analysis of the type performed, the materials of
construction, and laboratory testing of elements and
SBC 301-CR-18 4
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
components to determine structural resistance and that provides a complete load path capable of
performance characteristics. The review shall transferring loads from their point of origin to the
include the assumptions, criteria, procedures, load-resisting elements.
calculations, analytical models, test setup, test data,
1.4.4.3 The total lateral force shall be distributed to
final drawings, and reports. Upon satisfactory
the various vertical elements of the lateral-force-
completion, the peer reviewers shall submit a letter
resisting system in proportion to their rigidities
to the Building Official indicating the scope of their
considering the rigidity of the horizontal bracing
review and their findings.
system or diaphragm.
1.4.2 Serviceability. Structural systems, and
1.4.4.4 Rigid elements that are assumed not to be
members thereof, shall be designed to have
a part of the lateral-force-resisting system shall be
adequate stiffness to limit deflections, lateral drift,
permitted to be incorporated into buildings
vibration, or any other deformations that adversely
provided that their effect on the action of the system
affect the intended use and performance of
is considered and provided for in design.
buildings and other structures. See Section 12.12 for
drift limits applicable to earthquake loading. 1.4.4.5 Provisions shall be made for the increased
forces induced on resisting elements of the
1.4.2.1 Deflections. The deflections of structural
structural system resulting from torsion due to
members shall not exceed the more restrictive of the
eccentricity between the center of application of the
limitations of Sections 1.4.2.2 through 1.4.2.4 or
lateral forces and the center of rigidity of the lateral-
that permitted by Table 1-1.
force-resisting system.
1.4.2.2 Reinforced Concrete. The deflection of
1.4.5 Counteracting Structural Actions. All
reinforced concrete structural members shall not
structural members and systems, and all
exceed that permitted by SBC 304.
components and cladding in a building or other
1.4.2.3 Steel. The deflection of steel structural structure, shall be designed to resist forces due to
members shall not exceed that permitted by AISC earthquake, wind, soil and hydrostatic pressure and
360, AISI S100, ASCE 8, SJI CJ, SJI JG, SJI K or flood loads with consideration of overturning,
SJI LH/DLH as applicable. sliding, and uplift, and continuous load paths shall
be provided for transmitting these forces to the
1.4.2.4 Masonry. The deflection of masonry
foundation. Where sliding is used to isolate the
structural members shall not exceed that permitted
elements, the effects of friction between sliding
by SBC 305.
elements shall be included as a force. Where all or
1.4.3 Self-Straining Forces. Provision shall be a portion of the resistance to these forces is
made for anticipated self-straining forces arising provided by dead load, the dead load shall be taken
from differential settlements of foundations and as the minimum dead load likely to be in place
from restrained dimensional changes due to during the event causing the considered forces.
temperature, moisture, shrinkage, creep, and similar Consideration shall be given to the effects of
effects. vertical and horizontal deflections resulting from
1.4.4 Analysis. such forces.
SBC 301-CR-18 5
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
1.5.4 The effects on the structure and its in each of two orthogonal directions. In each
components due to the forces stipulated in this direction, the static lateral forces at all levels shall
section shall be taken as the notional load, N, and be applied simultaneously.
combined with the effects of other loads in
1.5.9.2 For purposes of analysis, the force at each
accordance with the load combinations of Section
level shall be determined using Equation (1-3) as
2.3 or Section 1.5.7 .
follows:
1.5.5 Where material resistance is dependent on
load duration, notional loads are permitted to be 𝐹𝑥 = 0.01 𝑊𝑥 (1-3)
taken as having a duration of 10 minutes. where,
1.5.6 Structures designed in conformance with 𝐹𝑥 = The design lateral force applied at story 𝑥;
the requirements of this Code for Seismic Design 𝑊𝑥 = The portion of the total dead load of the
Categories B, C, D, E, or F shall be deemed to structure, 𝐷, located or assigned to level 𝑥.
comply with the requirements of Sections 1.5.8 , 1.5.9.3 Structures explicitly designed for stability,
1.5.9 , 1.5.10 and 1.5.11 . including second-order effects, shall be deemed to
1.5.7 Load Combinations of Integrity Loads. comply with the requirements of this section.
The notional loads, N, specified in Sections 1.5.8 1.5.10 Connection to Supports.
through 1.5.11 shall be combined with other loads
in accordance with Section 1.5.7.1 for strength 1.5.10.1 A positive connection for resisting
design and 0 for allowable stress design. a horizontal force acting parallel to the member
shall be provided for each beam, girder, or truss
1.5.7.1 Strength Design Notional Load either directly to its supporting elements or to slabs
Combinations designed to act as diaphragms.
SBC 301-CR-18 6
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
of the wall. See CHAPTER 12 and CHAPTER 26 for 1.6.3 Toxic, Highly Toxic, and Explosive
earthquake and wind design requirements, Substances.
respectively.
1.6.3.1 Buildings and other structures containing
1.5.12 Extraordinary Loads and Events. toxic, highly toxic, or explosive substances are
permitted to be classified as Risk Category II
1.5.12.1 When considered, design for
structures if it can be demonstrated to the
resistance to extraordinary loads and events shall be
satisfaction of the Building Official by a hazard
in accordance with the procedures of Section 2.5.
assessment as part of an overall risk management
plan (RMP) that a release of the toxic, highly toxic,
or explosive substances is not sufficient to pose a
1.6 —Classification of buildings and threat to the public.
other structures
1.6.3.2 To qualify for this reduced classification,
1.6.1 Risk Categorization. the owner or operator of the buildings or other
1.6.1.1 Buildings and other structures shall be structures containing the toxic, highly toxic, or
classified, based on the risk to human life, health, explosive substances shall have an RMP that
and welfare associated with their damage or failure incorporates three elements as a minimum: a hazard
by nature of their occupancy or use, according to assessment, a prevention program, and an
Table 1-2 for the purposes of applying flood, wind, emergency response plan.
earthquake. 1.6.3.3 As a minimum, the hazard assessment shall
1.6.1.2 Each building or other structure shall be include the preparation and reporting of worst-case
assigned to the highest applicable risk category or release scenarios for each structure under
categories. consideration, showing the potential effect on the
public for each. As a minimum, the worst-case
1.6.1.3 Minimum design loads for structures shall event shall include the complete failure
incorporate the applicable importance factors given (instantaneous release of entire contents) of a
in Table 1-3 as required by other sections of this vessel, piping system, or other storage structure. A
Code. worst-case event includes (but is not limited to) a
1.6.1.4 Assignment of a building or other structure release during the design wind or design seismic
to multiple risk categories based on the type of load event. In this assessment, the evaluation of the
condition being evaluated (e.g., wind, seismic, etc.) effectiveness of subsequent measures for accident
shall be permitted. mitigation shall be based on the assumption that the
complete failure of the primary storage structure
1.6.1.5 When the building code or other referenced has occurred. The offsite impact shall be defined in
standard specifies an Occupancy Category, the Risk terms of population within the potentially affected
Category shall not be taken as lower than the area. To qualify for the reduced classification, the
Occupancy Category specified therein. hazard assessment shall demonstrate that a release
1.6.2 Multiple Risk Categories. of the toxic, highly toxic, or explosive substances
from a worst-case event does not pose a threat to the
1.6.2.1 Where a building or other structure is
public outside the property boundary of the facility.
occupied by two or more occupancies not included
in the same risk category, it shall be assigned the 1.6.3.4 As a minimum, the prevention program
classification of the highest risk category shall consist of the comprehensive elements of
corresponding to the various occupancies. process safety management, which is based upon
accident prevention through the application of
1.6.2.2 Where buildings or other structures are
management controls in the key areas of design,
divided into portions with independent structural
construction, operation, and maintenance.
systems, the classification for each portion shall be
Secondary containment of the toxic, highly toxic, or
permitted to be determined independently.
explosive substances (including, but not limited to,
1.6.2.3 Where building systems, such as required double wall tank, dike of sufficient size to contain a
egress, HVAC, or electrical power, for a portion spill, or other means to contain a release of the
with a higher risk category pass through or depend toxic, highly toxic, or explosive substances within
on other portions of the building or other structure the property boundary of the facility and prevent
having a lower risk category, those portions shall be release of harmful quantities of contaminants to the
assigned to the higher risk category. air, soil, ground water, or surface water) are
SBC 301-CR-18 7
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
permitted to be used to mitigate the risk of release. 1.9 —Consensus standards and
Where secondary containment is provided, it shall other referenced documents
be designed for all environmental loads and is not
eligible for this reduced classification. This section lists the consensus standards and other
documents that are adopted by reference within this
1.6.3.5 As a minimum, the emergency response chapter:
plan shall address public notification, emergency SBC 201, Saudi Building Code-General, Saudi Building
medical treatment for accidental exposure to Code National Committee, 2018.
humans, and procedures for emergency response to SBC 304, Saudi Concrete Structures Code, Saudi
releases that have consequences beyond the Building Code National Committee, 2018.
property boundary of the facility. The emergency
SBC 305, Saudi Masonry Code, Saudi Building Code
response plan shall address the potential that National Committee, 2018.
resources for response could be compromised by
SBC 306, Saudi Steel Structures Code, Saudi Building
the event that has caused the emergency. Code National Committee, 2018.
1.7 —Additions and alterations to SBC 801, Saudi Fire Code, Saudi Building Code
existing structures National Committee, 2018.
Steel Joist Institute (SJI CJ—10). Standard
1.7.1 When an existing building or other Specification for Composite Steel Joists, 1173B
structure is enlarged or otherwise altered, structural London Links Drive, Forest, VA 24551.
members affected shall be strengthened if necessary
Steel Joist Institute (SJI JG—10). Standard
so that the factored loads defined in this document Specification for Joist Girders, 1173B London
will be supported without exceeding the specified Links Drive, Forest, VA 24551.
design strength for the materials of construction. Steel Joist Institute (SJI K—10). Standard Specification
When using allowable stress design, strengthening for Open Web Steel Joists, 1173B London Links
is required when the stresses due to nominal loads Drive, Forest, VA 24551.
exceed the specified allowable stresses for the Steel Joist Institute, (SJI LH/DLH—10). Standard
materials of construction. Specification for Long span Steel Joists/ Deep
1.8 —Load tests Long span Steel Joists, 1173B London Links
Drive, Forest, VA 24551.
1.8.1 A load test of any construction shall be AISC 360-10. Specification for Structural Steel
conducted when required by the Building Official Buildings. Chicago, IL: American Institute of
whenever there is reason to question its safety for Steel Construction, Inc., 2010.
the intended use. AISI S100-12. North American Specification for the
1.8.2 In-situ Load Tests. The building official is Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members.
Washington, DC: American Iron and Steel
authorized to require an engineering analysis or a
Institute, 2012.
load test, or both, of any construction whenever
there is reason to question the safety of the
construction for the intended occupancy or use.
Engineering analysis and load tests shall be
conducted in accordance with Section 1708 of SBC
201, shall be load tested in accordance with Section
1709 of SBC 201.
1.8.3 Preconstruction Load Tests. Materials and
methods of construction that are not capable of
being designed by approved engineering analysis or
that do not comply with the specified material
design standards or alternative test procedures in
accordance Section 1707 of SBC 201.
SBC 301-CR-18 8
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
SBC 301-CR-18 9
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake loads
RISK
NATURE OF OCCUPANCY
CATEGORY
Buildings and other structures that represent a low hazard to human life in the event of failure,
including but not limited to:
• Agricultural facilities.
I
• Certain temporary facilities.
• Minor storage facilities.
II Buildings and other structures except those listed in Risk Categories I, III and IV.
Buildings and other structures that represent a substantial hazard to human life in the event of failure,
including but not limited to:
• Buildings and other structures whose primary occupancy is public assembly with an occupant
load greater than 300.
• Buildings and other structures containing Group E occupancies with an occupant load greater
than 250.
• Buildings and other structures containing educational occupancies for students above the 12𝑡ℎ
grade with an occupant load greater than 500.
III • Group I-2 occupancies with an occupant load of 50 or more resident care recipients but not
having surgery or emergency treatment facilities.
• Group I-3 occupancies.
• Any other occupancy with an occupant load greater than 5,000.a
• Power-generating stations, water treatment facilities for potable water, wastewater treatment
facilities and other public utility facilities not included in Risk Category IV.
• Buildings and other structures not included in Risk Category IV containing quantities of toxic
or explosive materials that:
Exceed maximum allowable quantities per control area as given in Table 307.1(1) or 307.1(2)
of SBC 201 or per outdoor control area in accordance with the SBC 801; and
Are sufficient to pose a threat to the public if released.b
Buildings and other structures designated as essential facilities, including but not limited to:
• Group I-2 occupancies having surgery or emergency treatment facilities.
• Fire, rescue, ambulance and police stations and emergency vehicle garages.
• Designated earthquake, hurricane or other emergency shelters.
• Designated emergency preparedness, communications and operations centers and other
facilities required for emergency response.
• Power-generating stations and other public utility facilities required as emergency backup
IV
facilities for Risk Category IV structures.
• Buildings and other structures containing quantities of highly toxic materials that:
Exceed maximum allowable quantities per control area as given in Table 307.1(2) of SBC 201
or per outdoor control area in accordance with the SBC 801; and
Are sufficient to pose a threat to the public if released.b
• Aviation control towers, air traffic control centers and emergency aircraft hangars.
• Buildings and other structures having critical national defense functions.
• Water storage facilities and pump structures required to maintain water pressure for fire
suppression.
a. For purposes of occupant load calculation, occupancies required by Table 1004.1.2 of SBC 201 to use gross floor area
calculations shall be permitted to use net floor areas to determine the total occupant load.
b. Where approved by the building official, the classification of buildings and other structures as Risk Category III or IV
based on their quantities of toxic, highly toxic or explosive materials is permitted to be reduced to Risk Category II,
provided it can be demonstrated by a hazard assessment in accordance with Section 1.6.3 that a release of the toxic,
highly toxic or explosive materials is not sufficient to pose a threat to the public.
SBC 301-CR-18 10
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL
Table 1-3: Importance factors by risk category of buildings and other structures for
earthquake loadsa
SBC 301-CR-18 11
CHAPTER 2—COMBINATIONS OF LOADS
SBC 301-CR-18 12
CHAPTER 2—COMBINATIONS OF LOADS
factor of 0.9 where the load is permanent determine the combined load effect for strength
or a load factor of 0 for all other conditions. design using a method that is consistent with the
method on which the load combination
2.3.2.3 Effects of one or more loads not acting shall
requirements in Section 2.3.2 are based. Such a
be investigated. The most unfavorable effects from
method must be probability-based and must be
both wind and earthquake loads 𝐸 (note on E: The
accompanied by documentation regarding the
same E from Section 12.4 is used for both Sections
analysis and collection of supporting data that is
2.3.2 and 2.4.1 . Refer to CHAPTER 11 Commentary
acceptable to the Building Official.
for the Seismic Provisions.) shall be investigated,
where appropriate, but they need not be considered 2.4 —Combining nominal loads
to act simultaneously. using allowable stress design
2.3.2.4 Each relevant strength limit state shall be 2.4.1 Basic Combinations. Loads listed herein
investigated. shall be considered to act in the following
2.3.3 Load Combinations Including Flood combinations; whichever produces the most
Load. When a structure is located in a flood zone unfavorable effect in the building, foundation, or
(Section 5.3.1 ), the following load combinations structural member being considered. Effects of one
shall be considered in addition to the basic or more loads not acting shall be considered.
combinations in Section 2.3.2 : 𝐷 1
1. In V-Zones or Coastal A-Zones, 1.0𝑊 in 𝐷 + 𝐿 2
combinations 4 and 6 shall be replaced by
𝐷 + (𝐿𝑟 𝑜𝑟 𝑅) 3
1.0𝑊 + 2.0𝐹𝑎.
2. In non-coastal A-Zones, 1.0𝑊 in 𝐷 + 0.75𝐿 + 0.75(𝐿𝑟 𝑜𝑟 𝑅) 4
combinations 4 and 6 shall be replaced by 𝐷 + (0.6𝑊 𝑜𝑟 0.7𝐸) 5 (2-3)
0.5𝑊 + 1.0𝐹𝑎.
𝐷 + 0.75𝐿 + 0.75(0.6𝑊) + 0.75(𝐿𝑟 𝑜𝑟 𝑅) 6a
2.3.4 Load Combinations Including
𝐷 + 0.75𝐿 + 0.75(0.7𝐸) 6b
Atmospheric Ice Loads (Not applicable to KSA)
2.3.5 Load Combinations Including Self- 0.6𝐷 + 0.6𝑊 7
Straining Loads. 0.6𝐷 + 0.7𝐸 8
2.3.5.1 Where applicable, the structural effects of Exceptions:
load T shall be considered in combination with 1. For nonbuilding structures, in which the
other loads. The load factor on load T shall be wind load is determined from force
established considering the uncertainty associated coefficients, 𝐶𝑓 , identified in Figure 29-2,
with the likely magnitude of the load, the Figure 29-3 and Figure 29-4 and the
probability that the maximum effect of 𝑇 will occur projected area contributing wind force to a
simultaneously with other applied loadings, and the foundation element exceeds 90 m2 on
potential adverse consequences if the effect of T is either a vertical or a horizontal plane. It
greater than assumed. shall be permitted to replace 𝑊 with 0.9𝑊
2.3.5.2 The load factor on 𝑇 shall not have a value in combination 7 for design of the
less than 1.0. foundation, excluding anchorage of the
structure to the foundation.
2.3.5.3 When checking the capacity of a structure
2. It shall be permitted to replace 0.6𝐷 with
or structural element to withstand the effects of self-
0.9𝐷 in combination 8 for the design of
straining loads, the following load combinations
Special Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls,
should be considered, when using strength design:
where the walls satisfy the requirement of
Section 14.5 .
1.2𝐷 + 1.2𝑇 + 0.5𝐿 a
(2-2) 3. Where fluid loads 𝐹 are present, they shall
be included in combinations 1 through 6
1.2𝐷 + 1.6𝐿 + 1.0𝑇 b
and 8 with the same factor as that used for
dead load 𝐷.
2.3.6 Load Combinations for Non-specified
Loads. Where approved by the Building Official, 4. Where loads 𝐻 is present, it shall be
the Registered Design Professional is permitted to included as follows:
SBC 301-CR-18 13
CHAPTER 2—COMBINATIONS OF LOADS
(a) where the effect of 𝐻 adds to the primary combination with these other loads. The fraction of
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a 𝑇 considered in combination with other loads shall
load factor of 1.0; not be less than 0.75.
(b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the primary 2.4.4.3 For typical situations, the following load
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a combinations should be considered for evaluating
load factor of 0.6 where the load is the effects of self-straining loads together with dead
permanent or a load factor of 0 for all and live loads.
other conditions. 1.0𝐷 + 1.0𝑇 a
(2-4)
5. The most unfavorable effects from both 1.0𝐷 + 0.75(𝐿 + 𝑇) b
wind and earthquake loads 𝐸 (note on E:
The same 𝐸 from Section 12.4 is used for
2.5 —Load combinations for
both Sections 2.3.2 and 2.4.1 ) shall be
considered, where appropriate, but they extraordinary events
need not be assumed to act 2.5.1 Applicability. Where required by the
simultaneously. owner or applicable code, strength and stability
6. Increases in allowable stress shall not be shall be checked to ensure that structures are
used with the loads or load combinations capable of withstanding the effects of extraordinary
given in this code unless it can be (i.e., low-probability) events, such as fires,
demonstrated that such an increase is explosions, and vehicular impact without
justified by structural behavior caused by disproportionate collapse.
rate or duration of load. 2.5.2 Load Combinations
7. Crane hook loads need not be combined
2.5.2.1 Capacity. For checking the capacity of a
with roof live load or one-half of the wind
structure or structural element to withstand the
load
effect of an extraordinary event, the following
2.4.2 Load Combinations Including Flood gravity load combination shall be considered:
Load. When a structure is located in a flood zone,
the following load combinations shall be considered (0.9 or 1.2)𝐷 + 𝐴𝑘 + 0.5𝐿 (2-5)
in addition to the basic combinations in Section
2.4.1 : in which 𝐴𝑘 is the load or load effect resulting from
extraordinary event 𝐴.
1. In V-Zones or Coastal A-Zones (Section
5.3.1 ), 1.5Fa shall be added to other loads 2.5.2.2 Residual Capacity. For checking the
in combinations 5, 6, and 7, and 𝐸 shall be residual load-carrying capacity of a structure or
set equal to zero in 5 and 6. structural element following the occurrence of a
damaging event, selected load-bearing elements
2. In non-coastal A-Zones, 0.75𝐹𝑎 shall be
identified by the Registered Design Professional
added to combinations 5, 6, and 7, and
shall be notionally removed, and the capacity of the
𝐸 shall be set equal to zero in 5 and 6.
damaged structure shall be evaluated using the
2.4.3 Load Combinations Including following gravity load combination:
Atmospheric Ice Loads (Not applicable in KSA)
(0.9 𝑜𝑟 1.2)𝐷 + 0.5𝐿 + 0.2 (𝐿𝑟 𝑜𝑟 𝑅) (2-6)
2.4.4 Load Combinations Including Self-
Straining Loads.
2.5.3 Stability Requirements. Stability shall be
2.4.4.1 Where applicable, the structural effects of provided for the structure as a whole and for each
load T shall be considered in combination with of its elements. Any method that considers the
other loads. influence of second-order effects is permitted.
2.4.4.2 Where the maximum effect of load 𝑇 is
unlikely to occur simultaneously with the maximum
effects of other variable loads, it shall be permitted
to reduce the magnitude of 𝑇 considered in
SBC 301-CR-18 14
CHAPTER 2—COMBINATIONS OF LOADS
SBC 301-CR-18 15
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
SBC 301-CR-18 16
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
Load
Component
(kN/m2)
CEILINGS
Acoustical fiber board 0.05
Gypsum board (per mm thickness) 0.01
Mechanical duct allowance 0.20
Plaster on tile or concrete 0.25
Plaster on wood lath 0.40
Suspended steel channel system 0.10
Suspended metal lath and cement plaster 0.75
Suspended metal lath and gypsum plaster 0.50
Wood furring suspension system 0.15
COVERINGS, ROOF, AND WALL
Asbestos-cement shingles 0.20
Asphalt shingles 0.10
Cement tile 0.80
Clay tile (for mortar add 0.5 kN/m2)
Book tile, 50 mm 0.60
Book tile, 75 mm 1.00
Ludowici 0.50
Roman 0.60
Spanish 0.90
Composition:
Three-ply ready roofing 0.05
Four-ply felt and gravel 0.25
Five-ply felt and gravel 0.30
Copper or tin 0.05
Corrugated asbestos-cement roofing 0.20
Deck, metal, 20 gage 0.10
Deck, metal, 18 gage 0.15
Decking, 50-mm wood (Douglas fir) 0.25
Decking, 75-mm wood (Douglas fir) 0.40
Fiberboard, 13 mm 0.05
Gypsum sheathing, 13 mm 0.10
Insulation, roof boards (per mm thickness)
Cellular glass 0.0015
Fibrous glass 0.002
Fiberboard 0.003
Perlite 0.0015
Polystyrene foam 0.0005
Urethane foam with skin 0.001
Plywood (per mm thickness) 0.006
Rigid insulation, 13 mm 0.05
Skylight, metal frame, 10-mm wire glass 0.40
Slate, 5 mm 0.35
Slate, 6 mm 0.50
Waterproofing membranes:
Bituminous, gravel-covered 0.30
SBC 301-CR-18 17
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
Load
Component
(kN/m2)
Bituminous, smooth surface 0.10
Liquid applied 0.05
Single-ply, sheet 0.03
Wood sheathing (per mm thickness)
Plywood 0.006
Oriented strand board 0.0065
Wood shingles 0.15
FLOOR FILL
Cinder concrete, per mm 0.017
Lightweight concrete, per mm 0.015
Sand, per mm 0.015
Stone concrete, per mm 0.023
FLOORS AND FLOOR FINISHES
Asphalt block (50 mm), 13-mm mortar 1.45
Cement finish (25 mm) on stone–concrete fill 1.55
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm) on 13-mm mortar bed 0.80
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm) on 25-mm mortar bed 1.10
Concrete fill finish (per mm thickness) 0.023
Hardwood flooring, 20 mm 0.20
Linoleum or asphalt tile, 6 mm 0.05
Marble and mortar on stone–concrete fill 1.60
Slate (per mm thickness) 0.03
Solid flat tile on 25-mm mortar base 1.10
Subflooring, 20 mm 0.15
Terrazzo (38 mm) directly on slab 0.90
Terrazzo (25 mm) on stone–concrete fill 1.55
Terrazzo (25 mm), 50-mm stone concrete 1.55
Wood block (75 mm) on mastic, no fill 0.50
Wood block (75 mm) on 13-mm mortar base 0.80
FLOORS, WOOD-JOIST (NO PLASTER)
DOUBLE WOOD FLOOR
Joist sizes (mm): 300-mm spacing 400-mm spacing 600-mm spacing (kN/m2)
(kN/m2) (kN/m2)
50 × 150 0.30 0.25 0.25
50 × 200 0.30 0.30 0.25
50 × 250 0.35 0.30 0.30
50 × 300 0.40 0.35 0.30
FRAME PARTITIONS
Movable steel partitions 0.20
Wood or steel studs, 13-mm gypsum board each side 0.40
Wood studs, 51 × 102, unplastered 0.20
Wood studs, 51 × 102, plastered one side 0.60
Wood studs, 51 × 102, plastered two sides 1.00
FRAME WALLS
Exterior stud walls:
50 mm × 100 mm @ 400 mm, 15-mm gypsum, insulated, 10-mm siding 0.55
50 mm × 150 mm @ 400 mm, 15-mm gypsum, insulated, 10-mm siding 0.60
Exterior stud walls with brick veneer 2.30
Windows, glass, frame, and sash 0.40
SBC 301-CR-18 18
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
Load
Component
(kN/m2)
Clay brick wythes:
100 mm 1.90
200 mm 3.80
300 mm 5.50
400 mm 7.50
HOLLOW CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WYTHES:
Wythe thickness (in mm) 100 150 200 250 300
Density of unit (16.5 kN/m3)
No grout 1.05 1.30 1.70 2.00 2.35
1200 mm 1.50 1.95 2.35 2.80
1000 mm Grout 1.60 2.05 2.55 3.00
800 mm Spacing 1.65 2.15 2.70 3.15
600 mm 1.80 2.35 2.95 3.45
400 mm 2.00 2.70 3.35 4.00
Full grout 2.75 3.70 4.70 5.70
Density of unit (19.5 kN/m3)
No grout 1.25 1.35 1.70 2.10 2.40
1200 mm 1.60 2.10 2.60 3.00
1000 mm grout 1.65 2.15 2.70 3.10
800 mm Spacing 1.70 2.25 2.80 3.25
600 mm 1.90 2.45 3.00 3.60
400 mm 2.10 2.80 3.50 4.20
Full grout 2.80 3.90 4.90 5.90
3
Density of unit (21.0 kN/m )
No grout 1.40 1.70 2.15 2.60 3.00
1200 mm 1.60 2.40 2.90 3.45
1000 mm Grout 1.70 2.55 3.10 3.70
800 mm spacing 1.80 2.65 3.25 3.85
600 mm 2.00 2.80 3.50 4.10
400 mm 2.25 3.15 3.95 4.70
Full grout 3.05 4.15 5.25 6.40
Solid concrete masonry unit
Density of unit (16.5 kN/m3) 1.55 2.35 3.20 4.00 4.90
3
Density of unit (19.5 kN/ m ) 1.85 2.85 3.80 4.80 5.80
Density of unit (21.0 kN/ m3) 2.00 3.00 4.15 5.15 6.25
a Weights of masonry include mortar but not plaster. For plaster, add 0.24 kN/m2 for each face plastered. Values given
represent averages. In some cases there is a considerable range of weight for the same construction.
SBC 301-CR-18 19
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
Density Density
Material Material
(kN/m3) (kN/m3)
Aluminum 27 Lime
Bituminous products Hydrated, compacted 7.0
Asphaltum 13.0 Hydrated, loose 5.0
Graphite 21.0 Masonry, ashlar stone
Paraffin 9.0 Granite 26.0
Petroleum, crude 8.5 Limestone, crystalline 26.0
Petroleum, refined 8.0 Limestone, oolitic 21.0
Petroleum, benzine 7.0 Marble 27.0
Petroleum, gasoline 6.5 Sandstone 23.0
Pitch 11.0 Masonry, brick
Tar 12.0 Hard (low absorption) 20.5
Brass 82.5 Medium (medium absorption) 18.0
Bronze 87.0 Soft (high absorption) 16.0
Cast-stone masonry (cement, stone, 23.0 Masonry, concretea
sand)
Cement, portland, loose 14.0 Lightweight units 16.5
Ceramic tile 23.5 Medium weight units 19.5
Charcoal 2.0 Normal weight units 21.0
Cinder fill 9.0 Masonry grout 22.0
Cinders, dry, in bulk 7.0 Masonry, rubble stone
Coal Granite 24.0
Anthracite, piled 8.0 Limestone, crystalline 23.0
Bituminous, piled 7.5 Limestone, oolitic 22.0
Lignite, piled 7.5 Marble 24.5
Peat, dry, piled 3.5 Sandstone 21.5
Concrete, plain Mortar, cement or lime 20.5
Cinder 17.0 Particleboard 7.0
Expanded-slag aggregate 16.0 Plywood 6.0
Haydite (burned-clay aggregate) 14.0 Riprap (not submerged)
Slag 21.0 Limestone 13.0
Stone (including gravel) 23.0 Sandstone 14.0
Vermiculite and perlite 4.0-8.0 Sand
aggregate,
nonload-bearing Clean and dry 14.0
Other light aggregate, load-bearing 11.0- River, dry 17.0
16.5
Concrete, reinforced Slag
Cinder 17.5 Bank 11.0
Slag 22.0 Bank screenings 17.0
Stone (including gravel) 24.0 Machine 15.0
Copper 87.5 Sand 8.0
Cork, compressed 2.0 Slate 27.0
Earth (not submerged) Steel, cold-drawn 77.5
Clay, dry 10.0 Stone, quarried, piled
Clay, damp 17.5 Basalt, granite, gneiss 15.0
SBC 301-CR-18 20
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
Density Density
Material Material
(kN/m3) (kN/m3)
Clay and gravel, dry 16.0 Limestone, marble, quartz 15.0
Silt, moist, loose 12.5 Sandstone 13.0
Silt, moist, packed 15.0 Shale 14.5
Silt, flowing 17.0 Greenstone, hornblende 17.0
Sand and gravel, dry, loose 16.0 Terra cotta, architectural
Sand and gravel, dry, packed 17.5 Voids filled 19.0
Sand and gravel, wet 19.0 Voids unfilled 11.5
Earth (submerged) Tin 72.0
Clay 12.5 Water
Soil 11.0 Fresh 10.0
River mud 14.0 Sea 10.0
Sand or gravel 9.5 Wood, seasoned
Sand or gravel and clay 10.0 Ash, commercial white 6.5
Glass 25.0 Cypress, southern 5.5
Gravel, dry 16.5 Fir, Douglas, coast region 5.5
Gypsum, loose 11.0 Hem fir 4.5
Gypsum, wallboard 8.0 Oak, commercial reds and whites 7.5
Ice 9.0 Pine, southern yellow 6.0
Iron Redwood 4.5
Cast 71.0 Spruce, red, white, and Sitka 4.5
Wrought 75.5 Western hemlock 5.0
Lead 111.5 Zinc, rolled sheet 70.5
a Tabulated values apply to solid masonry and to the solid portion of hollow masonry.
SBC 301-CR-18 21
CHAPTER 3—DEAD LOADS, SOIL LOADS, AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
SBC 301-CR-18 22
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
SBC 301-CR-18 23
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
4.4 —Concentrated live loads at any point on the grab bar to produce the
maximum load effect.
4.4.1 Floors, roofs, and other similar surfaces
shall be designed to support safely the uniformly 4.5.3 Loads on Vehicle Barrier Systems.
distributed live loads prescribed in Section 4.3 or Vehicle barrier systems for passenger vehicles shall
the concentrated load, in kilonewtons (kN), given be designed to resist a single load of 27 kN applied
in Table 4-1, whichever produces the greater load horizontally in any direction to the barrier system,
effects. Unless otherwise specified, the indicated and shall have anchorages or attachments capable
concentration shall be assumed to be uniformly of transferring this load to the structure. For design
distributed over an area 750 mm by 750 mm and of the system, the load shall be assumed to act at
shall be located so as to produce the maximum load heights between 450 mm and 700 mm above the
effects in the members. floor or ramp surface, located to produce the
maximum load effects. The load shall be applied on
an area not to exceed 300 mm by 300 mm. This load
4.5 —Loads on handrail, guardrail, is not required to act concurrently with any handrail
grab bar and vehicle barrier systems, or guardrail system loadings specified in
and fixed ladders Section 4.5.1 . Vehicle barrier systems in garages
accommodating trucks and buses shall be designed
4.5.1 Loads on Handrail and Guardrail in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Systems. All handrail and guardrail systems shall Specifications.
be designed to resist a single concentrated load of
0.9 kN applied in any direction at any point on the 4.5.4 Loads on Fixed Ladders. The minimum
handrail or top rail to produce the maximum load design live load on fixed ladders with rungs shall be
effect on the element being considered and to a single concentrated load of 1.5 kN, and shall be
transfer this load through the supports to the applied at any point to produce the maximum load
structure. effect on the element being considered. The number
and position of additional concentrated live load
4.5.1.1 Further, all handrail and guardrail systems units shall be a minimum of 1 unit of 1.5 kN for
shall be designed to resist a load of 0.75 kN/m every 3.0 m of ladder height.
applied in any direction along the handrail or top
rail. This load need not be assumed to act 4.5.4.1 Where rails of fixed ladders extend above a
concurrently with the load specified in the floor or platform at the top of the ladder, each side
preceding paragraph, and this load need not be rail extension shall be designed to resist a single
considered for the following occupancies: concentrated live load of 0.5 kN in any direction at
any height up to the top of the side rail extension.
1. One- and two-family dwellings. Ships ladders with treads instead of rungs shall have
2. Factory, industrial, and storage minimum design loads as stairs, defined in Table
occupancies, in areas that are not 4-1.
accessible to the public and that serve an
4.6 —Impact loads
occupant load not greater than 50.
However, in such a case a mimimum load 4.6.1 General. The live loads specified in
of 0.3 kN/m shall be considered. Sections 4.3 through 4.5 shall be assumed to include
adequate allowance for ordinary impact conditions.
4.5.1.2 Intermediate rails (all those except the
Provision shall be made in the structural design for
handrail or top rail), and panel fillers shall be
uses and loads that involve unusual vibration and
designed to withstand a horizontally applied normal
impact forces.
load of 0.2 kN on an area not to exceed 300 mm by
300 mm including openings and space between rails 4.6.2 Elevators. All elements subject to dynamic
and located so as to produce the maximum load loads from elevators shall be designed for impact
effects. Reactions due to this loading are not loads and deflection limits prescribed by ASME
required to be superimposed with the loads A17.1.
specified in either preceding paragraph. 4.6.3 Machinery. For the purpose of design, the
4.5.2 Loads on Grab Bar Systems. Grab bar weight of machinery and moving loads shall be
systems shall be designed to resist a single increased as follows to allow for impact: (1) light
concentrated load of 1.1 kN applied in any direction machinery, shaft- or motor-driven, 20 percent; and
(2) reciprocating machinery or power-driven units,
SBC 301-CR-18 24
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
50 percent. All percentages shall be increased 4.8 —Reduction in roof live loads
where specified by the manufacturer.
4.8.1 General. The minimum uniformly
4.7 —Reduction in live loads distributed roof live loads, 𝐿𝑜 in Table 4-1, are
permitted to be reduced in accordance with the
4.7.1 General. Except for roof uniform live
requirements of Sections 4.8.2 and 4.8.3 .
loads, all other minimum uniformly distributed live
loads, 𝐿𝑜 in Table 4-1, shall be permitted to be 4.8.2 Flat, Pitched, and Curved Roofs.
reduced in accordance with the requirements of Ordinary flat, pitched, and curved roofs, and
Sections 4.7.2 through 4.7.6. awning and canopies other than those of fabric
construction supported by a skeleton structure, are
4.7.2 Reduction in Uniform Live Loads.
permitted to be designed for a reduced roof live
Subject to the limitations of Sections 4.7.3 through
load, as specified in Equation (4-2) or other
4.7.6 , members for which a value of KLL AT is 37.0
controlling combinations of loads, as specified in
m2 or more are permitted to be designed for a
CHAPTER 2 , whichever produces the greater load
reduced live load in accordance with the following
effect. In structures such as greenhouses, where
formula:
special scaffolding is used as a work surface for
4.57 workers and materials during maintenance and
𝐿 = 𝐿𝑜 (0.25 + ) (4-1) repair operations, a lower roof load than specified
√𝐾𝐿𝐿 𝐴 𝑇
in Equation (4-2) shall not be used unless approved
where,
by the Building Official. On such structures, the
𝐿 = reduced design live load per m2 of area
minimum roof live load shall be 0.6 kN/m2.
supported by the member;
𝐿𝑜 = unreduced design live load per m2 of area 𝐿𝑟 = 𝐿𝑜 𝑅1 𝑅2
(4-2)
supported by the member (see Table 4-1); where 0.6 ≤ 𝐿𝑟 ≤ 1.0
𝐾𝐿𝐿 = Live load element factor (see Table 4-2); where,
𝐴 𝑇 = Tributary area in m2. 𝐿𝑟 =Reduced design roof live load per m2 of
horizontal projection area supported by the
4.7.2.1 𝐿 shall not be less than 0.50𝐿𝑜 for members
member;
supporting one floor and 𝐿 shall not be less than
𝐿𝑜 = Unreduced design roof live load per m2 of
0.40𝐿𝑜 for members supporting two or more floors.
horizontal projection area supported by the member
4.7.3 Heavy Live Loads. Live loads that exceed (see Table 4-1).
5.0 kN/m2 shall not be reduced. The reduction factors 𝑅1 and 𝑅2 shall be determined
as follows:
Exception: Live loads for members supporting two
or more floors may be permitted to be reduced by a 1 for 𝐴 𝑇 ≤ 18 m2
maximum of 20 percent., but the live load shall be (4-3)
𝑅1 = {1.2 − 0.011𝐴 𝑇 for 18 m2 < 𝐴 𝑇 < 54 m2
not less than L as calculated in Section 4.7.2 . 0.6 for 𝐴 𝑇 ≥ 54 m2
4.7.4 Passenger Vehicle Garages. The live Where
loads shall not be reduced in passenger vehicle 𝐴 𝑇 = Tributary area in m2 supported by the member
garages. and where, for a pitched roof, 𝐹 = 0.12 × slope, with
Exception: Live loads for members supporting two slope expressed in percentage points and, for an
or more floors may be permitted to be reduced by a arch or dome, 𝐹 = rise-to-span ratio multiplied by
maximum of 20 percent, but the live load shall be 32.
not less than 𝐿 as calculated in Section 4.7.2 .
1 for 𝐹 ≤ 4
(4-4)
4.7.5 Assembly Uses. Live loads shall not be 𝑅2 = {1.2 − 0.05𝐹 for 4 < 𝐹 < 12
reduced in assembly uses. 0.6 for 𝐹 ≥ 12
4.7.6 Limitations on One-Way Slabs. The
4.8.3 Special Purpose Roofs. Roofs that have an
tributary area, 𝐴 𝑇 , for one-way slabs shall not
occupancy function, such as roof gardens, assembly
exceed an area defined by the slab span times a
purposes, or other special purposes are permitted to
width normal to the span of 1.5 times the slab span.
have their uniformly distributed live load reduced
in accordance with the requirements of Section 4.7.
SBC 301-CR-18 25
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
SBC 301-CR-18 26
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
Table 4-1: Minimum uniformly distributed live loads, Lo, and minimum concentrated live
loads
Occupancy or Use Uniform (kN/m2) Conc. (kN)
Apartments (see Residential)
Access floor systems
Office use 2.5 9.0
Computer use 5.0 9.0
Armories and drill rooms 7.5a
Assembly areas
Fixed seats (fastened to floor) 3.0a
Follow spot, projections and control rooms 2.5
Lobbies 5.0a
Movable seats 5.0a
Platforms (assembly) 5.0a
Stage floors 7.5a
Assembly areas (other) 5.0a
Balconies and decks 1.5 times the live load for
the area served. Not
required to exceed 5.0
kN/m2
Catwalks for maintenance access 2.0 1.5
Cornices 3.0
Corridors
First floor 5.0
Other floors same as occupancy served
except as indicated
Dining rooms and restaurants 5.0a
Dwellings (see Residential)
Elevator machine room and control room grating (on area of 1.5
50 mm by 50 mm)
Finish light floor plate construction (on area of 25 mm by 25 1.0
mm)
Fire escapes 5.0
On single-family dwellings only 2.0
Fixed ladders See Section 4.5
Garages
Passenger vehicles only 2.0a,b,c
c
Trucks and buses
Handrails, guardrails, and grab bars See Section 4.5
Helipads 3.0d,e e,f,g
non-reducible
Hospitals
Operating rooms, laboratories 3.0 4.5
Patient rooms 2.0 4.5
Corridors above first floor 4.0 4.5
Hotels (see Residential)
Libraries
Reading rooms 3.0 4.5
Stack rooms 7.5a,h 4.5
Corridors above first floor 4.0 4.5
SBC 301-CR-18 27
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
Table 4-1: Minimum uniformly distributed live loads, Lo, and minimum concentrated live
loads
Occupancy or Use Uniform (kN/m2) Conc. (kN)
Manufacturing
Light 6.0a 9.0
Heavy 12.0a 13.5
Mosques 5.0a
Office buildings
File and computer rooms shall be designed for heavier
loads based on anticipated occupancy
Lobbies and first-floor corridors 5.0 9.0
Offices 2.5 9.0
Corridors above first floor 4.0 9.0
Penal institutions
Cell blocks 2.0
Corridors 5.0
Recreational uses
Bowling alleys, poolrooms, and similar uses 4.0a
Dance halls and ballrooms 5.0a
Gymnasiums 5.0a
Reviewing stands, grandstands, and bleachers 5.0a,k
Stadiums and arenas with fixed seats (fastened to the floor) 3.0a,k
Residential
One- and two-family dwellings 1.0
Uninhabitable attics without storage 0.5l
Uninhabitable attics with storage 1.0m,s
Habitable attics and sleeping areas 1.5s
Canopies, including marquees 1.0
All other areas except stairs 2.0
All other residential occupancies
Private rooms and corridors serving them 2.0
Public rooms and corridors serving them 5.0a
Roofs
Ordinary flat, pitched, and curved roofs 1.0n
Roofs used for roof gardens 5.0
Roofs used for other occupancies Same as occupancy served
o o
Roofs used for special purposes
Awnings and canopies
Fabric construction supported by a skeleton structure 0.25 non-reducible
Screen enclosure support frame 0.25 nonreducible and based 1.0
on the tributary area of the
roof supported by the frame
All other construction 1.0
Primary roof members, exposed to a work floor
Single panel point of lower chord of roof trusses or any 9.0
point along primary structural members supporting roofs
over manufacturing, storage warehouses, and repair
garages
All other primary roof members 1.5
All roof surfaces subject to maintenance workers 1.5
Schools
Classrooms 3.0 4.5
SBC 301-CR-18 28
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
Table 4-1: Minimum uniformly distributed live loads, Lo, and minimum concentrated live
loads
Occupancy or Use Uniform (kN/m2) Conc. (kN)
Corridors above first floor 4.0 4.5
First-floor corridors 5.0 4.5
Scuttles, skylight ribs, and accessible ceilings 1.0
Sidewalks, vehicular driveways, and yards subject to 12.0a,p 36.0q
trucking
Stairs and exit ways 5.0 1.5r
One- and two-family dwellings only 2.0 1.5r
All other 5.0 1.5r
Storage areas above ceilings 1.0
Storage warehouses (shall be designed for heavier loads if
required for anticipated storage)
Light 6.0a
Heavy 12.0a
Stores
Retail
First floor 5.0 4.5
Upper floors 4.0 4.5
Wholesale, all floors 6.0a 4.5
Vehicle barriers See Section 4.5
Walkways and elevated platforms (other than exit ways) 3.0
Yards and terraces, pedestrian 5.0a
a Live load reduction for this use is not permitted by Section 4.7 unless specific exceptions apply.
b Floors in garages or portions of a building used for the storage of motor vehicles shall be designed for the uniformly
distributed live loads of Table 4-1 or the following concentrated load: (1) for garages restricted to passenger vehicles
accommodating not more than nine passengers, 13.0 kN acting on an area of 100 mm by 100 mm; and (2) for
mechanical parking structures without slab or deck that are used for storing passenger vehicles only, 10 kN per
wheel.
c Design for trucks and buses shall be per AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications; however, provisions for
fatigue and dynamic load allowance therein are not required to be applied.
d Uniform load shall be 2.0 kN/m2 where the design basis helicopter has a maximum take-off weight of 13.5 kN or
less. This load shall not be reduced.
e Landing areas designed for a design basis helicopter with maximum take-off weight of 13.5 kN shall be identified
with a 13.5 kN weight limitation. The landing area weight limitation shall be indicated by the numeral “13.5” (kN)
located in the bottom right corner of the landing area as viewed from the primary approach path. The indication for
the landing area weight limitation shall be a minimum 1.5 m in height.
f Two single concentrated loads, 2.45 m apart shall be applied on the landing area (representing the helicopter’s two
main landing gear, whether skid type or wheeled type), each having a magnitude of 0.75 times the maximum take-
off weight of the helicopter and located to produce the maximum load effect on the structural elements under
consideration. The concentrated loads shall be applied over an area of 200 mm by 200 mm and are not required to
act concurrently with other uniform or concentrated live loads.
g A single concentrated load of 13.0 kN shall be applied over an area of 100 mm by 100 mm, located so as to produce
the maximum load effects on the structural elements under consideration. The concentrated load is not required to
act concurrently with other uniform or concentrated live loads.
h The loading applies to stack room floors that support non-mobile, double-faced library book stacks subject to the
following limitations: (1) The nominal book stack unit height shall not exceed 2300 mm; (2) the nominal shelf depth
shall not exceed 300 mm for each face; and (3) parallel rows of double-faced book stacks shall be separated by aisles
not less than 900 mm wide.
SBC 301-CR-18 29
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
k In addition to the vertical live loads, the design shall include horizontal swaying forces applied to each row of the
seats as follows: 0.4 kN per linear m of seat applied in a direction parallel to each row of seats and 0.15 kN per linear
m of seat applied in a direction perpendicular to each row of seats. The parallel and perpendicular horizontal swaying
forces need not be applied simultaneously.
l Uninhabitable attic areas without storage are those where the maximum clear height between the joist and rafter is
less than 1100 mm, or where there are not two or more adjacent trusses with web configurations capable of
accommodating an assumed rectangle 1100 mm in height by 600 mm in width, or greater, within the plane of the
trusses. This live load need not be assumed to act concurrently with any other live load requirement.
m Uninhabitable attic areas with storage are those where the maximum clear height between the joist and rafter is 1100
mm or greater, or where there are two or more adjacent trusses with web configurations capable of accommodating
an assumed rectangle 1100 mm in height by 600 mm in width, or greater, within the plane of the trusses. For attics
constructed of trusses, the live load need only be applied to those portions of the bottom chords where both of the
following conditions are met:
i. The attic area is accessible from an opening not less than 500 mm in width by 750 mm in length that is located
where the clear height in the attic is a minimum of 750 mm; and
ii. The slope of the truss bottom chord is no greater than 2 units vertical to 12 units horizontal (9.5% slope). The
remaining portions of the bottom chords shall be designed for a uniformly distributed non-concurrent live load of
not less than 0.5 kN/m2.
n Where uniform roof live loads are reduced to less than 1.0 kN/m2 in accordance with Section 4.8.2 and are applied
to the design of structural members arranged so as to create continuity, the reduced roof live load shall be applied to
adjacent spans or to alternate spans, whichever produces the greatest unfavorable load effect.
o Roofs used for other special purposes shall be designed for appropriate loads as approved by the Building Official.
p Other uniform loads in accordance with an approved method, which contains provisions for truck loadings, shall
also be considered where appropriate.
q The concentrated wheel load shall be applied on an area of 100 mm by 100 mm.
r Minimum concentrated load on stair treads on area of 50 mm by 50 mm is to be applied non-concurrent with the
uniform load.
s Attic spaces served by stairways other than the pull-down type shall be designed to support the minimum live load
specified for habitable attics and sleeping rooms.
SBC 301-CR-18 30
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
Live
Occupancy or Use Load Occupancy or use Live Load (kN/m2)
(kN/m2)
Air conditioning (machine 10.0a Laboratories, scientific 5.0
space)
Amusement park structure 5.0a Laundries 7.2a
Attic, nonresidential Manufacturing, ice 14.5
Nonstorage 1.20 Morgue 6.0
Storage 4.0a Printing plants
Bakery 7.2 Composing rooms 5.0
Boathouse, floors 5.0a Linotype rooms 5.0
Boiler room, framed 14.5a Paper storage d
a Use weight of actual equipment or stored material when greater. Note that fixed service equipment is treated
as a Dead Load instead of Live Load.
b Plus 7.2 kN/m2 for trucks.
c Use American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials or MOMRA Bridge Design
Specifications lane loads. Also subject to not less than 100% maximum axle load.
d Paper storage 2.5 kN/m2 per meter of clear story height.
e As required by Railway Organization.
f Accessible ceilings normally are not designed to support persons. The value in this table is intended to
account for occasional light storage or suspension of items. If it may be necessary to support the weight of
maintenance personnel, this shall be provided for.
SBC 301-CR-18 31
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
Element KLLa
Interior columns 4
Exterior columns without cantilever slabs 4
Edge columns with cantilever slabs 3
Corner columns with cantilever slabs 2
Edge beams without cantilever slabs 2
Interior beams 2
All other members not identified, including: 1
Edge beams with cantilever slabs
Cantilever beams
One-way slabs
Two-way slabs
Members without provisions for continuous shear transfer normal to their span
a
In lieu of the preceding values, KLL is permitted to be calculated.
SBC 301-CR-18 32
CHAPTER 4—LIVE LOADS
SBC 301-CR-18 33
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 34
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 35
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
2. Uplift forces caused by shoaling waves 𝐶𝐷 = Coefficient of drag for breaking waves,
beneath a building or structure, or portion = 1.75 for round piles or columns and
thereof;
= 2.25 for square piles or columns
3. Wave runup striking any portion of the
building or structure;
4. Wave-induced drag and inertia forces; and 𝐷 = Pile or column diameter, in m for circular
sections, or for a square pile or
wave-induced scour at the base of a
building or structure, or its foundation. Column, 1.4 times the width of the pile or
column in m
5.4.4.2 Wave loads shall be included for both V-
𝐻𝑏 = Breaking wave height, in m (see Equation
Zones and A-Zones. In V-Zones, waves are 1.0 m
(5-4))
high, or higher; in coastal floodplains landward of
the V-Zone, waves are less than 1.0 m high. 5.4.4.7 Breaking Wave Loads on Vertical Walls.
5.4.4.3 Non-breaking and broken wave loads shall Maximum pressures and net forces resulting from a
be calculated using the procedures described in normally incident breaking wave acting on a rigid
Sections 5.4.2 and 5.4.3 to calculate hydrostatic and vertical wall shall be calculated by the following:
hydrodynamic loads. 𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐶𝑝 𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠 + 1.2𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠 (5-7)
5.4.4.4 Breaking wave loads shall be calculated And
using the procedures described in Sections 5.4.4.6 𝐹𝑡 = 1.1𝐶𝑝 𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠2 + 2.4𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠2 (5-8)
through 5.4.4.9 . Breaking wave heights used in the Where
procedures described in Sections 5.4.4.6 through 𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥 = Maximum combined dynamic (𝐶𝑝 𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠 )
5.4.4.9 shall be calculated for V-Zones and Coastal and static (1.2𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠 ) wave pressures, also
A-Zones using Eqs. (5-4) and (5-5). referred to as shock pressures in kN/m2
𝐻𝑏 = 0.78 𝑑𝑠 (5-4)
Where 𝐹𝑡 = Net breaking wave force per unit length of
structure, also referred to as shock,
𝐻𝑏 = Breaking wave height in m
impulse, or wave impact force in kN/m,
𝑑𝑠 = Local stillwater depth in m acting near the stillwater elevation
5.4.4.5 The local stillwater depth shall be 𝐶𝑝 = Dynamic pressure Coefficient (1.6 <
calculated using Equation (5-5), unless more 𝐶𝑝 < 3.5) (see Table 5-1)
advanced procedures or laboratory tests permitted
by this section are used. 𝛾𝑤 = Unit weight of water, in kN/m3, = 9.80
kN/m3 for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for
𝑑𝑠 = 0.65(𝐵𝐹𝐸 − 𝐺) (5-5) salt water.
Where
𝑑𝑠 = Stillwater depth in m at base of building or
𝐵𝐹𝐸 = Base Flood Elevation in m other structure where the wave breaks.
𝐺 = Ground elevation in m 5.4.4.7.1 This procedure assumes the
vertical wall causes a reflected or standing wave
5.4.4.6 Breaking Wave Loads on Vertical
against the waterward side of the wall with the crest
Pilings and Columns. The net force resulting from
of the wave at a height of 1.2𝑑𝑠 above the stillwater
a breaking wave acting on a rigid vertical pile or
level. Thus, the dynamic static and total pressure
column shall be assumed to act at the stillwater
distributions against the wall are as shown Figure
elevation and shall be calculated by the following: 5-1
𝐹𝐷 = 0.5𝛾𝑤 𝐶𝐷 𝐷𝐻𝑏2 (5-6) 5.4.4.7.2 This procedure also assumes the
space behind the vertical wall is dry, with no fluid
Where balancing the static component of the wave force on
𝐹𝐷 = Net wave force, in kN the outside of the wall. If free water exists behind
𝛾𝑤 = Unit weight of water, in kN/m3, = 9.80 the wall, a portion of the hydrostatic component of
kN/m3 for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for the wave pressure and force disappears (see Figure
salt water 5-2) and the net force shall be computed by
Equation (5-9) (the maximum combined wave
pressure is still computed with Equation (5-7).
SBC 301-CR-18 36
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
𝐹𝑡 = 1.1𝐶𝑝 𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠2 + 1.9𝛾𝑤 𝑑𝑠2 (5-9) where waves are obliquely incident. Breaking wave
Where forces from non-normally incident waves shall be
𝐹𝑡 = Net breaking wave force per unit length of given by
structure, also referred to as shock, impulse,
or wave impact force in kN/m, acting near 𝐹𝑜𝑖 = 𝐹𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝛼 (5-11)
the stillwater elevation Where
𝐶𝑝 = Dynamic pressure Coefficient (1.6 < 𝐹𝑜𝑖 = Horizontal component of obliquely
𝐶𝑝 < 3.5) (see Table 5-1) incident breaking wave force in kN/m
𝛾𝑤 = Unit weight of water, in kN/m3, = 9.80 𝐹𝑡 = Net breaking wave force acting on a
kN/m3 for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for vertical surface in kN/m
salt water 𝛼 = Horizontal angle between the direction of
𝑑𝑠 = Stillwater depth in m at base of building or wave approach and the vertical surface
other structure where the wave breaks
5.4.5 Impact Loads. Impact loads are those that
5.4.4.8 Breaking Wave Loads on Nonvertical result from debris and any object transported by
Walls. Breaking wave forces given by Eqs. (5-8) floodwaters striking against buildings and
and (5-9) shall be modified in instances where the structures, or parts thereof. Impact loads shall
walls or surfaces upon which the breaking waves be determined using a rational approach as
act are nonvertical. The horizontal component of concentrated loads acting horizontally at the
breaking wave force shall be given by most critical location at or below the DFE.
A method of evaluation of impact load is presented
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 𝐹𝑡 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝛼 (5-10)
in the commentary.
Where
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = Horizontal component of breaking wave
5.5 Consensus Standards and Other
force in kN/m Referenced Documents.
𝐹𝑡 = Net breaking wave force acting on a This section lists the consensus standards and other
vertical surface in kN/m documents that are adopted by reference within this
chapter:
𝛼 = Vertical angle between nonvertical surface
and the horizontal
ASCE/SEI 24 Flood resistant design and construction,
5.4.4.9 Breaking Wave Loads from Obliquely ASCE, 2014.
Incident Waves. Breaking wave forces given by
Eqs. (5-8) and (5-9) shall be modified in instances
SBC 301-CR-18 37
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake loads
.
b This code assigns values for Cp according to building category, with the most important buildings having the largest values of
Cp. Category II buildings are assigned a value of Cp corresponding to a 1 percent probability of exceedance, which is consistent
with wave analysis procedures used by FEMA in mapping coastal flood hazard areas and in establishing minimum floor
elevations. Category I buildings are assigned a value of Cp corresponding to a 50 percent probability of exceedance, but
designers may wish to choose a higher value of Cp. Category III buildings are assigned a value of Cp corresponding to a 0.2
percent probability of exceedance, while Category IV buildings are assigned a value of Cp corresponding to a 0.1 percent
probability of exceedance.
Figure 5-1: Normally Incident Breaking Wave Pressures against a Vertical Wall (Space behind
Vertical Wall is Dry).
SBC 301-CR-18 38
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
Figure 5-2: Normally Incident Breaking Wave Pressures against a Vertical Wall
(Stillwater Level Equal on Both Sides of Wall).
SBC 301-CR-18 39
CHAPTER 5: Flood Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 40
CHAPTER 6: —Reserved for Future Provisions
SBC 301-CR-18 41
CHAPTER 7: —Snow Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 42
CHAPTER 7: —Snow Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 43
CHAPTER 8: —Rain Loads
8.1 —Symbols
𝐴 Roof area serviced by a
single drainage system, in m2 system, and the size of the drainage system. The
𝑖 Design rainfall intensity in mm/h , based on flow rate through a single drainage system is as
the 100-year hourly rainfall rate as follows:
indicated in Figure 8-1 but not less than 180
𝑄 = 0.278 × 10–6 𝐴 × 𝑖 (8-2)
mm/h for all regions of Saudi Arabia, for
100 years recurrence interval and for storm 8.3.4 The hydraulic head, 𝑑ℎ , is related to flow
duration up to two hours. rate, 𝑄, for various drainage systems as shown in
𝑄 Flow rate out of a single drainage system, Table 8-1 .
in m3/s
8.3.5 The hydraulic head, 𝑑ℎ , is zero when the
𝑅 Rain load on the undeflected roof, in
secondary drainage system is simply overflow all
kN/m2. When the phrase “undeflected roof”
along a roof edge.
is used, deflections from loads (including
dead loads) shall not be considered when 8.4 —Ponding instability
determining the amount of rain on the roof
8.4.1 “Ponding” refers to the retention of water
𝑑𝑠 Depth of water on the undeflected roof up
due solely to the deflection of relatively flat roofs.
to the inlet of the secondary drainage
Susceptible bays shall be investigated by structural
system when the primary drainage system
analysis to assure that they possess adequate
is blocked (i.e., the static head), in mm
stiffness to preclude progressive deflection (i.e.,
𝑑ℎ Additional depth of water on the
instability) as rain falls on them. Bays with a roof
undeflected roof above the inlet of the
slope less than 1.2°(degrees), or on which water is
secondary drainage system at its design
impounded upon them (in whole or in part) when
flow (i.e., the hydraulic head), in mm
the primary drain system is blocked, but the
8.2 —Roof drainage secondary drain system is functional, shall be
designated as susceptible bays. Roof surfaces with
Roof drainage systems shall be designed in
accordance with the provisions of the Building a slope of at least 1.2°(degrees) towards points of
Official. The flow capacity of secondary (overflow) free drainage need not be considered a susceptible
drains or scuppers shall not be less than that of the bay. The rain load equal to the design condition for
primary drains or scuppers. a blocked primary drain system shall be used in this
analysis.
8.3 —Design rain loads
8.5 —Controlled drainage
8.3.1 Each portion of a roof shall be designed to
sustain the load of all rainwater that will accumulate 8.5.1 Roofs equipped with hardware to control
on it if the primary drainage system for that portion the rate of drainage shall be equipped with a
is blocked plus the uniform load caused by water secondary drainage system at a higher elevation that
that rises above the inlet of the secondary drainage limits accumulation of water on the roof above that
system at its design flow. elevation. Such roofs shall be designed to sustain
the load of all rainwater that will accumulate on
𝑅 = 0.0098(𝑑𝑠 + 𝑑ℎ ) (8-1) them to the elevation of the secondary drainage
8.3.2 If the secondary drainage systems contain system plus the uniform load caused by water that
drain lines, such lines and their point of discharge rises above the inlet of the secondary drainage
shall be separate from the primary drain lines. system at its design flow (determined from Section
8.3 ). Such roofs shall also be checked for ponding
8.3.3 The depth of water, 𝑑ℎ , above the inlet of instability (determined from Section 8.4).
the secondary drainage system (i.e., the hydraulic
head) is a function of the rainfall intensity, i, at the
site, the area of roof serviced by that drainage
SBC 301-CR-18 44
CHAPTER 8: —Rain Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 45
CHAPTER 8: —Rain Loads
Table 8-1: Flow rate, 𝑸, in cubic meters per second of various drainage systems at various
hydraulic heads, 𝒅𝒉 in millimeters
Hydraulic Head dh, mm.
Drainage System 25 50 65 75 90 100 115 125 175 200
100 mm diameter drain .0051 .0107 .0114
150 mm diameter drain .0063 .0120 .0170 .0240 .0341
200 mm diameter drain .0079 .0145 .0214 .0353 .0536 .0694 .0738
150 mm wide, channel scupperb .0011 .0032 a
.0057 a
.0088 a
.0122 .0202 .0248
a a a
600 mm wide, channel scupper .0045 .0126 .0227 .0353 .0490 .0810 .0992
150 mm wide, 100 mm high, closed a a a
.0011 .0032 .0057 .0088 .0112 .0146 .0160
scupperb
600 mm wide, 100 mm high, closed a a a
.0045 .0126 .0227 .0353 .0447 .0583 .0638
scupper
150 mm wide, 150 mm high, closed a a a
.0011 .0032 .0057 .0088 .0122 .0191 .0216
scupper
600 mm wide, 150 mm high, closed a a a
.0045 .0126 .0227 .0353 .0490 .0765 .0866
scupper
a Interpolation is appropriate, including between widths of each scupper.
b Channel scuppers are open-topped (i.e., 3-sided). Closed scuppers are 4-sided.
SBC 301-CR-18 46
CHAPTER 8: —Rain Loads
SBC 301-CR-18 47
CHAPTER 9: —Reserved for Future Provisions
SBC 301-CR-18 48
CHAPTER 9: —Reserved for Future Provisions
SBC 301-CR-18 49
CHAPTER 10: —Ice Loads-Atmospheric Icing
SBC 301-CR-18 50
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
SBC 301-CR-18 51
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
ACTIVE FAULT—A fault determined to be active capable of occurring on the fault, but not
by the Building Official from properly less than the largest magnitude that has
substantiated data. occurred historically on the fault.
ADDITION—An increase in building area, COMPONENT—A part of an architectural,
aggregate floor area, height, or number of electrical, or mechanical system.
stories of a structure. Component, Nonstructural—A part of an
ALTERATION—Any construction or renovation architectural, mechanical, or electrical
to an existing structure other than an system within or without a building or
addition. nonbuilding structure.
APPENDAGE—An architectural component such Component, Flexible—Nonstructural component
as a canopy, marquee, ornamental balcony, having a fundamental period greater than
or statuary. 0.06 s.
APPROVAL—The written acceptance by the Component, Rigid—Nonstructural component
Building Official of documentation that having a fundamental period less than or
establishes the qualification of a material, equal to 0.06 s.
system, component, procedure, or person to CONCRETE, PLAIN—Concrete that is either
fulfill the requirements of this code for the unreinforced or contains less reinforcement
intended use. than the minimum amount specified in SBC
ATTACHMENTS—Means by which nonstructural 304 for reinforced concrete.
components or supports of nonstructural CONCRETE, REINFORCED—Concrete
components are secured or connected to the reinforced with no less reinforcement than
seismic force-resisting system of the the minimum amount required by SBC 304
structure. Such attachments include anchor prestressed or nonprestressed, and designed
bolts, welded connections, and mechanical on the assumption that the two materials act
fasteners. together in resisting forces.
BASE—The level at which the horizontal seismic CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS—The written,
ground motions are considered to be graphic, electronic, and pictorial
imparted to the structure. documents describing the design, locations,
BASE SHEAR—Total design lateral force or shear and physical characteristics of the project
at the base. required to verify compliance with this
BOUNDARY ELEMENTS—Diaphragm and shear code.
wall boundary members to which the COUPLING BEAM—A beam that is used to
diaphragm transfers forces. Boundary connect adjacent concrete wall elements to
members include chords and drag struts at make them act together as a unit to resist
diaphragm and shear wall perimeters, lateral loads.
interior openings, discontinuities, and DEFORMABILITY—The ratio of the ultimate
reentrant corners. deformation to the limit deformation.
BOUNDARY MEMBERS—Portions along wall High-Deformability Element—An element whose
and diaphragm edges strengthened by deformability is not less than 3.5 where
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement. subjected to four fully reversed cycles at
Boundary members include chords and the limit deformation.
drag struts at diaphragm and shear wall Limited-Deformability Element—An element that is
perimeters, interior openings, neither a low-deformability nor a high-
discontinuities, and reentrant corners. deformability element.
BUILDING—Any structure whose intended use Low-Deformability Element—An element whose
includes shelter of human occupants. deformability is 1.5 or less.
CANTILEVERED COLUMN SYSTEM—A DEFORMATION
seismic force-resisting system in which Limit Deformation—Two times the initial
lateral forces are resisted entirely by deformation that occurs at a load equal to
columns acting as cantilevers from the 40 percent of the maximum strength.
base. Ultimate Deformation—The deformation at which
CHARACTERISTIC EARTHQUAKE—An failure occurs and that shall be deemed to
earthquake assessed for an active fault occur if the sustainable load reduces to 80
having a magnitude equal to the best percent or less of the maximum strength.
estimate of the maximum magnitude
SBC 301-CR-18 52
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
SBC 301-CR-18 53
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
SBC 301-CR-18 54
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
PARTITION—A nonstructural interior wall that STORY—The portion of a structure between the
spans horizontally or vertically from tops of two successive floor surfaces and,
support to support. The supports may be the for the topmost story, from the top of the
basic building frame, subsidiary structural floor surface to the top of the roof surface.
members, or other portions of the partition STORY ABOVE GRADE PLANE—A story in
system. which the floor or roof surface at the top of
P-DELTA EFFECT—The secondary effect on the story is more than 2 m above grade
shears and moments of structural members plane or is more than 4 m above the finished
due to the action of the vertical loads ground level at any point on the perimeter
induced by horizontal displacement of the of the structure.
structure resulting from various loading STORY DRIFT—The horizontal deflection at the
conditions. top of the story relative to the bottom of the
PILE—Deep foundation element, which includes story as determined in Section 12.8.6 .
piers, caissons, and piles. STORY DRIFT RATIO—The story drift, as
PILE CAP—Foundation elements to which piles determined in Section 12.8.6 , divided by
are connected including grade beams and the story height, ℎ𝑠𝑥 .
mats. STORY SHEAR—The summation of design lateral
REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL—An seismic forces at levels above the story
architect or engineer, registered or licensed under consideration.
to practice professional architecture or STRENGTH
engineering. Design Strength—Nominal strength multiplied by a
SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY —A strength reduction factor, .
classification assigned to a structure based Nominal Strength—Strength of a member or cross-
on its Risk Category and the severity of the section calculated in accordance with the
design earthquake ground motion at the site requirements and assumptions of the
as defined in Section 11.4 . strength design methods of this code (or the
SEISMIC FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM reference documents) before application of
—That part of the structural system any strength-reduction factors.
that has been considered in the design to Required Strength—Strength of a member, cross-
provide the required resistance to the section, or connection required to resist
seismic forces prescribed herein. factored loads or related internal moments
SEISMIC FORCES—The assumed forces and forces in such combinations as
prescribed herein, related to the response of stipulated by this code.
the structure to earthquake motions, to be STRUCTURAL HEIGHT—The vertical distance
used in the design of the structure and its from the base to the highest level of the
components. seismic force-resisting system of the
SELF-ANCHORED TANKS OR VESSELS— structure. For pitched or sloped roofs, the
Tanks or vessels that are stable under structural height is from the base to the
design overturning moment without the average height of the roof.
need for mechanical anchors to resist uplift. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS—The visual
SHEAR PANEL—A floor, roof, or wall element observations to determine that the seismic
sheathed to act as a shear wall or force-resisting system is constructed in
diaphragm. general conformance with the construction
SITE CLASS—A classification assigned to a site documents.
based on the types of soils present and their STRUCTURE—That which is built or constructed
engineering properties as defined in and limited to buildings and nonbuilding
CHAPTER 20 . structures as defined herein.
STORAGE RACKS—Include industrial pallet SUBDIAPHRAGM—A portion of a diaphragm
racks, moveable shelf racks, and stacker used to transfer wall anchorage forces to
racks made of cold-formed or hot-rolled diaphragm cross ties.
structural members. Does not include other SUPPORTS—Those members, assemblies of
types of racks such as drive-in and drive- members, or manufactured elements,
through racks, cantilever racks, portable including braces, frames, legs, lugs,
racks, or racks made of materials other than snubbers, hangers, saddles, or struts, and
steel. associated fasteners that transmit loads
SBC 301-CR-18 55
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
between nonstructural components and 𝐴𝑣𝑑 Required area of leg (mm2) of diagonal
their attachments to the structure. reinforcement
TESTING AGENCY—A company or corporation 𝐴𝑥 Torsional amplification factor (Section
that provides testing and/or inspection 12.8.4.5 )
services. 𝑎𝑖 The acceleration at level 𝑖 obtained from a
VENEERS—Facings or ornamentation of brick, modal analysis (Section 13.3.1 )
concrete, stone, tile, or similar materials 𝑎𝑝 The amplification factor related to the
attached to a backing. response of a system or component as
WALL—A component that has a slope of 60° or affected by the type of seismic attachment,
greater with the horizontal plane used to determined in Section 13.3.1
enclose or divide space. 𝑏𝑝 The width of the rectangular glass panel
Bearing Wall—Any wall meeting either of the 𝐶𝑑 deflection amplification factor as given in
following classifications: Table 12-1 , Table 15-1 , or Table 15-2
1. Any metal wall that supports more than 𝐶𝑅 Site-specific risk coefficient at any period;
1.5 N/m of vertical load in addition to its see Section 21.2.1.1
own weight. 𝐶𝑅𝑆 Mapped value of the risk coefficient at
2. Any concrete or masonry wall that short periods as given by Figure 22-5
supports more than 3 N/m of vertical load 𝐶𝑅1 Mapped value of the risk coefficient at a
in addition to its own weight. period of 1 s as given by Figure 22-6.
𝐶𝑠 Seismic response coefficient determined in
Light Frame Wall—A wall with steel studs. Section 12.8.1.1 (dimensionless)
Nonbearing Wall—Any wall that is not a bearing 𝐶𝑇 Building period coefficient in Section
wall. 12.8.2.4
Nonstructural Wall—All walls other than bearing 𝐶𝑣𝑥 Vertical distribution factor as determined in
walls or shear walls. Section 12.8.3
Shear Wall (Vertical Diaphragm) —A wall, bearing 𝑐 Distance from the neutral axis of a flexural
or nonbearing, designed to resist lateral member to the fiber of maximum
forces acting in the plane of the wall compressive strain (mm)
(sometimes referred to as a “vertical 𝐷 The effect of dead load
diaphragm”). 𝐷𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑟 Relative horizontal (drift) displacement,
Structural Wall—Walls that meet the definition for measured over the height of the glass panel
bearing walls or shear walls. under consideration, which causes initial
WALL SYSTEM, BEARING—A structural system glass-to-frame contact. For rectangular
with bearing walls providing support for all glass panels within a rectangular wall
or major portions of the vertical loads. frame, 𝐷𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑟 is set forth in section 13.5.9
Shear walls or braced frames provide 𝐷𝑝𝐼 Seismic relative displacement; see Section
seismic force resistance. 13.3.2
11.3 —Symbols 𝑑𝑐 The total thickness of cohesive soil layers
in the top 30 m; see Section 20.4.4 (m)
The unit dimensions used with the items covered by 𝑑𝑖 The thickness of any soil or rock layer 𝑖
the symbols shall be consistent throughout except (between 0 and 30 m); see Section 20.4.2
where specifically noted. Symbols presented in this (m)
section apply only to the seismic requirements in 𝑑𝑆 The total thickness of cohesionless soil
this code as indicated. layers in the top 30 m; see Section 20.4.3
𝐴𝑐ℎ Cross-sectional area (mm2) of a structural (m)
member measured out-to-out of transverse 𝐸 Effect of horizontal and vertical
reinforcement earthquake- induced forces (Section 12.4 )
𝐴0 Area of the load-carrying foundation (m2) 𝐹𝑎 Short-period site coefficient (at 0.2 s-
𝐴𝑠ℎ Total cross-sectional area of hoop period); see Section 11.4.2
reinforcement (mm2), including 𝐹𝑖 , 𝐹𝑛 , 𝐹𝑥 Portion of the seismic base shear,
supplementary cross-ties, having a spacing 𝑉, induced at Level 𝑖, 𝑛, 𝑜𝑟 𝑥, respectively,
of 𝑠ℎ and crossing a section with a core as determined in Section 12.8.3
dimension of ℎ𝑐
SBC 301-CR-18 56
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
𝐹𝑝 The seismic force acting on a component of 𝐾𝐿/𝑟 The lateral slenderness ratio of a
a structure as determined in Sections compression member measured in terms of
12.11.1 and 13.3.1 its effective length, 𝐾𝐿, and the least radius
𝐹𝑃𝐺𝐴 Site coefficient for PGA; see Section 11.8.3 of gyration of the member cross section, 𝑟
𝐹𝑣 Long-period site coefficient (at 1.0 s- 𝑘 Distribution exponent given in Section
period); see Section 11.4.2 12.8.3
fc′ Specified compressive strength of concrete 𝑘𝑎 Coefficient defined in Sections 12.11.2 and
used in design 12.14.7.5
fs ′ Ultimate tensile strength (MPa) of the bolt, 𝐿 Overall length of the building (m) at the
stud, or insert leg wires. For ASTM A307 base in the direction being analyzed
bolts or A108 studs, it is permitted to be 𝑀𝑡 Torsional moment resulting from
assumed to be 415 Mpa eccentricity between the locations of center
𝑓𝑦 Specified yield strength of reinforcement of mass and the center of rigidity (Section
(MPa) 12.8.4.3 )
𝑓𝑦ℎ Specified yield strength of the special 𝑀𝑡𝑎 Accidental torsional moment as determined
in Section 12.8.4.4
lateral reinforcement (kPa)
𝑣𝑠2 𝑚 A subscript denoting the mode of vibration
𝐺= 𝑔
The average shear modulus for the soils under consideration; that is, 𝑚 = 1 for the
beneath the foundation at large strain levels fundamental mode
(Pa) 𝑁 Standard penetration resistance, ASTM D-
𝑣𝑠20 1586
𝐺0 = The average shear modulus for the
𝑔 𝑁 Number of stories above the base (Section
soils beneath the foundation at small strain 12.8.2.4 )
levels (Pa) ̅
𝑁 Average field standard penetration
𝑔 Acceleration due to gravity resistance for the top 30 m; see Sections
𝐻 Thickness of soil 20.3.3 and 20.4.3
ℎ Height of a shear wall measured as the ̅𝑐ℎ
𝑁 Average standard penetration resistance for
maximum clear height from top of cohesionless soil layers for the top 30 m;
foundation to bottom of diaphragm framing see Sections 20.3.3 and 20.4.3
above, or the maximum clear height from 𝑁𝑖 Standard penetration resistance of any soil
top of diaphragm to bottom of diaphragm or rock layer 𝑖 (between 0 and 30 m); see
framing above Section 20.4.3
ℎ Average roof height of structure with 𝑛 Designation for the level that is uppermost
respect to the base; see CHAPTER 13 in the main portion of the building
ℎ𝑐 Core dimension of a component measured 𝑃𝐺𝐴 Mapped 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝐺 peak ground acceleration
to the outside of the special lateral shown in Figure 22-3.
reinforcement (mm) 𝑃𝐺𝐴𝑀 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝐺 peak ground acceleration adjusted
ℎ𝑖 , ℎ𝑥 The height above the base to Level 𝑖 𝑜𝑟 𝑥, for Site Class effects; see Section 11.8.3
respectively 𝑃𝑥 Total unfactored vertical design load at and
ℎ𝑛 Structural height as defined in Section 11.2 above level 𝑥, for use in Section 12.8.7
ℎ𝑝 The height of the rectangular glass panel 𝑃𝐼 Plasticity index, ASTM D4318
ℎ𝑠𝑥 the story height below Level 𝑥 = 𝑄𝐸 Effect of horizontal seismic (earthquake
(ℎ𝑥 – ℎ𝑥−1 ) induced) forces
𝐼𝑒 The importance factor as prescribed in 𝑅 Response modification coefficient as given
Section 11.5.1 in Table 12-1 or
𝐼0 The static moment of inertia of the load- 𝑅𝑝 Component response modification factor as
carrying foundation defined in Section 13.3.1
𝐼𝑝 The component importance factor as 𝑆𝑆 Mapped 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 , 5 percent damped, spectral
prescribed in Section 13.3.1 response acceleration parameter at short
𝑖 The building level referred to by the periods as defined in Section 11.4.1
subscript 𝑖; 𝑖 = 1 designates the first level 𝑆1 Mapped 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 , 5 percent damped, spectral
above the base response acceleration parameter at a period
𝐾𝑝 The stiffness of the component or of 1 s as defined in Section 11.4.1
attachment, Section 13.6.2
SBC 301-CR-18 57
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
SBC 301-CR-18 58
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
11.4.1.1 Based on the site soil properties, 11.4.4 Design Response Spectrum. Where a
the site shall be classified as Site Class A, B, C, D, design response spectrum is required by this code
E, or F in accordance with CHAPTER 20 . and site-specific ground motion procedures are not
used, the design response spectrum curve shall be
11.4.1.2 Where the soil properties are not
developed as indicated in Figure 11-1 and as
known in sufficient detail to determine the site
follows:
class, Site Class D shall be used unless the Building
Official or geotechnical data determines Site Class 1. For periods less than 𝑇0 , the design spectral
E or F soils are present at the site. response acceleration, 𝑆𝑎 , shall be taken as
11.4.2 Site Coefficients and Risk-Targeted given by Equation (11-5):
Maximum Considered Earthquake (𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 ) 𝑇
𝑆𝑎 = 𝑆𝐷𝑆 (0.4 + 0.6 ) (11-5)
Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters. 𝑇0
11.4.2.1 The 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 spectral response 2. For periods greater than or equal to 𝑇0 and
acceleration parameter for short periods (𝑆𝑀𝑆 ) and less than or equal to 𝑇𝑆 , the design spectral
at 1 s (𝑆𝑀1 ), adjusted for Site Class effects, shall be response acceleration:
determined by Equations (11-1) and (11-2), 𝑆𝑎 = 𝑆𝐷𝑆 (11-6)
respectively. 3. For periods greater than 𝑇𝑆 , and less than
𝑆𝑀𝑆 = 𝐹𝑎 𝑆𝑆 (11-1) or equal to 𝑇𝐿 , the design spectral response
𝑆𝑀1 = 𝐹𝑣 𝑆1 (11-2) acceleration, 𝑆𝑎 , shall be taken as given by
where, Equation (11-7):
𝑆𝑆 = The mapped 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 spectral response 𝑆𝐷1
𝑆𝑎 = (11-7)
acceleration parameter at short periods as 𝑇
determined in accordance with Section 11.4.1 , and 4. For periods greater than 𝑇𝐿 , 𝑆𝑎 , shall be
𝑆1 = The mapped 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 spectral response taken as given by Equation (11-8):
acceleration parameter at a period of 1 s as 𝑆𝐷1 𝑇𝐿
determined in accordance with Section 11.4.1.The 𝑆𝑎 = (11-8)
𝑇2
site coefficients 𝐹𝑎 and 𝐹𝑣 are defined in Table 11-1 where, 𝑆𝐷𝑆 = The design spectral response
and Table 11-2, respectively. acceleration parameter at short periods; 𝑆𝐷1 = The
11.4.2.2 Where the simplified design design spectral response acceleration parameter at
procedure of Section 12.4 is used, the value of 𝐹𝑎 1-s period; 𝑇 = The fundamental period of the
shall be determined in accordance with Section structure, s; 𝑇0 = 0.2 𝑆𝐷1 /𝑆𝐷𝑆 ; 𝑇𝑆 = 𝑆𝐷1 /𝑆𝐷𝑆 ; 𝑇𝐿 =
12.14.8.1 , and the values for 𝐹𝑣 , 𝑆𝑀𝑆 , and 𝑆𝑀1 need Long-period transition period (s) shown in Figure
not be determined. 22-4.
11.4.5 Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered
Earthquake (MCER) Response Spectrum.
11.4.3 Design Spectral Acceleration
Parameters. 11.4.5.1 Where an 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 response
spectrum is required, it shall be determined by
11.4.3.1 Design earthquake spectral multiplying the design response spectrum by 1.5.
response acceleration parameter at short period,
𝑆𝐷𝑆 , and at 1-s period, 𝑆𝐷1 , shall be determined 11.4.6 Site-Specific Ground Motion
from Equations (11-3) and (11-4), respectively. Procedures.
11.4.3.2 Where the alternate simplified 11.4.6.1 The site-specific ground motion
design procedure of Section 12.14 is used, the value procedures set forth in CHAPTER 21 are permitted
of 𝑆𝐷𝑆 shall be determined in accordance with to be used to determine ground motions for any
Section 12.14.8.1 , and the value for 𝑆𝐷1 need not be structure.
determined. 11.4.6.2 A site response analysis shall be
2 performed in accordance with Section 21.1 for
𝑆𝐷𝑆 = 𝑆𝑀𝑆 (11-3) structures on Site Class F sites, unless the exception
3
2 to Section 20.3.1 is applicable.
𝑆𝐷1 = 𝑆𝑀1 (11-4)
3 11.4.6.3 For seismically isolated structures
and for structures with damping systems on sites
SBC 301-CR-18 59
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
with S1 greater than or equal to 0.6, a ground motion 11.6.3 Where 𝑆1 is less than 0.75, the Seismic
hazard analysis shall be performed in accordance Design Category is permitted to be determined from
with Section 21.2 . Table 11-3 alone where all of the following apply:
1. In each of the two orthogonal directions,
the approximate fundamental period of the
11.5 —Importance factor and risk structure, 𝑇𝑎 , determined in accordance
category with Section 12.8.2.4 is less than 0.8𝑇𝑆 ,
11.5.1 Importance Factor. An importance factor, where 𝑇𝑆 is determined in accordance with
Ie, shall be assigned to each structure in accordance Section 11.4.4.
with Table 1-3. 2. In each of two orthogonal directions, the
11.5.2 Protected Access for Risk Category IV. fundamental period of the structure used to
calculate the story drift is less than 𝑇𝑆 .
11.5.2.1 Where operational access to a Risk 3. Equation (12-13) is used to determine the
Category IV structure is required through an seismic response coefficient 𝐶𝑆 .
adjacent structure, the adjacent structure shall
conform to the requirements for Risk Category IV 4. The diaphragms are rigid as defined in
structures. Section 12.3.1 or for diaphragms that are
flexible, the distance between vertical
11.5.2.2 Where operational access is less elements of the seismic force-resisting
than 3 m from an interior lot line or another system does not exceed 12 m.
structure on the same lot, protection from potential
falling debris from adjacent structures shall be 11.6.4 Where the alternate simplified design
provided by the owner of the Risk Category IV procedure of Section 12.14 is used, the Seismic
structure. Design Category is permitted to be determined from
Table 11-3 alone, using the value of 𝑆𝐷𝑆 determined
in Section 12.14.8.1 .
11.6 —Seismic design category
11.6.1 Structures shall be assigned a Seismic 11.7 —Design requirements for
Design Category in accordance with this section. seismic design category A
11.6.1.1 Risk Category I, II, or III structures 11.7.1 Buildings and other structures assigned to
located where the mapped spectral response Seismic Design Category A need only comply with
acceleration parameter at 1-s period, 𝑆1 , is greater the requirements of Section 1.5.
than or equal to 0.75 shall be assigned to Seismic
Design Category E. 11.7.2 Nonstructural components in SDC A are
exempt from seismic design requirements.
11.6.1.2 Risk Category IV structures
located where the mapped spectral response
acceleration parameter at 1-s period, 𝑆1 , is greater 11.8 —Geologic hazards and
than or equal to 0.75 shall be assigned to Seismic
geotechnical investigation
Design Category F.
11.8.1 Site Limitation for Seismic Design
11.6.1.3 All other structures shall be
Categories E and F. A structure assigned to
assigned to a Seismic Design Category based on
Seismic Design Category E or F shall not be located
their Risk Category and the design spectral
where there is a known potential for an active fault
response acceleration parameters, 𝑆𝐷𝑆 and 𝑆𝐷1 ,
to cause rupture of the ground surface at the
determined in accordance with Section 11.4.3 .
structure.
11.6.2 Each building and structure shall be
11.8.2 Geotechnical Investigation Report
assigned to the more severe Seismic Design
Requirements for Seismic Design Categories C
Category in accordance with Table 11-3 or Table
through F. A geotechnical investigation report
11-4 , irrespective of the fundamental period of
shall be provided for a structure assigned to Seismic
vibration of the structure, 𝑇. Design Category C, D, E, or F in accordance with
this section. An investigation shall be conducted
and a report shall be submitted that includes an
SBC 301-CR-18 60
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
evaluation of the following potential geologic and the peak ground acceleration 𝑃𝐺𝐴𝑀 , from
seismic hazards: Equation (11-9):
(a) Slope instability, 𝑃𝐺𝐴𝑀 = 𝐹𝑃𝐺𝐴 𝑃𝐺𝐴 (11-9)
(b) Liquefaction, where,
(c) Total and differential settlement, and 𝑃𝐺𝐴𝑀 = 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝐺 peak ground acceleration
adjusted for Site Class effects.
(d) Surface displacement due to faulting or
seismically induced lateral spreading or 𝑃𝐺𝐴 = Mapped 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝐺 peak ground
lateral flow. acceleration shown Figure
22-3.
The report shall contain recommendations for
foundation designs or other measures to mitigate 𝐹𝑃𝐺𝐴 = Site coefficient from Equation
the effects of the previously mentioned hazards. (11-9)
Exception: Where approved by the Building 3. Assessment of potential consequences of
Official, a site-specific geotechnical report is not liquefaction and soil strength loss,
required where prior evaluations of nearby sites including, but not limited to, estimation of
with similar soil conditions provide direction total and differential settlement, lateral soil
relative to the proposed construction. movement, lateral soil loads on
11.8.3 Additional Geotechnical Investigation foundations, reduction in foundation soil-
Report Requirements for Seismic Design bearing capacity and lateral soil reaction,
Categories D through F. The geotechnical soil downdrag and reduction in axial and
investigation report for a structure assigned to lateral soil reaction for pile foundations,
Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall include increases in soil lateral pressures on
all of the following, as applicable: retaining walls, and flotation of buried
structures.
1. The determination of dynamic seismic
lateral earth pressures on basement and 4. Discussion of mitigation measures such as,
retaining walls due to design earthquake but not limited to, selection of appropriate
ground motions. foundation type and depths, selection of
appropriate structural systems to
2. The potential for liquefaction and soil accommodate anticipated displacements
strength loss evaluated for site peak ground and forces, ground stabilization, or any
acceleration, earthquake magnitude, and
combination of these measures and how
source characteristics consistent with the
they shall be considered in the design of the
𝑀𝐶𝐸𝐺 peak ground acceleration. Peak structure.
ground acceleration shall be determined
based on either (1) a site-specific study
taking into account soil amplification
effects as specified in Section 11.4.6 or (2)
SBC 301-CR-18 61
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
Table 11-3: Seismic Design Category based on short period response acceleration parameter
Risk Category
Value of SDS I or II or III IV
SDS < 0.167 A A
0.167 ≤ SDS < 0.33 B C
0.33 ≤ SDS < 0.50 C D
0.50 ≤ SDS D D
SBC 301-CR-18 62
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
Table 11-4: Seismic Design Category based on 1-s period response acceleration parameter
Risk Category
Value of SD1 I or II or III IV
SD1 < 0.067 A A
0.067 ≤ SD1 < 0.133 B C
0.133 ≤ SD1 < 0.20 C D
0.20 ≤ SD1 D D
Mapped Maximum Considered Geometric Mean (MCEG) Peak Ground Acceleration, PGA
Site Class PGA ≤ 0.1 PGA= 0.2 PGA = 0.3 PGA=0.4 PGA ≥ 0.5
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 0.9
F See Section 11.4.6
Note: Use straight-line interpolation for intermediate values of PGA.
SBC 301-CR-18 63
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
SBC 301-CR-18 64
CHAPTER 11: —Seismic Design Criteria
SBC 301-CR-18 65
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.1 —Structural design basis accordance with this code, and connections shall
develop the strength of the connected members or
12.1.1 Basic Requirements. The seismic analysis the forces indicated in Section 12.1.1 .
and design procedures to be used in the design of
building structures and their members shall be as 12.1.2.2 The deformation of the structure
prescribed in this section. shall not exceed the prescribed limits where the
structure is subjected to the design seismic forces.
12.1.1.1 The building structure shall
include complete lateral and vertical force-resisting 12.1.3 Continuous Load Path and
systems capable of providing adequate strength, Interconnection.
stiffness, and energy dissipation capacity to 12.1.3.1 A continuous load path, or paths,
withstand the design ground motions within the with adequate strength and stiffness shall be
prescribed limits of deformation and strength provided to transfer all forces from the point of
demand. application to the final point of resistance.
12.1.1.2 The design ground motions shall 12.1.3.2 All parts of the structure between
be assumed to occur along any horizontal direction separation joints shall be interconnected to form a
of a building structure. The adequacy of the continuous path to the seismic force-resisting
structural systems shall be demonstrated through system, and the connections shall be capable of
the construction of a mathematical model and transmitting the seismic force (Fp) induced by the
evaluation of this model for the effects of design parts being connected.
ground motions.
12.1.3.3 Any smaller portion of the
12.1.1.3 The design seismic forces, and structure shall be tied to the remainder of the
their distribution over the height of the building structure with elements having a design strength
structure, shall be established in accordance with capable of transmitting a seismic force of 0.133
one of the applicable procedures indicated in times the short period design spectral response
Section 12.6 and the corresponding internal forces acceleration parameter, 𝑆𝐷𝑆 , times the weight of the
and deformations in the members of the structure smaller portion or 5 percent of the portion’s weight,
shall be determined. whichever is greater. This connection force does not
12.1.1.4 An approved alternative procedure apply to the overall design of the seismic force-
shall not be used to establish the seismic forces and resisting system.
their distribution unless the corresponding internal 12.1.3.4 Connection design forces need not
forces and deformations in the members are exceed the maximum forces that the structural
determined using a model consistent with the system can deliver to the connection.
procedure adopted.
12.1.4 Connection to Supports.
Exception: As an alternative, the simplified design
procedures of Section 12.14 is permitted to be used 12.1.4.1 A positive connection for resisting
in lieu of the requirements of Sections 12.1 through a horizontal force acting parallel to the member
12.12 , subject to all of the limitations contained in shall be provided for each beam, girder, or truss
Section 12.14 . either directly to its supporting elements, or to slabs
designed to act as diaphragms. Where the
12.1.2 Member Design, Connection Design, and connection is through a diaphragm, then the
Deformation Limit. member’s supporting element must also be
12.1.2.1 Individual members, including connected to the diaphragm.
those not part of the seismic force–resisting system,
shall be provided with adequate strength to resist
the shears, axial forces, and moments determined in
SBC 301-CR-18 66
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.1.4.2 The connection shall have a Building Official for approval that establish their
minimum design strength of 5 percent of the dead dynamic characteristics and demonstrate their
plus live load reaction. lateral force resistance and energy dissipation
capacity to be equivalent to the structural systems
12.1.5 Foundation Design.
listed in Table 12-1 for equivalent values of
12.1.5.1 The foundation shall be designed response modification coefficient, 𝑅, overstrength
to resist the forces developed and accommodate the factor, 𝛺0 , and deflection amplification factor, 𝐶𝑑 .
movements imparted to the structure by the design
12.2.2 Combinations of Framing Systems in
ground motions.
Different Directions.
12.1.5.2 The dynamic nature of the forces,
the expected ground motion, the design basis for 12.2.2.1 Different seismic force-resisting
strength and energy dissipation capacity of the systems are permitted to be used to resist seismic
structure, and the dynamic properties of the soil forces along each of the two orthogonal axes of the
shall be included in the determination of the structure.
foundation design criteria. 12.2.2.2 Where different systems are used,
12.1.5.3 The design and construction of the respective 𝑅, 𝐶𝑑 , and 𝛺0 coefficients shall apply
foundations shall comply with Section 12.13. to each system, including the structural system
limitations contained in Table 12-1.
12.1.6 Material Design and Detailing
Requirements. Structural elements including 12.2.3 Combinations of Framing Systems in the
foundation elements shall conform to the material Same Direction.
design and detailing requirements set forth in 12.2.3.1 Where different seismic force-
CHAPTER 14 . resisting systems are used in combination to resist
seismic forces in the same direction, other than
12.2 —Structural system selection
those combinations considered as dual systems, the
12.2.1 Selection and Limitations. most stringent applicable structural system
limitations contained in Table 12-1 shall apply and
12.2.1.1 The basic lateral and vertical
the design shall comply with the requirements of
seismic force-resisting system shall conform to one
this section.
of the types indicated in Table 12-1 or a combination
of systems as permitted in Sections 12.2.2 , 12.2.3 , 12.2.3.2 Seismic design coefficients (R,
and 12.2.4 . Each type is subdivided by the types of Cd, and Ω0) Values for Vertical Combinations.
vertical elements used to resist lateral seismic Where a structure has a vertical combination in the
forces. same direction, the following requirements shall
apply:
12.2.1.2 The structural systems used shall
be in accordance with the structural system 12.2.3.2.1 Where the lower system has a
limitations and the limits on structural height, ℎ𝑛 , lower Response Modification Coefficient, R, the
contained in Table 12-1. design coefficients (𝑅, 𝐶𝑑 , and 𝛺0 ) for the upper
system are permitted to be used to calculate the
12.2.1.3 The appropriate response
forces and drifts of the upper system. For the design
modification coefficient, 𝑅, overstrength factor, 𝛺0 ,
of the lower system, the design coefficients (𝑅, 𝐶𝑑 ,
and the deflection amplification factor, 𝐶𝑑 ,
and 𝛺0 ) for the lower system shall be used. Forces
indicated in Table 12-1 shall be used in determining
transferred from the upper system to the lower
the base shear, element design forces, and design
system shall be increased by multiplying by the
story drift.
ratio of the higher response modification coefficient
12.2.1.4 Each selected seismic force- to the lower response modification coefficient.
resisting system shall be designed and detailed in
12.2.3.2.2 Where the upper system has a
accordance with the specific requirements for the
lower Response Modification Coefficient, the
system as set forth in the applicable reference
document listed in Table 12-1 and the additional Design Coefficients (𝑅, 𝐶𝑑 , and 𝛺0 ) for the upper
system shall be used for both systems.
requirements set forth in CHAPTER 14 .
Exceptions:
12.2.1.5 Seismic force-resisting systems not
contained in Table 12-1 are permitted provided
analytical and test data are submitted to the
SBC 301-CR-18 67
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
1. Rooftop structures not exceeding two 12.2.3.4.3 Exception: Resisting elements are
stories in height and 10 percent of the total permitted to be designed using the least value of 𝑅
structure weight. for the different structural systems found in each
2. Other supported structural systems with a independent line of resistance if the following three
weight equal to or less than 10 percent of conditions are met:
the weight of the structure. 1. Risk Category I or II building,
3. Detached one- and two-family dwellings 2. two stories or less above grade plane, and
of light-frame construction.
3. use of light-frame construction or flexible
12.2.3.3 Two Stage Analysis Procedure. diaphragms.
12.2.3.3.1 A two-stage equivalent lateral 12.2.3.4.4 The value of 𝑅 used for design of
force procedure is permitted to be used for diaphragms in such structures shall not be greater
structures having a flexible upper portion above a than the least value of 𝑅 for any of the systems
rigid lower portion, provided the design of the utilized in that same direction.
structure complies with all of the following:
12.2.4 Combination Framing Detailing
(a) The stiffness of the lower portion shall be Requirements.
at least 10 times the stiffness of the upper
12.2.4.1 Structural members common to
portion.
different framing systems used to resist seismic
(b) The period of the entire structure shall not forces in any direction shall be designed using the
be greater than 1.1 times the period of the detailing requirements of CHAPTER 12 required by
upper portion considered as a separate the highest response modification coefficient, 𝑅, of
structure supported at the transition from the connected framing systems.
the upper to the lower portion.
12.2.5 System Specific Requirements. The
(c) The upper portion shall be designed as a
structural framing system shall also comply with
separate structure using the appropriate
the following system specific requirements of this
values of 𝑅 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜌.
section.
(d) The lower portion shall be designed as a
separate structure using the appropriate 12.2.5.1 Dual System. For a dual system,
values of 𝑅 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜌. The reactions from the the moment frames shall be capable of resisting at
upper portion shall be those determined least 25 percent of the design seismic forces. The
from the analysis of the upper portion total seismic force resistance is to be provided by
amplified by the ratio of the 𝑅/𝜌 of the the combination of the moment frames and the
upper portion over 𝑅/𝜌 of the lower shear walls or braced frames in proportion to their
portion. This ratio shall not be less than 1.0. rigidities.
(e) The upper portion is analyzed with the 12.2.5.2 Cantilever Column Systems.
equivalent lateral force or modal response Cantilever column systems are permitted as
spectrum procedure, and the lower portion indicated in Table 12-1 and as follows.
is analyzed with the equivalent lateral force 12.2.5.2.1 The required axial strength of
procedure. individual cantilever column elements, considering
12.2.3.4 Seismic design coefficients ) 𝑹, only the load combinations that include seismic
𝑪𝒅 , and 𝜴𝟎 ) Values for Horizontal load effects, shall not exceed 15 percent of the
Combinations. available axial strength, including slenderness
effects.
12.2.3.4.1 The value of the response
modification coefficient, 𝑅, used for design in the 12.2.5.2.2 Foundation and other elements
direction under consideration shall not be greater used to provide overturning resistance at the base of
than the least value of 𝑅 for any of the systems cantilever column elements shall be designed to
utilized in that direction. resist the seismic load effects including
overstrength factor of Section 12.4.3 .
12.2.3.4.2 The deflection amplification
factor, 𝐶𝑑 , and the overstrength factor, 𝛺0 , shall be 12.2.5.3 Inverted Pendulum-Type
consistent with 𝑅 required in that direction. Structures. Regardless of the structural system
selected, inverted pendulums as defined in Section
SBC 301-CR-18 68
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
11.2 , shall comply with this section. Supporting 12.2.5.6 Steel Ordinary Moment Frames
columns or piers of inverted pendulum-type
12.2.5.6.1 Seismic Design Category D or E.
structures shall be designed for the bending moment
calculated at the base determined using the (a) Single-story steel ordinary moment frames
procedures given in Section 12.8 and varying in structures assigned to Seismic Design
uniformly to a moment at the top equal to one-half Category D or E are permitted up to a
the calculated bending moment at the base. structural height, ℎ𝑛 , of 20 m where the
dead load supported by and tributary to the
12.2.5.4 Increased Structural Height
roof does not exceed 1 kN/m2. In addition,
Limit for Steel Eccentrically Braced Frames,
the dead load of the exterior walls more
Steel Special Concentrically Braced Frames, Steel
than 11 m above the base tributary to the
Buckling-restrained Braced Frames, Steel Special
moment frames shall not exceed 1 kN/m2.
Plate Shear Walls and Special Reinforced Concrete
Shear Walls. The limits on structural height, ℎ𝑛 , in Exception: Single-story structures with
Table 12-1 are permitted to be increased from 50 m steel ordinary moment frames whose
to 75 m for structures assigned to Seismic Design purpose is to enclose equipment or
Categories D or E and from 30 m to 50 m for machinery and whose occupants are
structures assigned to Seismic Design Category F engaged in maintenance or monitoring of
provided the seismic force-resisting systems are that equipment, machinery, or their
limited to steel eccentrically braced frames, steel associated processes shall be permitted to
special concentrically braced frames, steel be of unlimited height where the sum of the
buckling-restrained braced frames, steel special dead and equipment loads supported by and
plate shear walls, or special reinforced concrete tributary to the roof does not exceed 1
cast-in-place shear walls and both of the following kN/m2. In addition, the dead load of the
requirements are met: exterior wall system including exterior
columns more than 11 m above the base
1. The structure shall not have an extreme shall not exceed 1 kN/m2. For determining
torsional irregularity as defined in Table compliance with the exterior wall or roof
12-1 (horizontal structural irregularity Type load limits, the weight of equipment or
1b). machinery, including cranes, not self-
2. The steel eccentrically braced frames, steel supporting for all loads shall be assumed
special concentrically braced frames, steel fully tributary to the area of the adjacent
buckling-restrained braced frames, steel exterior wall or roof not to exceed 56 m2
special plate shear walls or special regardless of their height above the base of
reinforced cast-in-place concrete shear the structure.
walls in any one plane shall resist no more (b) Steel ordinary moment frames in structures
than 60 percent of the total seismic forces assigned to Seismic Design Category D or
in each direction, neglecting accidental E not meeting the limitations set forth in
torsional effects. Section 12.2.5.6.1.a are permitted within
12.2.5.5 Special Moment Frames in light-frame construction up to a structural
Structures Assigned to Seismic Design height, ℎ𝑛 , of 11 m where neither the roof
Categories D through F. dead load nor the dead load of any floor
above the base supported by and tributary
12.2.5.5.1 For structures assigned to Seismic to the moment frames exceeds 1.7 kN/m2.
Design Categories D, E, or F, where a special In addition, the dead load of the exterior
moment frame is required by Table 12-1 due to the walls tributary to the moment frames shall
structural system limitations, the frame shall be not exceed 1 kN/m2.
continuous to the base.
12.2.5.6.2 Seismic Design Category F.
12.2.5.5.2 A special moment frame that is Single-story steel ordinary moment frames in
used but not required by Table 12-1, is permitted to structures assigned to Seismic Design Category F
be discontinued above the base and supported by a are permitted up to a structural height, ℎ𝑛 , of 20 m
more rigid system with a lower response where the dead load supported by and tributary to
modification coefficient, 𝑅, provided that the the roof does not exceed 1 kN/m2. In addition, the
requirements of Sections 12.2.3.2 and 12.3.3.4 are dead load of the exterior walls tributary to the
met. moment frames shall not exceed 1 kN/m2.
SBC 301-CR-18 69
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 70
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 71
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
defined in Table 12-3, shall not be over two stories 5. Design of collector elements, splices, and
or 10 m in structural height, ℎ𝑛 . their connections for which the seismic
load effects including overstrength factor
Exception: The limit does not apply where the
of Section 12.4.3 are used.
“weak” story is capable of resisting a total seismic
force equal to 𝛺0 times the design force prescribed 6. Design of members or connections where
in Section 12.8 . the seismic load effects including
overstrength factor of Section 12.4.3 are
12.3.3.3 Elements Supporting required for design.
Discontinuous Walls or Frames. Structural
7. Diaphragm loads determined using
elements supporting discontinuous walls or frames
Equation (12-29).
of structures having horizontal irregularity Type 4
of Table 12-2 or vertical irregularity Type 4 of Table 8. Structures with damping systems designed
12-3 shall be designed to resist the seismic load in accordance with CHAPTER 18.
effects including overstrength factor of Section 9. Design of structural walls for out-of-plane
12.4.3 . The connections of such discontinuous walls forces, including their anchorage.
or frames to the supporting members shall be
12.3.4.2 Redundancy Factor, ρ, for
adequate to transmit the forces for which the
Seismic Design Categories D through F. For
discontinuous walls or frames were required to be structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D,
designed. and having Extreme Torsional Irregularity as
12.3.3.4 Increase in Forces Due to defined in Table 12-2, Type 1b, 𝜌 shall equal 1.3.
Irregularities for Seismic Design Categories D For other structures assigned to Seismic Design
through F. For structures assigned to Seismic Category D, and for structures assigned to Seismic
Design Category D, E, or F and having a horizontal Design Categories E or F, 𝜌 shall equal 1.3 unless
structural irregularity of Type 1a, 1b, 2, 3, or 4 in one of the following two conditions is met, whereby
Table 12-2 or a vertical structural irregularity of 𝜌 is permitted to be taken as 1.0:
Type 4 in Table 12-3, the design forces determined
(a) Each story resisting more than 35 percent
from Section 12.10.1.1 shall be increased 25
of the base shear in the direction of interest
percent for the following elements of the seismic
shall comply with Table 12-4.
force-resisting system:
(b) Structures that are regular in plan at all
1. Connections of diaphragms to vertical levels provided that the seismic force-
elements and to collectors. resisting systems consist of at least two
2. Collectors and their connections, including bays of seismic force-resisting perimeter
connections to vertical elements, of the framing on each side of the structure in
seismic force-resisting system. each orthogonal direction at each story
Exception: Forces calculated using the seismic resisting more than 35 percent of the base
load effects including overstrength factor of Section shear. The number of bays for a shear wall
12.4.3 need not be increased. shall be calculated as the length of shear
wall divided by the story height or two
12.3.4 Redundancy. A redundancy factor, ρ, shall times the length of shear wall divided by
be assigned to the seismic force-resisting system in the story height, ℎ𝑠𝑥 , for light-frame
each of two orthogonal directions for all structures construction.
in accordance with this section.
A reduction in the value of 𝜌 from 1.3 is not
12.3.4.1 Conditions Where Value of ρ is permitted for structures assigned to Seismic Design
1.0. The value of is permitted to equal 1.0 for the Category D that have an extreme torsional
following: irregularity (Type 1b). Seismic Design Categories
1. Structures assigned to Seismic Design E and F are not also specified because extreme
Category B or C. torsional irregularities are prohibited (see Section
12.3.3.1 ).
2. Drift calculation and P-delta effects.
3. Design of nonstructural components. 12.4 —Seismic load effects and
4. Design of nonbuilding structures that are
combinations
not similar to buildings. 12.4.1 Applicability. All members of the
structure, including those not part of the seismic
SBC 301-CR-18 72
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
force-resisting system, shall be designed using the 𝑆𝐷𝑆 = Design spectral response acceleration
seismic load effects of Section 12.4 unless parameter at short periods obtained from Section
otherwise exempted by this code. Seismic load 11.4.3;
effects are the axial, shear, and flexural member 𝐷 = Effect of dead load.
forces resulting from application of horizontal and Exceptions: The vertical seismic load effect, 𝐸𝑣 , is
vertical seismic forces as set forth in Section 12.4.2. permitted to be taken as zero for either of the
Where specifically required, seismic load effects following conditions:
shall be modified to account for overstrength, as set 1. In Equations (12-1), (12-2), (12-7) and
forth in Section 12.4.3 . (12-8) where 𝑆𝐷𝑆 is equal to or less than
12.4.2 Seismic Load Effect. The seismic load 0.125.
effect, 𝐸, shall be determined in accordance with 2. In Equation (12-2) where determining
the following: demands on the soil–structure interface of
foundations.
1. For use in load combination 5 in Section
2.3.2 or load combinations 5 and 6 in 12.4.2.3 Seismic Load Combinations.
Section 2.4.1 , 𝐸 shall be determined in 12.4.2.3.1 Where the prescribed seismic load
accordance with Equation (12-1) as
effect, 𝐸, defined in Section 12.4.2 is combined with
follows: the effects of other loads as set forth in CHAPTER
𝐸 = 𝐸ℎ + 𝐸𝑣 (12-1) 2 , the seismic load combinations (5 and 7) of
2. For use in load combination 7 in Section Equation (12-5) for structures not subject to flood
2.3.2 or load combination 8 in Section load shall be used in lieu of the seismic load
2.4.1 , 𝐸 shall be determined in accordance combinations (5 and 7) of Equation (2-1) for basic
with Equation (12-2) as follows: combinations for Strength Design.
𝐸 = 𝐸ℎ − 𝐸𝑣 (12-2) (1.2 + 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 𝜌𝑄𝐸 + 𝐿 5
where, (12-5)
(0.9 – 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 𝜌𝑄𝐸 7
𝐸 = Seismic load effect; Notes:
𝐸ℎ = Effect of horizontal seismic forces as defined 1. The load factor on 𝐿 in combination 5 is
in Section 12.4.2.1 ; permitted to equal 0.5 for all occupancies
𝐸𝑣 = Effect of vertical seismic forces as defined in in which 𝐿𝑜 in Table 4-1 is less than or
Section 12.4.2.2 equal to 5 kN/m2, with the exception of
12.4.2.1 Horizontal Seismic Load Effect. garages or areas occupied as places of
The horizontal seismic load effect, 𝐸ℎ , shall be public assembly.
determined in accordance with Equation (12-3) as 2. Where fluid loads 𝐹 are present, they shall
follows: be included with the same load factor as
𝐸ℎ = 𝑄𝐸 (12-3) dead load 𝐷 in combinations 1 through 5
where, and 7. Where load 𝐻 are present, they shall
𝑄𝐸 = Effects of horizontal seismic forces from 𝑉 or be included as follows:
𝐹𝑝 . Where required by Section 12.5.3 or 12.5.4 , such (a) where the effect of 𝐻 adds to the primary
effects shall result from application of horizontal variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a load
forces simultaneously in two directions at right factor of 1.6;
angles to each other; (b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the primary
𝜌 = Redundancy factor, as defined in Section 12.3.4 variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a load
factor of 0.9 where the load is permanent or
a load factor of 0 for all other conditions..
12.4.2.3.2 Where the prescribed seismic load
12.4.2.2 Vertical Seismic Load Effect. effect, 𝐸, defined in Section 12.4.2 is combined with
the effects of other loads as set forth in CHAPTER
12.4.2.2.1 The vertical seismic load effect, 2 , the seismic load combinations (5, 6b and 8) of
𝐸𝑣 , shall be determined in accordance with Equation (12-6) for structures not subject to flood
Equation (12-4) as follows: load shall be used in lieu of the seismic load
𝐸𝑣 = 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝐷 (12-4) combinations (5, 6b and 8) of Equation (2-3) for
where, basic combinations for Allowable Stress Design.
SBC 301-CR-18 73
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 74
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
is combined with the effects of other loads as set 12.5 —Direction of loading
forth in CHAPTER 2 , combinations (5 , 6b and 8) of
Equation (12-11) for structures not subject to flood 12.5.1 Direction of Loading Criteria. The
load shall be used in lieu of the seismic load directions of application of seismic forces used in
the design shall be those which will produce the
combinations (5 , 6b and 8) of Equation (2-3) for
most critical load effects. It is permitted to satisfy
basic combinations for Allowable Stress Design.
this requirement using the procedures of Section
(1.0 + 0.14𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 0.7𝛺𝑜 𝑄𝐸 5. 12.5.2 for Seismic Design Category B, Section
(1.0 + 0.105𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 0.525𝛺𝑜 𝑄𝐸 + 0.75𝐿 12.5.3 for Seismic Design Category C, and Section
6b (12-11)
12.5.4 for Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F.
(0.6 – 0.14𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 0.7𝛺𝑜 𝑄𝐸 8.
12.5.2 Seismic Design Category B. For structures
Notes: assigned to Seismic Design Category B, the design
1. Where fluid loads 𝐹 are present, they shall seismic forces are permitted to be applied
be included in combinations 1 through 6 independently in each of two orthogonal directions
and 8 with the same factor as that used for and orthogonal interaction effects are permitted to
dead load 𝐷. be neglected.
2. Where load 𝐻 is present, it shall be 12.5.3 Seismic Design Category C.
included as follows: 12.5.3.1 Loading applied to structures
(a) where the effect of 𝐻 adds to the assigned to Seismic Design Category C shall, as a
primary variable load effect, include 𝐻 minimum, conform to the requirements of Section
with a load factor of 1.0; 12.5.2 for Seismic Design Category B and the
(b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the requirements of this section.
primary variable load effect, include 𝐻 12.5.3.2 Structures that have horizontal
with a load factor of 0.6 where the load is structural irregularity Type 5 in Table 12-2 shall use
permanent or a load factor of 0 for all other one of the following procedures:
conditions.
(a) Orthogonal Combination Procedure.
12.4.3.3 Allowable Stress Increase for The structure shall be analyzed using the
Load Combinations with Overstrength. equivalent lateral force analysis procedure
12.4.3.3.1 Where allowable stress design of Section 12.8 , the modal response
methodologies are used with the seismic load effect spectrum analysis procedure of Section
defined in Section 12.4.3 applied in load 12.9 , or the linear response history
combinations 5, 6, or 8 of Section 2.4.1 , allowable procedure of Section 16.1, as permitted
stresses are permitted to be determined using an under Section 12.6 , with the loading
allowable stress increase of 1.2. applied independently in any two
orthogonal directions. The requirement of
12.4.3.3.2 This increase shall not be Section 12.5.1 is deemed satisfied if
combined with increases in allowable stresses or members and their foundations are
load combination reductions otherwise permitted designed for 100 percent of the forces for
by this code or the material reference document one direction plus 30 percent of the forces
except for increases due to adjustment factors in for the perpendicular direction. The
accordance with AF&PANDS. combination requiring the maximum
12.4.4 Minimum Upward Force for Horizontal component strength shall be used.
Cantilevers for Seismic Design Categories D (b) Simultaneous Application of Orthogonal
through F. In structures assigned to Seismic Ground Motion. The structure shall be
Design Category D, E, or F, horizontal cantilever analyzed using the linear response history
structural members shall be designed for a procedure of Section 0 or the nonlinear
minimum net upward force of 0.2 times the dead response history procedure of Section 16.2 ,
load in addition to the applicable load combinations as permitted by Section 12.6 , with
of Section 12.4 . orthogonal pairs of ground motion
acceleration histories applied
simultaneously.
12.5.4 Seismic Design Categories D through F.
SBC 301-CR-18 75
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.5.4.1 Structures assigned to Seismic (b) Floor live load in public garages and
Design Category D, E, or F shall, as a minimum, open parking structures need not be
conform to the requirements of Section 12.5.3 . included.
12.5.4.2 In addition, any column or wall 2. Where provision for partitions is required
that forms part of two or more intersecting seismic by Section 4.3.2 in the floor load design,
force-resisting systems and is subjected to axial the actual partition weight or a minimum
load due to seismic forces acting along either weight of 0.5 kN/m2 of floor area,
principal plan axis equaling or exceeding 20 percent whichever is greater.
of the axial design strength of the column or wall 3. Total operating weight of permanent
shall be designed for the most critical load effect equipment.
due to application of seismic forces in any direction. 4. Weight of landscaping and other materials
12.5.4.3 Either of the procedures of Section at roof gardens and similar areas.
12.5.3 a or b are permitted to be used to satisfy this 12.7.3 Structural Modeling. A mathematical
requirement. model of the structure shall be constructed for the
12.5.4.4 Except as required by Section purpose of determining member forces and
12.7.3 , 2-D analyses are permitted for structures structure displacements resulting from applied
with flexible diaphragms. loads and any imposed displacements or P-delta
effects. The model shall include the stiffness and
12.6 —Analysis procedure selection strength of elements that are significant to the
The structural analysis required by CHAPTER 12 distribution of forces and deformations in the
shall consist of one of the types permitted in Table structure and represent the spatial distribution of
12-5 , based on the structure’s seismic design mass and stiffness throughout the structure.
category, structural system, dynamic properties, In addition, the model shall comply with the
and regularity, or with the approval of the Building following:
Official, an alternative generally accepted (a) Stiffness properties of concrete and
procedure is permitted to be used. The analysis masonry elements shall consider the effects
procedure selected shall be completed in of cracked sections.
accordance with the requirements of the (b) For steel moment frame systems, the
corresponding section referenced in Table 12-5. contribution of panel zone deformations to
overall story drift shall be included.
12.7 —Modeling criteria Structures that have horizontal structural
irregularity Type 1a, 1b, 4, or 5 of Table 12-2 shall
12.7.1 Foundation Modeling. For purposes of be analyzed using a 3-D representation. Where a 3-
determining seismic loads, it is permitted to D model is used, a minimum of three dynamic
consider the structure to be fixed at the base. degrees of freedom consisting of translation in two
Alternatively, where foundation flexibility is orthogonal plan directions and rotation about the
considered, it shall be in accordance with Section vertical axis shall be included at each level of the
12.13.3 or CHAPTER 19 . structure. Where the diaphragms have not been
12.7.2 Effective Seismic Weight. The effective classified as rigid or flexible in accordance with
seismic weight, 𝑊, of a structure shall include the Section 12.3.1 , the model shall include
dead load, as defined in Section 1.1, above the base representation of the diaphragm’s stiffness
and other loads above the base as listed below: characteristics and such additional dynamic degrees
of freedom as are required to account for the
1. In areas used for storage, a minimum of 25 participation of the diaphragm in the structure’s
percent of the floor live load shall be dynamic response.
included. Exception: Analysis using a 3-D representation is
Exceptions: not required for structures with flexible diaphragms
(a) Where the inclusion of storage loads that have Type 4 horizontal structural irregularities.
adds no more than 5% to the effective 12.7.4 Interaction Effects. Moment-resisting
seismic weight at that level, it need not frames that are enclosed or adjoined by elements
be included in the effective seismic that are more rigid and not considered to be part of
weight. the seismic force-resisting system shall be designed
SBC 301-CR-18 76
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.8.1.1 Calculation of Seismic Response 12.8.1.3.1 For regular structures five stories
Coefficient. or less above the base as defined in Section 11.2 and
with a period, 𝑇, of 0.5 s or less, 𝐶𝑠 is permitted to
12.8.1.1.1 The seismic response coefficient, be calculated using a value of 1.5 for 𝑆𝑆 .
𝐶𝑠 , shall be determined in accordance with Equation
(12-13). 12.8.2 Period Determination.
SDS 12.8.2.1 The fundamental period of the
𝐶𝑠 = (12-13) structure, 𝑇, in the direction under consideration
(R⁄Ie )
shall be established using the structural properties
where,
and deformational characteristics of the resisting
𝑆𝐷𝑆 = The design spectral response acceleration
elements in a properly substantiated analysis.
parameter in the short period range as determined
from Section 11.4.3 or 11.4.6; 12.8.2.2 The fundamental period, 𝑇, shall
𝑅 = The response modification factor in Table 12-1; not exceed the product of the coefficient for upper
𝐼𝑒 = The importance factor determined in limit on calculated period (𝐶𝑢 ) from Table 12-6 and
accordance with Section 11.5.1. the approximate fundamental period, 𝑇𝑎 ,
determined in accordance with Section 12.8.2.4 .
12.8.1.1.2 The value of 𝐶𝑠 computed in
accordance with Equation (12-13) need not exceed 12.8.2.3 As an alternative to performing an
the following: analysis to determine the fundamental period, 𝑇, it
SD1 is permitted to use the approximate building period,
𝐶𝑠 = for 𝑇 ≤ 𝑇𝐿 (12-14) 𝑇𝑎 , calculated in accordance with Section 12.8.2.4 ,
(𝑇(R⁄Ie )) directly.
SD1 𝑇𝐿
𝐶𝑠 = 2 for 𝑇 > 𝑇𝐿 (12-15) 12.8.2.4 Approximate Fundamental
(𝑇 (R⁄Ie )) Period.
12.8.1.1.3 𝐶𝑠 shall not be less than 12.8.2.4.1 The approximate fundamental
Cs = 0.044 SDS Ie ≥ 0.01 (12-16) period (𝑇𝑎 .), in s, shall be determined from the
following equation:
12.8.1.1.4 In addition, for structures located
where 𝑆1 is equal to or greater than 0.6g, 𝐶𝑠 shall 𝑇𝑎 = 𝐶𝑡 ℎ𝑛 𝑥 (12-18)
not be less than
SBC 301-CR-18 77
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
where, ℎ𝑛 is the structural height as defined in ℎ𝑖 and ℎ𝑥 = the height (m) from the base to Level 𝑖
Section 11.2; the coefficients 𝐶𝑡 and 𝑥 are or 𝑥;
determined from Table 12-7 . 𝑘 = an exponent related to the structure period as
follows:
12.8.2.4.2 Alternatively, it is permitted to
determine the a proximate fundamental period (a) For structures having a period of 0.5 s or
(𝑇𝑎 .), in s, from the following equation for less, 𝑘 = 1.
structures not exceeding 12 stories above the base (b) For structures having a period of 2.5 s or
as defined in Section 11.2 where the seismic force- more, 𝑘 = 2.
resisting system consists entirely of concrete or (c) For structures having a period between 0.5
steel moment resisting frames and the average story and 2.5 s, 𝑘 shall be 2 or shall be
height is at least 3 m: determined by linear interpolation between
𝑇𝑎 = 0.1𝑁 1 and 2.
(12-19)
where N = number of stories above the base. 12.8.4 Horizontal Distribution of Forces.
12.8.2.4.3 The approximate fundamental 12.8.4.1 The seismic design story shear in
period, 𝑇𝑎 , in seconds for masonry or concrete shear any story (𝑉𝑥 in kN) shall be determined from the
wall structures not exceeding 37 m in height is following equation:
permitted to be determined from Equation (12-20) 𝑛
as follows: 𝑉𝑥 = ∑ 𝐹𝑖 (12-24)
0.0019 𝑖=𝑥
𝑇𝑎 = ℎ𝑛 (12-20) where, 𝐹𝑖 = the portion of the seismic base shear (𝑉
√𝐶𝑤 in kN) induced at Level 𝑖.
where 𝐶𝑤 is calculated from Equation (12-21) as
follows: 12.8.4.2 The seismic design story shear
𝑥 (𝑉𝑥 in kN) shall be distributed to the various vertical
100 𝐴𝑖 elements of the seismic force-resisting system in the
𝐶𝑤 = ∑
𝐴𝐵 ℎ 2
𝑖=1 [1 + 0.83 ( 𝑛 ) ] (12-21) story under consideration based on the relative
𝐷𝑖 lateral stiffness of the vertical resisting elements
and the diaphragm.
where, 12.8.4.3 Inherent Torsion.
𝐴𝐵 = Area of base of structure, m2;
𝐴𝑖 = Web area of shear wall i in m2; 12.8.4.3.1 For diaphragms that are not
𝐷𝑖 = Length of shear wall i in m; flexible, the distribution of lateral forces at each
𝑥 = Number of shear walls in the building effective level shall consider the effect of the inherent
in resisting lateral forces in the direction under torsional moment, 𝑀𝑡 , resulting from eccentricity
consideration. between the locations of the center of mass and the
center of rigidity.
12.8.3 Vertical Distribution of Seismic Forces.
The lateral seismic force (𝐹𝑥 in kN) induced at any 12.8.4.3.2 For flexible diaphragms, the
level shall be determined from the following distribution of forces to the vertical elements shall
equations: account for the position and distribution of the
masses supported.
𝐹𝑥 = 𝐶𝑣𝑥 𝑉 (12-22)
and 12.8.4.4 Accidental Torsion.
𝑤𝑥 ℎ𝑥𝑘 12.8.4.4.1 Where diaphragms are not flexible,
𝐶𝑣𝑥 = ℎ𝑛 (12-23)
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑤𝑖 ℎ𝑖𝑘 the design shall include the inherent torsional
where, moment (𝑀𝑡 ) resulting from the location of the
𝐶𝑣𝑥 = vertical distribution factor; structure masses plus the accidental torsional
𝑉 = total design lateral force or shear at the base of moments (𝑀𝑡𝑎 ) caused by assumed displacement of
the structure (kN); the center of mass each way from its actual location
𝑤𝑖 and 𝑤𝑥 = the portion of the total effective by a distance equal to 5 percent of the dimension of
seismic weight of the structure (𝑊) located or the structure perpendicular to the direction of the
assigned to Level 𝑖 or 𝑥; applied forces.
SBC 301-CR-18 78
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.8.4.4.2 Where earthquake forces are story drift, 𝛥, shall be computed as the largest
applied concurrently in two orthogonal directions, difference of the deflections of vertically aligned
the required 5 percent displacement of the center of points at the top and bottom of the story under
mass need not be applied in both of the orthogonal consideration along any of the edges of the
directions at the same time, but shall be applied in structure.
the direction that produces the greater effect.
12.8.6.5 The deflection at Level 𝑥 (𝛿𝑥 in
12.8.4.5 Amplification of Accidental mm) used to compute the design story drift, 𝛥, shall
Torsional Moment. be determined in accordance with the following
12.8.4.5.1 Torsional Moment Structures equation:
assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F, 𝛿𝑥 = 𝐶𝑑 𝛿𝑥𝑒 /𝐼𝑒
where Type 1a or 1b torsional irregularity exists as (12-26)
defined in Table 12-2 shall have the effects
accounted for by multiplying 𝑀𝑡𝑎 at each level by a where, 𝐶𝑑 = the deflection amplification factor in
torsional amplification factor (𝐴𝑥 ) as illustrated in Table 12-1; 𝛿𝑥𝑒 = the deflection at the location
Figure 12-3 and determined from the following required by this section determined by an elastic
equation: analysis; 𝐼𝑒 = The importance factor determined in
2
accordance with Section 11.5.1.
δmax
𝐴𝑥 = ( ) (12-25) 12.8.6.6 Minimum Base Shear for
1.2δavg Computing Drift.
where,
δmax = the maximum displacement at Level 𝑥 12.8.6.6.1 The elastic analysis of the seismic
computed assuming 𝐴𝑥 = 1 (mm); force-resisting system for computing drift shall be
δavg = The average of the displacements at the made using the prescribed seismic design forces of
Section 12.8 .
extreme points of the structure at Level 𝑥 computed
assuming 𝐴𝑥 = 1 (mm). Exception: Equation (12-16) need not be
considered for computing drift.
12.8.4.5.2 The torsional amplification factor
(𝐴𝑥 ) shall not be less than 1 and is not required to 12.8.6.7 Period for Computing Drift.
exceed 3.0. The more severe loading for each
12.8.6.7.1 For determining compliance with
element shall be considered for design. the story drift limits of Section 12.12.1 , it is
12.8.5 Overturning. permitted to determine the elastic drifts, (𝛿𝑥𝑒 ),
using seismic design forces based on the computed
12.8.5.1 The structure shall be designed to
fundamental period of the structure without the
resist overturning effects caused by the seismic
upper limit (𝐶𝑢 𝑇𝑎 ) specified in Section 12.8.2 .
forces determined in Section 12.8.3 .
12.8.7 P-Delta Effects.
12.8.6 Story Drift Determination.
12.8.7.1 P-delta effects on story shears and
12.8.6.1 The design story drift (𝛥) shall be
moments, the resulting member forces and
computed as the difference of the deflections at the
moments, and the story drifts induced by these
centers of mass at the top and bottom of the story
effects are not required to be considered where the
under consideration. See Figure 12-4.
stability coefficient (𝜃) as determined by the
12.8.6.2 Where centers of mass do not align following equation is equal to or less than 0.10:
vertically, it is permitted to compute the deflection 𝑃𝑥 ∆𝐼𝑒
at the bottom of the story based on the vertical θ= (12-27)
projection of the center of mass at the top of the 𝑉𝑥 ℎ𝑠𝑥 𝐶𝑑
story. where,
𝑃𝑥 = The total vertical design load at and above
12.8.6.3 Where allowable stress design is Level 𝑥 (kN); where computing 𝑃𝑥 , no individual
used, Δ shall be computed using the strength level load factor need exceed 1.0;
seismic forces specified in Section 12.8 without 𝛥 = The design story drift as defined in Section
reduction for allowable stress design. 12.8.6 occurring simultaneously with 𝑉𝑥 (mm);
12.8.6.4 For structures assigned to Seismic 𝐼𝑒 = The importance factor determined in
Design Category C, D, E, or F having horizontal accordance with Section 11.5.1;
irregularity Type 1a or 1b of Table 12-2, the design
SBC 301-CR-18 79
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
𝑉𝑥 = The seismic shear force acting between Levels 12.9.3 Combined Response Parameters. The
𝑥 and 𝑥 – 1 (kN); value for each parameter of interest calculated for
ℎ𝑠𝑥 = The story height below Level 𝑥 (mm); the various modes shall be combined using the
𝐶𝑑 = The deflection amplification factor in Table square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS)
12-1. method, the complete quadratic combination
(CQC) method, the complete quadratic
12.8.7.2 The stability coefficient (𝜃) shall
combination method as modified by ASCE 4
not exceed θmax determined as follows:
(CQC-4), or an approved equivalent approach. The
0.5 CQC or the CQC-4 method shall be used for each
𝜃𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ≤ 0.25 (12-28)
of the modal values where closely spaced modes
𝛽𝐶𝑑
where, 𝛽 is the ratio of shear demand to shear have significant cross correlation of translational
capacity for the story between Levels 𝑥 and 𝑥 – 1. and torsional response.
This ratio is permitted to be conservatively taken as 12.9.4 Scaling Design Values of Combined
1.0. Response. A base shear (𝑉) shall be calculated in
12.8.7.3 Where the stability coefficient (𝜃) each of the two orthogonal horizontal directions
is greater than 0.10 but less than or equal to θmax , using the calculated fundamental period of the
the incremental factor related to P-delta effects on structure 𝑇 in each direction and the procedures of
displacements and member forces shall be Section 12.8 .
determined by rational analysis. 12.9.4.1 Scaling of Forces. Where the
12.8.7.4 Alternatively, it is permitted to calculated fundamental period exceeds 𝐶𝑢 𝑇𝑎 in a
multiply displacements and member forces by given direction, 𝐶𝑢 𝑇𝑎 shall be used in lieu of 𝑇 in
1.0/(1 – 𝜃). that direction. Where the combined response for the
modal base shear (𝑉𝑡 ) is less than 85 percent of the
12.8.7.5 Where 𝜃 is greater than θmax x, the calculated base shear (𝑉) using the equivalent
structure is potentially unstable and shall be lateral force procedure, the forces shall be
redesigned. multiplied by 0.85𝑉/𝑉𝑡 :
12.8.7.6 Where the P-delta effect is where, 𝑉 = the equivalent lateral force procedure
included in an automated analysis, Equation (12-28) base shear, calculated in accordance with this
shall still be satisfied, however, the value of θ
section and Section 12.8 ; 𝑉𝑡 = The base shear from
computed from Equation (12-27) using the results
the required modal combination
of the P-delta analysis is permitted to be divided by
(1 + 𝜃) before checking Equation (12-28). 12.9.4.2 Scaling of Drifts. Where the
combined response for the modal base shear (𝑉𝑡 ) is
12.9 —Modal response spectrum less than 0.85𝐶𝑠 𝑊, and where 𝐶𝑠 is determined in
analysis accordance with Equation (12-17), drifts shall be
12.9.1 Number of Modes. An analysis shall be multiplied by 0.85𝐶𝑠 𝑊/𝑉𝑡 .
conducted to determine the natural modes of 12.9.5 Horizontal Shear Distribution. The
vibration for the structure. The analysis shall distribution of horizontal shear shall be in
include a sufficient number of modes to obtain a accordance with Section 12.8.4 except that
combined modal mass participation of at least 90 amplification of torsion in accordance with Section
percent of the actual mass in each of the orthogonal 12.8.4.5 is not required where accidental torsion
horizontal directions of response considered by the effects are included in the dynamic analysis model.
model.
12.9.6 P-Delta Effects. The P-delta effects shall
12.9.2 Modal Response Parameters. The value be determined in accordance with Section 12.8.7 .
for each force-related design parameter of interest, The base shear used to determine the story shears
including story drifts, support forces, and individual and the story drifts shall be determined in
member forces for each mode of response shall be accordance with Section 12.8.6 .
computed using the properties of each mode and the
response spectra defined in either Section 11.4.4 or 12.9.7 Soil Structure Interaction Reduction. A
21.2 divided by the quantity 𝑅/𝐼𝑒 . The value for soil structure interaction reduction is permitted
displacement and drift quantities shall be multiplied where determined using CHAPTER 19 or other
by the quantity 𝐶𝑑 /𝐼𝑒 . generally accepted procedures approved by the
Building Official.
SBC 301-CR-18 80
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 81
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
differential foundation settlement when combined width ratio of the structural subdiaphragm shall be
with seismic forces. 2.5 to 1. Connections and anchorages capable of
resisting the prescribed forces shall be provided
12.11.2 Anchorage of Structural Walls and
between the diaphragm and the attached
Transfer of Design Forces into Diaphragms
components. Connections shall extend into the
diaphragm a sufficient distance to develop the force
transferred into the diaphragm.Steel Elements of
12.11.2.1 Wall Anchorage Forces.
Structural Wall Anchorage System. The strength
12.11.2.1.1 The anchorage of structural walls design forces for steel elements of the structural
to supporting construction shall provide a direct wall anchorage system, with the exception of
connection capable of resisting the following: anchor bolts and reinforcing steel, shall be
increased by 1.4 times the forces otherwise required
𝐹𝑝 = 0.4𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝑘𝑎 𝐼𝑒 𝑊𝑝 (12-32)
by this section.
12.11.2.1.2 𝐹𝑝 shall not be taken less than 12.11.2.2.3 Wood Diaphragms.
0.2𝑘𝑎 𝐼𝑒 𝑊𝑝 . (Inapplicable)
𝐿𝑓 12.11.2.2.4 Metal Deck Diaphragms. In
𝑘𝑎 = 1.0 + (12-33)
30.48 metal deck diaphragms, the metal deck shall not be
where, used as the continuous ties required by this section
𝐹𝑝 = the design force in the individual anchors; in the direction perpendicular to the deck span.
𝑆𝐷𝑆 = the design spectral response acceleration
12.11.2.2.5 Embedded Straps. Diaphragm to
parameter at short periods per Section 11.4.3;
structural wall anchorage using embedded straps
𝐼𝑒 = the importance factor determined in accordance
shall be attached to, or hooked around, the
with Section 11.5.1;
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to
𝑘𝑎 = amplification factor for diaphragm flexibility;
effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing steel.
𝐿𝑓 = the span, in meter, of a flexible diaphragm that
provides the lateral support for the wall; the span is 12.11.2.2.6 Eccentrically Loaded Anchorage
measured between vertical elements that provide System. Where elements of the wall anchorage
lateral support to the diaphragm in the direction system are loaded eccentrically or are not
considered; use zero for rigid diaphragms; perpendicular to the wall, the system shall be
𝑊𝑝 = the weight of the wall tributary to the anchor. designed to resist all components of the forces
induced by the eccentricity.
12.11.2.1.3 Where the anchorage is not located
at the roof and all diaphragms are not flexible, the 12.11.2.2.7 Walls with Pilasters. Where
value from Equation (12-32) is permitted to be pilasters are present in the wall, the anchorage force
multiplied by the factor (1 + 2𝑧/ℎ)/3, where z is at the pilasters shall be calculated considering the
the height of the anchor above the base of the additional load transferred from the wall panels to
structure and ℎ is the height of the roof above the the pilasters. However, the minimum anchorage
base. force at a floor or roof shall not be reduced.
SBC 301-CR-18 82
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 83
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
CHAPTER 12 and CHAPTER 16 , the load- means of the design criteria established in the
deformation characteristics of the foundation–soil foundation investigation report.
system (foundation stiffness) shall be modeled in
12.13.5.2 Foundation Ties. Individual pile
accordance with the requirements of this section.
caps, drilled piers, or caissons shall be
12.13.3.2 The linear load-deformation interconnected by ties. All ties shall have a design
behavior of foundations shall be represented by an strength in tension or compression at least equal to
equivalent linear stiffness using soil properties that a force equal to 10 percent of 𝑆𝐷𝑆 times the larger
are compatible with the soil strain levels associated pile cap or column factored dead plus factored live
with the design earthquake motion. load unless it is demonstrated that equivalent
restraint will be provided by reinforced concrete
12.13.3.3 The strain-compatible shear
beams within slabs on grade or reinforced concrete
modulus, G, and the associated strain-compatible
slabs on grade or confinement by competent rock,
shear wave velocity, 𝑣𝑆 , needed for the evaluation
hard cohesive soils, very dense granular soils, or
of equivalent linear stiffness shall be determined
other approved means.
based on a site-specific study.
12.13.5.3 Pile Anchorage Requirements. In
12.13.3.4 A 50 percent increase and decrease
addition to the requirements of Section 14.3 ,
in stiffness shall be incorporated in dynamic
anchorage of piles shall comply with this section.
analyses unless smaller variations can be justified
Where required for resistance to uplift forces,
based on field measurements of dynamic soil
anchorage of steel pipe (round HSS sections),
properties or direct measurements of dynamic
concrete-filled steel pipe or H piles to the pile cap
foundation stiffness. The largest values of response
shall be made by means other than concrete bond to
shall be used in design.
the bare steel section.
Exception: Anchorage of concrete-filled steel pipe
piles is permitted to be accomplished using
12.13.4 Reduction of Foundation Overturning. deformed bars developed into the concrete portion
of the pile.
12.13.4.1 Overturning effects at the soil–
foundation interface are permitted to be reduced by 12.13.6 Requirements for Structures Assigned to
25 percent for foundations of structures that satisfy Seismic Design Categories D through F. In
both of the following conditions: addition to the requirements of Sections 11.8.2 ,
11.8.3 , 14.2 , and 14.3 , the following foundation
(a) The structure is designed in accordance design requirements shall apply to structures
with the Equivalent Lateral Force Analysis assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F.
as set forth in Section 12.8 . Design and construction of concrete foundation
(b) The structure is not an inverted pendulum elements shall conform to the requirements of SBC
or cantilevered column type structure. 304, section 18.9 ,except as modified by the
12.13.4.2 Overturning effects at the soil– requirements of this section.
foundation interface are permitted to be reduced by Exception: Detached one- and two-family
10 percent for foundations of structures designed in dwellings of light-frame construction not exceeding
accordance with the modal analysis requirements of two stories above grade plane need only comply
Section 12.9. with the requirements for Sections 11.8.2 , 11.8.3
12.13.5 Requirements for Structures Assigned to (Items 2 through 4), 12.13.2 and 12.13.5 .
Seismic Design Category C. In addition to the 12.13.6.1 Pole-Type Structures. Where
requirements of Section 12.8.2, the following construction employing posts or poles as columns
foundation design requirements shall apply to embedded in earth or embedded in concrete
structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C. footings in the earth is used to resist lateral loads,
12.13.5.1 Pole-Type Structures. Where the depth of embedment required for posts or poles
construction employing posts or poles as columns to resist seismic forces shall be determined by
embedded in earth or embedded in concrete means of the design criteria established in the
footings in the earth is used to resist lateral loads, foundation investigation report.
the depth of embedment required for posts or poles 12.13.6.2 Foundation Ties.
to resist seismic forces shall be determined by
SBC 301-CR-18 84
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.13.6.2.1 Individual pile caps, drilled piers, 1. In the case of uplift, the anchorage shall be
or caissons shall be interconnected by ties. capable of developing the least of the
nominal tensile strength of the longitudinal
12.13.6.2.2 In addition, individual spread
reinforcement in a concrete pile, the
footings founded on soil defined in CHAPTER 20 as
nominal tensile strength of a steel pile, and
Site Class E or F shall be interconnected by ties.
1.3 times the pile pullout resistance, or
12.13.6.2.3 All ties shall have a design strength shall be designed to resist the axial tension
in tension or compression at least equal to a force force resulting from the seismic load
equal to 10 percent of 𝑆𝐷𝑆 times the larger pile cap effects including overstrength factor of
or column factored dead plus factored live load Section 12.4.3 or 12.14.3.5 . The pile
unless it is demonstrated that equivalent restraint pullout resistance shall be taken as the
will be provided by reinforced concrete beams ultimate frictional or adhesive force that
within slabs on grade or reinforced concrete slabs can be developed between the soil and the
on grade or confinement by competent rock, hard pile plus the pile and pile cap weight.
cohesive soils, very dense granular soils, or other 2. In the case of rotational restraint, the
approved means. anchorage shall be designed to resist the
12.13.6.3 General Pile Design axial and shear forces and moments
Requirement. resulting from the seismic load effects
including overstrength factor of Section
12.13.6.3.1 Piling shall be designed and 12.4.3 or 12.14.3.5 or shall be capable of
constructed to withstand deformations from developing the full axial, bending, and
earthquake ground motions and structure response. shear nominal strength of the pile.
12.13.6.3.2 Deformations shall include both 12.13.6.6 Splices of Pile Segments. Splices
free-field soil strains (without the structure) and of pile segments shall develop the nominal strength
deformations induced by lateral pile resistance to of the pile section.
structure seismic forces, all as modified by soil–pile
interaction. Exception: Splices designed to resist the axial and
shear forces and moments from the seismic load
12.13.6.4 Batter Piles. effects including over strength factor of Section
12.13.6.4.1 Batter piles and their connections 12.4.3 or 12.14.3.5 .
shall be capable of resisting forces and moments 12.13.6.7 Pile Soil Interaction.
from the load combinations with overstrength factor
of Section 12.4.3.2 or 12.14.3.5.2 . 12.13.6.7.1 Pile moments, shears, and lateral
deflections used for design shall be established
12.13.6.4.2 Where vertical and batter piles act considering the interaction of the shaft and soil.
jointly to resist foundation forces as a group, these
forces shall be distributed to the individual piles in 12.13.6.7.2 Where the ratio of the depth of
accordance with their relative horizontal and embedment of the pile to the pile diameter or width
vertical rigidities and the geometric distribution of is less than or equal to 6, the pile is permitted to be
the piles within the group. assumed to be flexurally rigid with respect to the
soil.
12.13.6.5 Pile Anchorage Requirements.
12.13.6.8 Pile Group Effects.
12.13.6.5.1 In addition to the requirements of
Section 12.13.5.3 , anchorage of piles shall comply 12.13.6.8.1 Pile group effects from soil on
with this section. lateral pile nominal strength shall be included
where pile center-to-center spacing in the direction
12.13.6.5.2 Design of anchorage of piles into of lateral force is less than eight pile diameters or
the pile cap shall consider the combined effect of widths.
axial forces due to uplift and bending moments due
to fixity to the pile cap. 12.13.6.8.2 Pile group effects on vertical
nominal strength shall be included where pile
12.13.6.5.3 For piles required to resist uplift center-to-center spacing is less than three pile
forces or provide rotational restraint, anchorage into diameters or widths.
the pile cap shall comply with the following:
SBC 301-CR-18 85
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 86
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 87
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
12.14.2.5 The foundation shall be designed 𝑆𝐷𝑆 = design spectral response acceleration
to accommodate the forces developed. parameter at short periods obtained from Section
11.4.3;
12.14.3 Seismic Load Effects and Combinations.
𝐷 = effect of dead load.
12.14.3.1 All members of the structure,
including those not part of the seismic force- Exception: The vertical seismic load effect, 𝐸𝑣 , is
resisting system, shall be designed using the seismic permitted to be taken as zero for either of the
load effects of Section 12.14.3 unless otherwise following conditions:
exempted by this code. 1. In Equations (12-38), (12-39), (12-44) and
12.14.3.2 Seismic load effects are the axial, (12-45) where 𝑆𝐷𝑆 is equal to or less than
shear, and flexural member forces resulting from 0.125.
application of horizontal and vertical seismic forces 2. In Equation (12-39) where determining
as set forth in Section 12.14.3.4 . demands on the soil–structure interface of
12.14.3.3 Where specifically required, foundations.
seismic load effects shall be modified to account for 12.14.3.4.3 Seismic Load Combinations-
overstrength, as set forth in Section 12.14.3.5 . Strength. Where the prescribed seismic load effect,
12.14.3.4 Seismic Load Effect. The seismic 𝐸, defined in Section 12.14.3.4 is combined with
load effect, 𝐸, shall be determined in accordance the effects of other loads as set forth in CHAPTER
with the following: 2 , combinations (5 and 7) of Equation (12-42 ) for
structures not subject to flood load shall be used in
1. For use in load combination 5 in Section 2.3.2 lieu of the seismic load combinations (5 and 7) of
or load combinations 5 and 6 in Section 2.4.1, Equation (2-1) for basic combinations for Strength
𝐸 shall be determined in accordance with Design:
Equation (12-38) as follows:
Basic Combinations for Strength Design (see
𝐸 = 𝐸ℎ + 𝐸𝑣 (12-38) Sections 2.3.2 and 2.2 for notation).
2. For use in load combination 7 in Section (1.2 + 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 𝑄𝐸 + 𝐿 5
(12-42)
2.3.2 or load combination 8 in Section (0.9 – 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 𝑄𝐸 7
2.4.1, 𝐸 shall be determined in accordance
with Equation (12-39) as follows: Notes:
𝐸 = 𝐸ℎ − 𝐸𝑣 (12-39)
where, 1. The load factor on 𝐿 in combination 5 is
𝐸 = seismic load effect; permitted to equal 0.5 for all occupancies in
which 𝐿𝑜 in Table 4-1 is less than or equal
𝐸ℎ = effect of horizontal seismic forces as defined
in Section 12.14.3.4.1; to 5 kN/m2, with the exception of garages
or areas occupied as places of public
𝐸𝑣 = effect of vertical seismic forces as defined in
assembly.
Section 12.14.3.4.2.
12.14.3.4.1 Horizontal Seismic Load Effect. 2. Where fluid loads 𝐹 are present, they shall
be included with the same load factor as
The horizontal seismic load effect, 𝐸ℎ , shall be
determined in accordance with Equation (12-40) as dead load 𝐷 in combinations 1 through 5
follows: and 7. Where load 𝐻 are present, they shall
be included as follows:
𝐸ℎ = 𝑄𝐸 (12-40)
Where, (a) where the effect of 𝐻 adds to the
𝑄𝐸 = effects of horizontal seismic forces from 𝑉 or primary variable load effect, include 𝐻
𝐹𝑝 as specified in Sections 12.14.7.5 , 12.14.8.1 , and with a load factor of 1.6;
13.3.1 . (b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the
primary variable load effect, include 𝐻
12.14.3.4.2 Vertical Seismic Load Effect. with a load factor of 0.9 where the load
The vertical seismic load effect, 𝐸𝑣 , shall be is permanent or a load factor of 0 for
determined in accordance with Equation (12-41) as all other conditions.
follows:
(c) Where lateral earth pressure provides
𝐸𝑣 = 0.2 𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝐷 (12-41) resistance to structural actions from
where, other forces, it shall not be included in
SBC 301-CR-18 88
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
𝐻 but shall be included in the design 𝐸𝑚 = seismic load effect including overstrength
resistance. factor;
𝐸𝑚ℎ = effect of horizontal seismic forces including
12.14.3.4.4 Seismic Load Combinations-
overstrength factor as defined in Section
Allowable stress design. Where the prescribed
12.14.3.5.1;
seismic load effect, 𝐸, defined in Section 12.14.3.4
𝐸𝑣 = vertical seismic load effect as defined in
is combined with the effects of other loads as set
Section 12.14.3.4.2.
forth in CHAPTER 2 , combinations (5 , 6b and 8) of
Equation (12-43) for structures not subject to flood 12.14.3.5.1 Horizontal Seismic Load Effect
load shall be used in lieu of the seismic load with a 2.5 Overstrength Factor. The horizontal
combinations (5 , 6b and 8) of Equation (2-3) for seismic load effect with overstrength factor, 𝐸𝑚ℎ ,
basic combinations for Allowable Stress Design shall be determined in accordance with Equation
(12-46) as follows:
(1.0 + 0.14𝑆𝐷𝑆 ) 𝐷 + 0.7𝑄𝐸 5
𝐸𝑚ℎ = 2.5𝑄𝐸 (12-46)
(1.0 + 0.10𝑆𝐷𝑆 ) 𝐷 + 0.525𝑄𝐸 + 0.75𝐿 6b Where, 𝑄𝐸 = effects of horizontal seismic forces
(12-43)
from 𝑉 or 𝐹𝑝 as specified in Sections 12.14.7.5 ,
(0.6 – 0.14𝑆𝐷𝑆 ) 𝐷 + 0.7𝑄𝐸 8 12.14.8.1 , and 13.3.1.
Exception: The value of 𝐸𝑚ℎ need not exceed
Notes: the maximum force that can develop in the
1. Where fluid loads 𝐹 are present, they shall element as determined by a rational, plastic
be included in combinations 1 through 6 mechanism analysis or nonlinear response
and 8 with the same factor as that used for analysis utilizing realistic expected values of
dead load 𝐷. material strengths.
2. Where load 𝐻 is present, it shall be 12.14.3.5.2 Load Combinations with
included as follows: Overstrength Factor. Where the seismic load
(a) where the effect of 𝐻 adds to the primary effect with overstrength factor, 𝐸𝑚 , defined in
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a load Section 12.14.3.5 , is combined with the effects of
factor of 1.0; other loads as set forth in CHAPTER 2 ,
combinations (5 and 7) of Equation (12-47) for
(b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the primary structures not subject to flood load shall be used in
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a load lieu of the seismic load combinations (5 and 7) of
factor of 0.6 where the load is permanent or Equation (2-1) for basic combinations for Strength
a load factor of 0 for all other conditions. Design.
12.14.3.5 Seismic Load Effect Including a (1.2 + 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 2.5𝑄𝐸 + 𝐿 5
2.5 Overstrength Factor. Where specifically (12-47)
(0.9 – 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 2.5𝑄𝐸 7
required, conditions requiring overstrength factor
applications shall be determined in accordance with Notes:
the following: 1. The load factor on 𝐿 in combination 5 is
1. For use in load combination 5 in Section permitted to equal 0.5 for all occupancies in
2.3.2 or load combinations 5 and 6 in which 𝐿𝑜 in Table 4-1 is less than or equal
Section 2.4.1, 𝐸 shall be taken equal to Em to 5 kN/m2, with the exception of garages
as determined in accordance with Equation or areas occupied as places of public
(12-44) as follows: assembly.
SBC 301-CR-18 89
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
(b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the primary 12.14.4.1 Selection and Limitations. The
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a basic lateral and vertical seismic force-resisting
load factor of 0.9 where the load is system shall conform to one of the types indicated
permanent or a load factor of 0 for all in Table 12-9 and shall conform to all of the
other conditions. detailing requirements referenced in the table. The
(c) Where lateral earth pressure provides appropriate response modification coefficient, 𝑅,
resistance to structural actions from indicated in Table 12-9 shall be used in determining
other forces, it shall not be included in the base shear and element design forces as set forth
𝐻 but shall be included in the design in the seismic requirements of this code.
resistance. Special framing and detailing requirements are
12.14.3.5.3 Load Combinations with indicated in Section 12.14.7 and in Sections 14.2,
Overstrength Factor. Where the seismic load 14.3 , 14.4 , 14.5 , and 14.6 for structures assigned to
effect with overstrength factor, 𝐸𝑚 , defined in the various seismic design categories.
Section 12.14.3.5 , is combined with the effects of 12.14.4.2 Combinations of Framing
other loads as set forth in CHAPTER 2 , Systems
combinations (5 , 6b and 8) of Equation (12-48) for
structures not subject to flood load shall be used in 12.14.4.2.1 Horizontal Combinations.
lieu of the seismic load combinations (5 , 6b and 8) Different seismic force-resisting systems are
of Equation (2-3) for basic combinations for permitted to be used in each of the two principal
Allowable Stress Design. orthogonal building directions. Where a
combination of different structural systems is
(1.0 + 0.14𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 1.75𝑄𝐸 5. utilized to resist lateral forces in the same direction,
(1.0 + 0.10𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 1.313𝑄𝐸 + 0.75𝐿 6b (12-48) the value of 𝑅 used for design in that direction shall
(0.6 – 0.14𝑆𝐷𝑆 )𝐷 + 1.75𝑄𝐸 8 not be greater than the least value of 𝑅 for any of
Notes: the systems utilized in that direction.
1. Where fluid loads 𝐹 are present, they shall Exception: For buildings of light-frame
be included in combinations 1 through 6 construction or having flexible diaphragms and that
and 8 with the same factor as that used for are two stories or less above grade plane, resisting
dead load 𝐷. elements are permitted to be designed using the
2. Where load 𝐻 is present, it shall be least value of 𝑅 of the different seismic force-
resisting systems found in each independent line of
included as follows:
framing. The value of 𝑅 used for design of
(a) where the effect of 𝐻 adds to the primary diaphragms in such structures shall not be greater
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a load than the least value for any of the systems utilized
factor of 1.0; in that same direction.
(b) where the effect of 𝐻 resists the primary 12.14.4.2.2 Vertical Combinations. Different
variable load effect, include 𝐻 with a load seismic force-resisting systems are permitted to be
factor of 0.6 where the load is permanent or used indifferent stories. The value of 𝑅 used in a
a load factor of 0 for all other conditions. given direction shall not be greater than the least
12.14.3.5.4 Allowable Stress Increase for value of any of the systems used in that direction.
Load Combinations with Overstrength. Where 12.14.4.2.3 Combination Framing Detailing
allowable stress design methodologies are used Requirements. The detailing requirements of
with the seismic load effect defined in Section Section 12.14.7 required by the higher response
12.14.3.5 applied in load combinations 5, 6, or 8 of modification coefficient, 𝑅, shall be used for
Section 2.4.1 , allowable stresses are permitted to be structural members common to systems having
determined using an allowable stress increase of different response modification coefficients.
1.2. This increase shall not be combined with
increases in allowable stresses or load combination 12.14.5 Diaphragm Flexibility. Diaphragms
reductions otherwise permitted by this code or the constructed of steel decking (untopped) or similar
material reference document except that panelized construction are permitted to be
combination with the duration of load increases considered flexible.
permitted in AF&PA NDS is permitted. 12.14.6 Application of Loading. The effects of the
12.14.4 Seismic Force-Resisting System combination of loads shall be considered as
SBC 301-CR-18 90
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
prescribed in Section 12.14.3 . The design seismic 12.14.7.3 Collector Elements. Collector
forces are permitted to be applied separately in each elements shall be provided with adequate strength
orthogonal direction and the combination of effects to transfer the seismic forces originating in other
from the two directions need not be considered. portions of the structure to the element providing
Reversal of load shall be considered. the resistance to those forces (see Figure 12-5).
Collector elements, splices, and their connections to
12.14.7 Design and Detailing Requirements. The
resisting elements shall be designed to resist the
design and detailing of the members of the seismic
forces defined in Section 12.14.3.5 .
force-resisting system shall comply with the
requirements of this section. The foundation shall Exception: In structures, or portions thereof, braced
be designed to resist the forces developed and entirely by light-frame shear walls, collector
accommodate the movements imparted to the elements, splices, and connections to resisting
structure by the design ground motions. The elements are permitted to be designed to resist
dynamic nature of the forces, the expected ground forces in accordance with Section 12.14.7.4 .
motion, the design basis for strength and energy
12.14.7.4 Diaphragms. Floor and roof
dissipation capacity of the structure, and the
diaphragms shall be designed to resist the design
dynamic properties of the soil shall be included in
seismic forces at each level, 𝐹𝑥 , calculated in
the determination of the foundation design criteria.
accordance with Section 12.14.8.2 . Where the
The design and construction of foundations shall
diaphragm is required to transfer design seismic
comply with Section 12.13 . Structural elements
forces from the vertical-resisting elements above
including foundation elements shall conform to the
the diaphragm to other vertical-resisting elements
material design and detailing requirements set forth
below the diaphragm due to changes in relative
in CHAPTER 14 .
lateral stiffness in the vertical elements, the
12.14.7.1 Connections. All parts of the transferred portion of the seismic shear force at that
structure between separation joints shall be level, 𝑉𝑥 , shall be added to the diaphragm design
interconnected, and the connection shall be capable force. Diaphragms shall provide for both the shear
of transmitting the seismic force, 𝐹𝑝 , induced by the and bending stresses resulting from these forces.
parts being connected. Any smaller portion of the Diaphragms shall have ties or struts to distribute the
structure shall be tied to the remainder of the wall anchorage forces into the diaphragm.
structure with elements having a strength of 0.20 Diaphragm connections shall be positive,
times the short period design spectral response mechanical, or welded type connections.
acceleration coefficient, 𝑆𝐷𝑆 , times the weight of 12.14.7.5 Anchorage of Structural Walls.
the smaller portion or 5 percent of the portion’s Structural walls shall be anchored to all floors,
weight, whichever is greater. roofs, and members that provide out-of-plane
A positive connection for resisting a horizontal lateral support for the wall or that are supported by
force acting parallel to the member shall be the wall. The anchorage shall provide a positive
provided for each beam, girder, or truss either direct connection between the wall and floor, roof,
directly to its supporting elements, or to slabs or supporting member with the strength to resist the
designed to act as diaphragms. Where the out-of-plane force given by Equation (12-49):
connection is through a diaphragm, then the 𝐹𝑝 = 0.4 𝑘𝑎 𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝑊𝑝 (12-49)
member’s supporting element must also be
𝐹𝑝 shall not be taken less than 0.2 𝑘𝑎 𝑊𝑝 .
connected to the diaphragm. The connection shall
𝐿𝑓
have minimum design strength of 5 percent of the 𝑘𝑎 = 1.0 + (12-50)
dead plus live load reaction. 30.48
𝑘𝑎 need not be taken larger than 2.0; where
12.14.7.2 Openings or Reentrant Building 𝐹𝑝 = the design force in the individual anchors;
Corners. Except where as otherwise specifically
𝑘𝑎 = amplification factor for diaphragm flexibility;
provided for in this code, openings in shear walls,
𝐿𝑓 = the span, in meter, of a flexible diaphragm that
diaphragms, or other plate-type elements, shall be
provided with reinforcement at the edges of the provides the lateral support for the wall; the span is
openings or reentrant corners designed to transfer measured between vertical elements that provide
the stresses into the structure. The edge lateral support to the diaphragm in the direction
reinforcement shall extend into the body of the wall considered; use zero for rigid diaphragms;
or diaphragm a distance sufficient to develop the 𝑆𝐷𝑆 = the design spectral response acceleration at
force in the reinforcement. short periods per Section 12.14.8.1 and
SBC 301-CR-18 91
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
𝑊𝑝 = the weight of the wall tributary to the anchor. vertically in accordance with Section 12.14.8.2 . For
purposes of analysis, the structure shall be
12.14.7.5.1 Transfer of Anchorage Forces considered fixed at the base.
into Diaphragms. Diaphragms shall be provided
with continuous ties or struts between diaphragm 12.14.8.1 Seismic Base Shear.
chords to distribute these anchorage forces into the 12.14.8.1.1 The seismic base shear, 𝑉, in a
diaphragms. Added chords are permitted to be used given direction shall be determined in accordance
to form subdiaphragms to transmit the anchorage with Equation (12-51):
forces to the main continuous cross-ties. The
maximum length-to-width ratio of the structural 𝐹 𝑆𝐷𝑆
𝑉= 𝑊 (12-51)
subdiaphragm shall be 2.5 to 1. Connections and 𝑅
anchorages capable of resisting the prescribed where
forces shall be provided between the diaphragm and 2
𝑆𝐷𝑆 = 𝐹𝑎 𝑆𝑠 (12-52)
the attached components. Connections shall extend 3
into the diaphragm a sufficient distance to develop where 𝐹𝑎 is permitted to be taken as 1.0 for rock
the force transferred into the diaphragm. sites,1.4 for soil sites, or determined in accordance
with Section 11.4.2 .
12.14.7.5.2 Wood Diaphragms.
(Inapplicable) 12.14.8.1.2 For the purpose of this section,
sites are permitted to be considered to be rock if
12.14.7.5.3 Metal Deck Diaphragms. In there is no more than 3 m of soil between the rock
metal deck diaphragms, the metal deck shall not be surface and the bottom of spread footing or mat
used as the continuous ties required by this section foundation. In calculating 𝑆𝐷𝑆 , 𝑆𝑆 shall be in
in the direction perpendicular to the deck span. accordance with Section 11.4.1 , but need not be
12.14.7.5.4 Embedded Straps. Diaphragm to taken larger than 1.5.
wall anchorage using embedded straps shall be 𝐹 = 1.0 for buildings that are one story above grade
attached to or hooked around the reinforcing steel plane;
or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transfer 𝐹 =1.1 for buildings that are two stories above
forces to the reinforcing steel. grade plane;
12.14.7.6 Bearing Walls and Shear Walls. 𝐹 = 1.2 for buildings that are three stories above
Exterior and interior bearing walls and shear walls grade plane;
and their anchorage shall be designed for a force 𝑅 = the response modification factor from Table
equal to 40 percent of the short period design 12-9 ;
spectral response acceleration 𝑆𝐷𝑆 times the weight 𝑊 = effective seismic weight of the structure that
of wall, 𝑊𝑐 , normal to the surface, with a minimum includes the dead load, as defined in Section 1.1,
force of 10 percent of the weight of the wall. above grade plane and other loads above grade
Interconnection of wall elements and connections to plane as listed in the following text:
supporting framing systems shall have sufficient 1. In areas used for storage, a minimum of 25
ductility, rotational capacity, or sufficient strength percent of the floor live load shall be included.
to resist shrinkage, thermal changes, and Exceptions:
differential foundation settlement where combined
with seismic forces. (a) Where the inclusion of storage loads adds
no more than 5% to the effective seismic
12.14.7.7 Anchorage of Nonstructural weight at that level, it need not be included
Systems. Where required by CHAPTER 13, all in the effective seismic weight.
portions or components of the structure shall be (b) Floor live load in public garages and open
anchored for the seismic force, 𝐹𝑝 , prescribed parking structures need not be included.
therein.
2. Where provision for partitions is required by
12.14.8 Simplified Lateral Force Analysis Section 4.3.2 in the floor load design, the
Procedure. An equivalent lateral force analysis actual partition weight, or a minimum weight
shall consist of the application of equivalent static of 0.5 kN/m2 of floor area, whichever is
lateral forces to a linear mathematical model of the greater.
structure. The lateral forces applied in each 3. Total operating weight of permanent
direction shall sum to a total seismic base shear equipment.
given by Section 12.14.8.1 and shall be distributed
SBC 301-CR-18 92
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
4. Weight of landscaping and other materials at consideration based on the relative lateral
roof gardens and similar areas. stiffnesses of the vertical elements and the
diaphragm.
12.14.8.2 Vertical Distribution. The forces
at each level shall be calculated using the following 12.14.8.3.2.1 Torsion. The design of structures
equation: with diaphragms that are not flexible shall include
𝑤𝑥 the torsional moment, 𝑀𝑡 (kN-m) resulting from
𝐹𝑥 = 𝑉 (12-53) eccentricity between the locations of center of mass
𝑊
where, 𝑤𝑥 = the portion of the effective seismic and the center of rigidity.
weight of the structure, 𝑊, at level 𝑥. 12.14.8.4 Overturning. The structure shall
12.14.8.3 Horizontal Shear Distribution. be designed to resist overturning effects caused by
The seismic design story shear in any story, 𝑉𝑥 (kN), the seismic forces determined in Section 12.14.8.2 .
shall be determined from the following equation: The foundations of structures shall be designed for
𝑛
not less than 75 percent of the foundation
overturning design moment, 𝑀𝑓 (kN-m) at the
𝑉𝑥 = ∑ 𝐹𝑖 (12-54)
foundation–soil interface.
𝑖=𝑥
where 𝐹𝑖 = the portion of the seismic base shear, 𝑉 12.14.8.5 Drift Limits and Building
(kN) induced at Level 𝑖. Separation. Structural drift need not be calculated.
Where a drift value is needed for use in material
12.14.8.3.1 Flexible Diaphragm Structures.
standards, to determine structural separations
The seismic design story shear in stories of
between buildings or from property lines, for design
structures with flexible diaphragms, as defined in
of cladding, or for other design requirements, it
Section 12.14.5 , shall be distributed to the vertical
shall be taken as 1 percent of structural height, ℎ𝑛 ,
elements of the seismic force-resisting system using
unless compute to be less. All portions of the
tributary area rules. Two-dimensional analysis is
structure shall be designed to act as an integral unit
permitted where diaphragms are flexible.
in resisting seismic forces unless separated
12.14.8.3.2 Structures with Diaphragms that structurally by a distance sufficient to avoid
are Not Flexible. For structures with diaphragms damaging contact under the total deflection.
that are not flexible, as defined in Section 12.14.5,
the seismic design story shear, 𝑉𝑥 (kN), shall be
distributed to the various vertical elements of the
seismic force-resisting system in the story under
SBC 301-CR-18 93
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
Table 12-1: Design coefficients and factors for seismic force-resisting systems
Structural System
Deflection Amplification
Overstrength Factor, Ω0g
SBC 301 Section Where
Detailing Requirements
Response Modification
Limitations Including
Structural Height, ℎ𝑛 (m)
Coefficient, Ra
are Specified
Factor, Cdb
Limitsc
Seismic Force-Resisting System Seismic Design Category
B C Dd Ed Fe
SBC 301-CR-18 94
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
Table 12-1: Design coefficients and factors for seismic force-resisting systems
Structural System
Deflection Amplification
Overstrength Factor, Ω0g
SBC 301 Section Where
Detailing Requirements
Response Modification
Limitations Including
Structural Height, ℎ𝑛 (m)
Coefficient, Ra
are Specified
Factor, Cdb
Limitsc
Seismic Force-Resisting System Seismic Design Category
B C Dd Ed Fe
SBC 301-CR-18 95
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
Table 12-1: Design coefficients and factors for seismic force-resisting systems
Structural System
Deflection Amplification
Overstrength Factor, Ω0g
SBC 301 Section Where
Detailing Requirements
Response Modification
Limitations Including
Structural Height, ℎ𝑛 (m)
Coefficient, Ra
are Specified
Factor, Cdb
Limitsc
Seismic Force-Resisting System Seismic Design Category
B C Dd Ed Fe
SBC 301-CR-18 96
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
SBC 301-CR-18 97
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
Seismic Design
Reference
Type Description Category
Section
Application
1a. Stiffness-Soft Story Irregularity: Stiffness-soft story irregularity is Table 12-5 D, E, and F
defined to exist where there is a story in which the lateral stiffness is
less than 70% of that in the story above or less than 80% of the
average stiffness of the three stories above.
1b. Stiffness-Extreme Soft Story Irregularity: Stiffness-extreme soft 12.3.3.1 E and F
story irregularity is defined to exist where there is a story in which Table 12-5 D, E, and F
the lateral stiffness is less than 60% of that in the story above or less
than 70% of the average stiffness of the three stories above.
2. Weight (Mass) Irregularity: Weight (mass) irregularity is defined Table 12-5 D, E, and F
to exist where the effective mass of any story is more than 150% of
the effective mass of an adjacent story. A roof that is lighter than the
floor below need not be considered.
3. Vertical Geometric Irregularity: Vertical geometric irregularity is Table 12-5 D, E, and F
defined to exist where the horizontal dimension of the seismic force-
resisting system in any story is more than 130% of that in an
adjacent story.
4. In-Plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral Force-Resisting 12.3.3.3 B, C, D, E, and F
Element Irregularity: In-plane discontinuity in vertical lateral 12.3.3.4 D, E, and F
force-resisting elements irregularity is defined to exist where there is Table 12-5 D, E, and F
an in-plane offset of a vertical seismic force-resisting element
resulting in overturning demands on supporting structural elements.
5a. Discontinuity in Lateral Strength–Weak Story Irregularity: 12.3.3.1 E and F
Discontinuity in lateral strength–weak story irregularity is defined to Table 12-5 D, E, and F
exist where the story lateral strength is less than 80% of that in the
story above. The story lateral strength is the total lateral strength of
all seismic-resisting elements sharing the story shear for the
direction under consideration.
5b. Discontinuity in Lateral Strength–Extreme Weak Story 12.3.3.1 D, E, and F
Irregularity: Discontinuity in lateral strength–extreme weak story 12.3.3.2 B and C
irregularity is defined to exist where the story lateral strength is less Table 12-5 D, E, and F
than 65% of that in the story above. The story strength is the total
strength of all seismic-resisting elements sharing the story shear for
the direction under consideration.
SBC 301-CR-18 98
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
Table 12-4: Requirements for each story resisting more than 35% of the base shear
Lateral Force-Resisting
Requirement
Element
Braced frames Removal of an individual brace, or connection thereto, would not result in
more than a 33% reduction in story strength, nor does the resulting system
have an extreme torsional irregularity (horizontal structural irregularity Type
1b).
Moment frames Loss of moment resistance at the beam-to-column connections at both ends of
a single beam would not result in more than a 33% reduction in story strength,
nor does the resulting system have an extreme torsional irregularity
(horizontal structural irregularity Type 1b).
Shear walls or wall piers Removal of a shear wall or wall pier with a height-to-length ratio greater than
with a height-to-length 1.0 within any story, or collector connections thereto, would not result in
ratio greater than 1.0 more than a 33% reduction in story strength, nor does the resulting system
have an extreme torsional irregularity (horizontal structural irregularity Type
1b). The shear wall and wall pier height-to-length ratios are determined as
shown in Figure 12-2.
Cantilever columns Loss of moment resistance at the base connections of any single cantilever
column would not result in more than a 33% reduction in story strength, nor
does the resulting system have an extreme torsional irregularity (horizontal
structural irregularity Type 1b).
Other No requirements
SBC 301-CR-18 99
CHAPTER 12: —Seismic Design Requirements for Building Structures
Modal Seismic
Equivalent
Seismic Response Response
Lateral Force
Design Structural Characteristics Spectrum History
Analysis,
Category Analysis, Procedures,
Section 12.8 a
Section 12.9 a CHAPTER 16 a
B, C All structures P P P
D, E, F Risk Category I or II buildings not P P P
exceeding 2 stories above the base
Structures of light frame construction P P P
Structures with no structural irregularities P P P
and not exceeding 50 m in structural height
Structures exceeding 50 m in structural P P P
height with no structural irregularities and
with T < 3.5TS
Structures not exceeding 50 m in structural P P P
height and having only horizontal
irregularities of Type 2, 3, 4, or 5 in Table
12-2 or vertical irregularities of Type 4, 5a
in Table 12-3
All other structures NP P P
a P: Permitted; NP: Not Permitted; TS = SD1/SDS.
Structure Type Ct x
Moment-resisting frame systems in which the frames resist 100% of the required seismic force
and are not enclosed or adjoined by components that are more rigid and will prevent the frames
from deflecting where subjected to seismic forces:
Steel moment-resisting frames 0.0724 0.8
Concrete moment-resisting frames 0.0466 0.9
Steel eccentrically braced frames in accordance with Table 12-1 lines B1 or D1 0.0731 0.75
Steel buckling-restrained braced frames 0.0731 0.75
All other structural systems 0.0488 0.75
Risk Category
Structure
I or II III IV
Structures, other than masonry shear wall structures, 4 stories or less 0.025 hsxc 0.020hsx 0.015 hsx
above the base as defined in Section 11.2, with interior walls, partitions,
ceilings, and exterior wall systems that have been designed to
accommodate the story drifts.
Masonry cantilever shear wall structuresd 0.010 hsx 0.010 hsx 0.010 hsx
Other masonry shear wall structures 0.007 hsx 0.007 hsx 0.007 hsx
All other structures 0.020 hsx 0.015 hsx 0.010 hsx
a
hsx is the story height below Level x.
b
For seismic force-resisting systems comprised solely of moment frames in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F, the
allowable story drift shall comply with the requirements of Section 12.12.1.1 .
c
There shall be no drift limit for single-story structures with interior walls, partitions, ceilings, and exterior wall systems
that have been designed to accommodate the story drifts. The structure separation requirement of Section 12.12.3 is not
waived.
d
Structures in which the basic structural system consists of masonry shear walls designed as vertical elements cantilevered
from their base or foundation support which are so constructed that moment transfer between shear walls (coupling) is
negligible.
Table 12-9: Design coefficients and factors for seismic force-resisting systems for simplified
design procedure
Structural System
Response Modification
Limitations Including
Structural Height, ℎ𝑛 (m)b
Coefficient, Ra
are Specified
Seismic Design Category
Seismic Force-Resisting System
B C D, E
Figure 12-2: Shear wall and wall pier height-to-length ratio determination.
Story Level 2
F2 = Strength-level design earthquake force
δe2 = Elastic displacement computed under
strength-level design earthquake forces
δ2 = Cd δe2/Ie = amplified displacement
Δ2 = (δe2 - δe1) Cd /Ie=E ≤ Δa (Table 12-8)
Story Level 1
F1 = Strength-level design earthquake force
δe1 = Elastic displacement computed under
strength-level design earthquake forces
δ1 = Cd δe1/Ie = amplified displacement
Δ1 = δ1 ≤ Δa (Table 12-8)
Δi = Story Drift
Δi/Li = Story Drift Ratio
δ2 = Total Displacement
CHAPTER 15 . Where Section 15.3 requires that These requirements shall be satisfied by one of the
seismic forces be determined in accordance with following methods:
CHAPTER 13 and values for 𝑅𝑝 are not provided in
1. Project-specific design and documentation
Table 13-2 or Table 13-3 , 𝑅𝑝 shall be taken as equal submitted for approval to the Building
to the value of 𝑅 listed in CHAPTER 15 . The value Official after review and acceptance by a
of 𝑎𝑝 shall be determined in accordance with registered design professional.
footnote (𝑎) of Table 13-2 or Table 13-3. 2. Submittal of the manufacturer’s
13.1.6 Reference Documents. Where a reference certification that the component is
document provides a basis for the earthquake- seismically qualified by at least one of the
resistant design of a particular type of nonstructural following:
component, that document is permitted to be used, (a) Analysis, or
subject to the approval of the Building Official and (b) Testing in accordance with the
the following conditions: alternative set forth in Section 13.2.5 ,
(a) The design earthquake forces shall not be or
less than those determined in accordance (c) Experience data in accordance with the
with Section 13.3.1 . alternative set forth in Section 13.2.6 .
(b) Each nonstructural component’s seismic 13.2.2 Special Certification Requirements for
interactions with all other connected Designated Seismic Systems. Certifications shall
components and with the supporting be provided for designated seismic systems
structure shall be accounted for in the assigned to Seismic Design Categories C through F
design. The component shall accommodate as follows:
drifts, deflections, and relative
displacements determined in accordance 1. Active mechanical and electrical
with the applicable seismic requirements of equipment that must remain operable
this code. following the design earthquake ground
motion shall be certified by the
(c) Nonstructural component anchorage
manufacturer as operable whereby active
requirements shall not be less than those
parts or energized components shall be
specified in Section 13.4 .
certified exclusively on the basis of
13.1.7 Reference Documents Using Allowable approved shake table testing in accordance
Stress Design. Where a reference document with Section 13.2.5 or experience data in
provides a basis for the earthquake-resistant design accordance with Section 13.2.6 unless it
of a particular type of component, and the same can be shown that the component is
reference document defines acceptance criteria in inherently rugged by comparison with
terms of allowable stresses rather than strengths, similar seismically qualified components.
that reference document is permitted to be used. Evidence demonstrating compliance with
The allowable stress load combination shall this requirement shall be submitted for
consider dead, live, operating, and earthquake loads approval to the Building Official after
in addition to those in the reference document. The review and acceptance by a registered
earthquake loads determined in accordance with design professional.
Section 13.3.1 shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7. 2. Components with hazardous substances
The allowable stress design load combinations of and assigned a component importance
Section 2.4 need not be used. The component shall factor, 𝐼𝑝 , of 1.5 in accordance with
also accommodate the relative displacements Section 13.1.3 shall be certified by the
specified in Section 13.3.2 . manufacturer as maintaining containment
13.2 —General design requirements following the design earthquake ground
motion by (1) analysis, (2) approved shake
13.2.1 Applicable Requirements for table testing in accordance with Section
Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical 13.2.5 , or (3) experience data in
Components, Supports, and Attachments. accordance with Section 13.2.6 . Evidence
Architectural, mechanical, and electrical demonstrating compliance with this
components, supports, and attachments shall requirement shall be submitted for
comply with the sections referenced in Table 13-1. approval to the Building Official after
Exception: The concurrent vertical seismic procedures. 𝐷𝑝 is not required to be taken as greater
force need not be considered for lay-in access than
floor panels and lay-in ceiling panels. (ℎ𝑥 − ℎ𝑦 )∆𝑎𝐴
13.3.1.6 Where nonseismic loads on 𝐷𝑝 = (13-7)
ℎ𝑠𝑥
nonstructural components exceed 𝐹𝑝 , such loads
shall govern the strength design, but the detailing 13.3.2.2 Displacements between
requirements and limitations prescribed in this Structures. For two connection points on separate
chapter shall apply. Structures A and B or separate structural systems,
13.3.1.7 In lieu of the forces determined in one at a height ℎ𝑥 and the other at a height ℎ𝑦 , 𝐷𝑝
accordance with Equation (13-1), accelerations at shall be determined as
any level are permitted to be determined by the 𝐷𝑝 = |δ𝑥𝐴 | + |δ𝑦𝐵 | (13-8)
modal analysis procedures of Section 12.9 with 𝐷𝑝 is not required to be taken as greater than
𝑅 = 1.0. ℎ𝑥 ∆𝑎𝐴 ℎ𝑦 ∆𝑎𝐵
13.3.1.7.1 Seismic forces shall be in 𝐷𝑝 = + (13-9)
ℎ𝑠𝑥 ℎ𝑠𝑥
accordance with Equation (13-4): where,
𝑅𝑝 𝐷𝑝 = relative seismic displacement that the
𝐹𝑝 = 𝑎𝑖 𝑎𝑝 𝑊𝑝 𝐴𝑥 / ( ) (13-4) component must be designed to accommodate;
𝐼𝑝
δ𝑥𝐴 = deflection at building Level 𝑥 of Structure A,
Where, 𝑎𝑖 is the acceleration at level i obtained from
determined in accordance with Equation (12-26);
the modal analysis; and 𝐴𝑥 is the torsional
δ𝑦𝐴 = deflection at building Level 𝑦 of Structure A,
amplification factor determined by (12-25).
determined in accordance with Equation (12-26);
13.3.1.7.2 Upper and lower limits of 𝐹𝑝 δ𝑦𝐵 = deflection at building Level 𝑦 of Structure B,
determined by Equations (13-2) and (13-3) shall determined in accordance with Equation (12-26);
apply. ℎ𝑥 = Height of Level 𝑥 to which upper connection
13.3.2 Seismic Relative Displacements. The point is attached;
effects of seismic relative displacements shall be ℎ𝑦 = height of Level 𝑦 to which lower connection
considered in combination with displacements point is attached;
caused by other loads as appropriate. Seismic Δ𝑎𝐴 = allowable story drift for Structure A as
relative displacements, 𝐷𝑝𝐼 , shall be determined in defined in Table 12-8;
accordance with Equation (13-5) as: Δ𝑎𝐵 = allowable story drift for Structure B as
defined in Table 12-8;
𝐷𝑝𝐼 = 𝐷𝑝 𝐼𝑒 (13-5) ℎ𝑠𝑥 = story height used in the definition of the
where, allowable drift Δ𝑎 in Table 12-8. Note that Δ𝑎 /ℎ𝑠𝑥
𝐼𝑒 = the importance factor in Section 11.5.1; = the drift index.
𝐷𝑝 = displacement determined in accordance with The effects of seismic relative displacements shall
the equations set forth in Sections 13.3.2.1 and be considered in combination with displacements
13.3.2.2 . caused by other loads as appropriate.
13.3.2.1 Displacements within 13.4 —Nonstructural component
Structures. anchorage
13.3.2.1.1 For two connection points on the 13.4.1 Design Force in the Attachment. The
same Structure A or the same structural system, one force in the attachment shall be determined based
at a height ℎ𝑥 and the other at a height ℎ𝑦 , 𝐷𝑝 shall on the prescribed forces and displacements for the
be determined as component as determined in Section 13.3.1 and
13.3.2 , except that 𝑅𝑝 shall not be taken as larger
𝐷𝑝 = Δ𝑥𝐴 − Δ𝑦𝐴 (13-6)
than 6.
13.3.2.1.2 Alternatively, 𝐷𝑝 is permitted to be
13.4.2 Anchors in Concrete or Masonry
determined using modal procedures described in
Section 12.9, using the difference in story 13.4.2.1 Anchors in Concrete. Anchors in
deflections calculated for each mode and then concrete shall be designed in accordance with
combined using appropriate modal combination Chapter 17 of SBC 304.
13.4.2.2 Anchors in Masonry. Anchors in 13.4.6 Friction Clips. Friction clips in Seismic
masonry shall be designed in accordance with SBC Design Categories D, E, or F shall not be used for
305. Anchors shall be designed to be governed by supporting sustained loads in addition to resisting
the tensile or shear strength of a ductile steel seismic forces. C-type beam and large flange
element. clamps are permitted for hangers provided they are
equipped with restraining straps equivalent to those
Exception: Anchors shall be permitted to be
specified in NFPA 13, Section 9.3.7. Lock nuts or
designed so that the support that the anchor is
equivalent shall be provided to prevent loosening of
connecting to the structure undergoes ductile
threaded connections.
yielding at a load level corresponding to anchor
forces not greater than their design strength, or the 13.5 —Architectural components
minimum design strength of the anchors shall be at
least 2.5 times the factored forces transmitted by the 13.5.1 General. Architectural components, and
their supports and attachments, shall satisfy the
component.
requirements of this section. Appropriate
13.4.2.3 Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete coefficients shall be selected from Table 13-2.
and Masonry. Post-installed anchors in concrete
Exception: Components supported by chains or
shall be prequalified for seismic applications in
accordance with ACI 355.2 or other approved otherwise suspended from the structure are not
qualification procedures. Post-installed anchors in required to satisfy the seismic force and relative
masonry shall be prequalified for seismic displacement requirements provided they meet all
applications in accordance with approved of the following criteria:
qualification procedures. 1. The design load for such items shall be
equal to 1.4 times the operating weight
13.4.3 Installation Conditions. Determination of
forces in attachments shall take into account the acting down with a simultaneous horizontal
expected conditions of installation including load equal to 1.4 times the operating
weight. The horizontal load shall be applied
eccentricities and prying effects.
in the direction that results in the most
13.4.4 Multiple Attachments. Determination of critical loading for design.
force distribution of multiple attachments at one
2. Seismic interaction effects shall be
location shall take into account the stiffness and
ductility of the component, component supports, considered in accordance with Section
13.2.3 .
attachments, and structure and the ability to
redistribute loads to other attachments in the group. 3. The connection to the structure shall allow
Designs of anchorage in concrete in accordance a 360° range of motion in the horizontal
with Chapter 17 of SBC 304 shall be considered to plane.
satisfy this requirement.
13.5.2 Forces and Displacements. All
13.4.5 Power Actuated Fasteners. Power architectural components, and their supports and
actuated fasteners in concrete or steel shall not be attachments, shall be designed for the seismic
used for sustained tension loads or for brace forces defined in Section 13.3.1 . Architectural
applications in Seismic Design Categories D, E, or components that could pose a life-safety hazard
F unless approved for seismic loading. Power shall be designed to accommodate the seismic
actuated fasteners in masonry are not permitted relative displacement requirements of Section
unless approved for seismic loading. 13.3.2 . Architectural components shall be designed
Exceptions: considering vertical deflection due to joint rotation
of cantilever structural members.
1. Power actuated fasteners in concrete used
for support of acoustical tile or lay-in panel 13.5.3 Exterior Nonstructural Wall Elements
suspended ceiling applications and and Connections. Exterior nonstructural wall
distributed systems where the service load panels or elements that are attached to or enclose
on any individual fastener does not exceed the structure shall be designed to accommodate the
400 N. seismic relative displacements defined in Section
13.3.2 and movements due to temperature changes.
2. Power actuated fasteners in steel where the
Such elements shall be supported by means of
service load on any individual fastener
does not exceed 1100 N. positive and direct structural supports or by
mechanical connections and fasteners in the structure above are exempt from the
accordance with the following requirements: requirements of this section.
(c) Connections and panel joints shall allow for 13.5.6.1 Seismic Forces.
the story drift caused by relative seismic 13.5.6.1.1 The weight of the ceiling, 𝑊𝑝 , shall
displacements (𝐷𝑝 ) determined in Section
include the ceiling grid; ceiling tiles or panels; light
13.3.2 , or 13 mm, whichever is greatest. fixtures if attached to, clipped to, or laterally
(d) Connections to permit movement in the plane supported by the ceiling grid; and other components
of the panel for story drift shall be sliding that are laterally supported by the ceiling. 𝑊𝑝 shall
connections using slotted or oversize holes, be taken as not less than 200 N/m2.
connections that permit movement by
13.5.6.1.2 The seismic force, 𝐹𝑝 , shall be
bending of steel, or other connections that
provide equivalent sliding or ductile capacity. transmitted through the ceiling attachments to the
building structural elements or the ceiling–structure
(e) The connecting member itself shall have boundary.
sufficient ductility and rotation capacity to
13.5.6.2 Industry Standard Construction
preclude fracture of the concrete or brittle
for Acoustical Tile or Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
failures at or near welds.
Unless designed in accordance with Section
(f) All fasteners in the connecting system such as 13.5.6.3 , or seismically qualified in accordance
bolts, inserts, welds, and dowels and the body with Section 13.2.5 or 13.2.6 , acoustical tile or lay-
of the connectors shall be designed for the in panel ceilings shall be designed and constructed
force (𝐹𝑝 ) determined by Section 13.3.1 with in accordance with this section.
values of 𝑅𝑝 and 𝑎𝑝 taken from Table 13-2 13.5.6.2.1 Seismic Design Category C.
applied at the center of mass of the panel. Acoustical tile or lay-in panel ceilings in structures
(g) Where anchorage is achieved using flat straps assigned to Seismic Design Category C shall be
embedded in concrete or masonry, such straps designed and installed in accordance with ASTM
shall be attached to or hooked around C635, ASTM C636, and ASTM E580, Section 4—
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as Seismic Design Category C.
to effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing 13.5.6.2.2 Seismic Design Categories D
steel or to assure that pullout of anchorage is through F. Acoustical tile or lay-in panel ceilings
not the initial failure mechanism. in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F shall be
13.5.4 Glass. Glass in glazed curtain walls and designed and installed in accordance with ASTM
storefronts shall be designed and installed in C635, ASTM C636, and ASTM E580, Section 5—
accordance with Section 13.5.9 . Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F as modified
by this section. Acoustical tile or lay-in panel
13.5.5 Out-of-Plane Bending. Transverse or out- ceilings shall also comply with the following:
of-plane bending or deformation of a component or
system that is subjected to forces as determined in (a) The width of the perimeter supporting
Section 13.5.2 shall not exceed the deflection closure angle or channel shall be not less
capability of the component or system. than 50 mm. Where perimeter supporting
clips are used, they shall be qualified in
13.5.6 Suspended Ceilings. Suspended ceilings accordance with approved test criteria. In
shall be in accordance with this section. each orthogonal horizontal direction, one
Exceptions: end of the ceiling grid shall be attached to
the closure angle or channel. The other end
1. Suspended ceilings with areas less than or in each horizontal direction shall have a 19
equal to 14 m2 that are surrounded by walls mm clearance from the wall and shall rest
or soffits that are laterally braced to the upon and be free to slide on a closure angle
structure above are exempt from the or channel.
requirements of this section. (b) For ceiling areas exceeding 230 m2, a
2. Suspended ceilings constructed of screw- seismic separation joint or full height
or nail-attached gypsum board on one level partition that breaks the ceiling up into
that are surrounded by and connected to areas not exceeding 230 m2, each with a
walls or soffits that are laterally braced to ratio of the long to short dimension less
than or equal to 4, shall be provided unless 2. Seismic loads are not transmitted by
structural analyses are performed of the friction, power actuated fasteners,
ceiling bracing system for the prescribed adhesives, or by friction produced solely
seismic forces that demonstrate ceiling by the effects of gravity.
penetrations and closure angles or channels 3. The design analysis of the bracing system
provide sufficient clearance to includes the destabilizing effects of
accommodate the anticipated lateral individual members buckling in
displacement. Each area shall be provided compression.
with closure angles or channels in
4. Bracing and pedestals are of structural or
accordance with Section 13.5.6.2.2 .(a) and
mechanical shapes produced to ASTM
horizontal restraints or bracing.
specifications that specify minimum
13.5.6.3 Integral Construction. As an mechanical properties. Electrical tubing
alternate to providing large clearances around shall not be used.
sprinkler system penetrations through ceilings, the 5. Floor stringers that are designed to carry
sprinkler system and ceiling grid are permitted to be axial seismic loads and that are
designed and tied together as an integral unit. Such mechanically fastened to the supporting
a design shall consider the mass and flexibility of pedestals are used.
all elements involved, including the ceiling,
sprinkler system, light fixtures, and mechanical 13.5.8 Partitions.
(HVAC) appurtenances. Such design shall be 13.5.8.1 General.
performed by a registered design professional.
13.5.8.1.1 Partitions that are tied to the ceiling
13.5.7 Access Floors and all partitions greater than 1.8 m in height shall
13.5.7.1 General. be laterally braced to the building structure.
13.5.7.1.1 The weight of the access floor, 𝑊𝑝 , 13.5.8.1.2 Such bracing shall be independent
shall include the weight of the floor system, 100 of any ceiling lateral force bracing. Bracing shall be
percent of the weight of all equipment fastened to spaced to limit horizontal deflection at the partition
the floor, and 25 percent of the weight of all head to be compatible with ceiling deflection
equipment supported by but not fastened to the requirements as determined in Section 13.5.6 for
floor. The seismic force, 𝐹𝑝 , shall be transmitted suspended ceilings and elsewhere in this section for
other systems.
from the top surface of the access floor to the
supporting structure. Exception: Partitions that meet all of the
13.5.7.1.2 Overturning effects of equipment following conditions:
fastened to the access floor panels also shall be 1. The partition height does not exceed 2700
considered. The ability of “slip on” heads for mm.
pedestals shall be evaluated for suitability to 2. The linear weight of the partition does not
transfer overturning effects of equipment. exceed the product of 0.5 kN times the
13.5.7.1.3 Where checking individual height (m) of the partition.
pedestals for overturning effects, the maximum 3. The partition horizontal seismic load does
concurrent axial load shall not exceed the portion of not exceed 0.25 kN/m2.
Wp assigned to the pedestal under consideration. 13.5.8.2 Glass. Glass in glazed partitions
13.5.7.2 Special Access Floors. shall be designed and installed in accordance with
Section 13.5.9 .
13.5.7.2.1 Access floors shall be considered
to be “special access floors” if they are designed to 13.5.9 Glass in Glazed Curtain Walls, Glazed
comply with the following considerations: Storefronts, and Glazed Partitions
1. Connections transmitting seismic loads 13.5.9.1 General. Glass in glazed curtain
consist of mechanical fasteners, anchors walls, glazed storefronts, and glazed partitions shall
satisfying the requirements of Chapter 17 meet the relative displacement requirement of
of SBC 304, welding, or bearing. Design Equation (13-10):
load capacities comply with recognized Δ𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑢𝑡 ≥ 1.25𝐼𝑒 𝐷𝑝 (13-10)
design codes and/or certified test results.
determined by the following equation provided that 13.6.4 Electrical Components. Electrical
the component, supports, and attachment can be components with 𝐼𝑝 greater than 1.0 shall be
reasonably represented analytically by a simple designed for the seismic forces and relative
spring and mass single degree-of-freedom system: displacements defined in Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2
and shall satisfy the following additional
𝑊𝑝 requirements:
𝑇𝑝 = 2𝜋√ (13-12)
𝑘𝑝 𝑔
1. Provision shall be made to eliminate
where, seismic impact between components.
𝑇𝑝 = Component fundamental period; 2. Loads imposed on the components by
𝑊𝑝 = Component operating weight; attached utility or service lines that are
𝑔 = Gravitational acceleration; attached to separate structures shall be
𝐾𝑝 = Combined stiffness of the component, evaluated.
supports and attachments, determined in terms of 3. Batteries on racks shall have wrap-around
load per unit deflection at the center of gravity of restraints to ensure that the batteries will
the component. not fall from the racks. Spacers shall be
13.6.2.2 Alternatively, the fundamental used between restraints and cells to prevent
period of the component, 𝑇𝑝 , in seconds is permitted damage to cases. Racks shall be evaluated
for sufficient lateral load capacity.
to be determined from experimental test data or by
a properly substantiated analysis. 4. Internal coils of dry type transformers shall
be positively attached to their supporting
13.6.3 Mechanical Components. HVAC substructure within the transformer
ductwork shall meet the requirements of Section enclosure.
13.6.7 . Piping systems shall meet the requirements
5. Electrical control panels, computer
of Section 13.6.8. Boilers and vessels shall meet the
equipment, and other items with slide-out
requirements of Section 13.6.9 . Elevators shall meet
components shall have a latching
the requirements of Section 13.6.10 . All other
mechanism to hold the components in
mechanical components shall meet the
place.
requirements of Section 13.6.11 . Mechanical
components with 𝐼𝑝 greater than 1.0 shall be 6. Electrical cabinet design shall comply with
designed for the seismic forces and relative the applicable National Electrical
displacements defined in Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
and shall satisfy the following additional standards. Cutouts in the lower shear panel
requirements: that have not been made by the
manufacturer and reduce significantly the
1. Provision shall be made to eliminate strength of the cabinet shall be specifically
seismic impact for components vulnerable evaluated.
to impact, for components constructed of 7. The attachments for additional external
nonductile materials, and in cases where items weighing more than 450 N shall be
material ductility will be reduced due to specifically evaluated if not provided by
service conditions (e.g., low temperature the manufacturer.
applications).
8. Where conduit, cable trays, or similar
2. The possibility of loads imposed on electrical distribution components are
components by attached utility or service attached to structures that could displace
lines, due to differential movement of relative to one another and for isolated
support points on separate structures, shall structures where such components cross
be evaluated. the isolation interface, the components
3. Where piping or HVAC ductwork shall be designed to accommodate the
components are attached to structures that seismic relative displacements defined in
could displace relative to one another and Section 13.3.2.
for isolated structures where such
components cross the isolation interface, 13.6.5 Component Supports. Mechanical and
the components shall be designed to electrical component supports (including those with
accommodate the seismic relative 𝐼𝑝 = 1.0) and the means by which they are attached
displacements defined in Section 13.3.2 . to the component shall be designed for the forces
(a) For piping constructed with ductile 1. Trapeze assemblies are used to support
materials (e.g., steel, aluminum, or piping whereby no single pipe exceeds the
copper), 90 percent of the minimum limits set forth in 3a, 3b, or 3c below and
specified yield strength. the total weight of the piping supported by
(b) For threaded connections in piping the trapeze assemblies is less than 145
constructed with ductile materials, 70 N/m.
percent of the minimum specified yield 2. The piping is supported by hangers and
strength. each hanger in the piping run is 300 mm or
(c) For piping constructed with nonductile less in length from the top of the pipe to the
materials (e.g., cast iron or ceramics), 10 supporting structure. Where pipes are
percent of the material minimum specified supported on a trapeze, the trapeze shall be
tensile strength. supported by hangers having a length of
300 mm or less. Where rod hangers are
(d) For threaded connections in piping
used, they shall be equipped with swivels,
constructed with nonductile materials, 8
eye nuts, or other devices to prevent
percent of the material minimum specified
bending in the rod.
tensile strength.
3. Piping having an 𝑅𝑝 in Table 13-3 of 4.5 or
13.6.8.6 Piping not detailed to greater is used and provisions are made to
accommodate the seismic relative displacements at avoid impact with other structural or
connections to other components shall be provided nonstructural components or to protect the
with connections having sufficient flexibility to piping in the event of such impact and
avoid failure of the connection between the where the following size requirements are
components. satisfied:
13.6.8.7 ASME Pressure Piping Systems. (a) For Seismic Design Category C where
13.6.8.7.1 Pressure piping systems, including 𝐼𝑝 is greater than 1.0, the nominal pipe
their supports, designed and constructed in size shall be 50 mm or less.
accordance with ASME B31 shall be deemed to (b) For Seismic Design Categories D, E, or
meet the force, displacement, and other F and 𝐼𝑝 is greater than 1.0, the nominal
requirements of this section. pipe size shall be 25 mm or less.
13.6.8.7.2 In lieu of specific force and (c) For Seismic Design Categories D, E, or
displacement requirements provided in ASME B31, F where 𝐼𝑝 = 1.0, the nominal pipe size
the force and displacement requirements of Section shall be 80 mm or less.
13.3 shall be used.
13.6.9 Boilers and Pressure Vessels.
13.6.8.7.3 Materials meeting the toughness
13.6.9.1 Boilers or pressure vessels
requirements of ASME B31 shall be considered
designed and constructed in accordance with
high-deformability materials.
ASME BPVC shall be deemed to meet the force,
13.6.8.8 Fire Protection Sprinkler Piping displacement, and other requirements of this
Systems. section.
13.6.8.8.1 Fire protection sprinkler piping, 13.6.9.2 In lieu of the specific force and
pipe hangers, and bracing designed and constructed displacement requirements provided in the ASME
in accordance with NFPA 13 shall be deemed to BPVC, the force and displacement requirements of
meet the force and displacement requirements of Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 shall be used.
this section.
13.6.9.3 Materials meeting the toughness
13.6.8.8.2 The exceptions of Section 13.6.8.9 requirements of ASME BPVC shall be considered
shall not apply. high-deformability materials.
13.6.8.9 Exceptions. 13.6.9.4 Other boilers and pressure vessels
13.6.8.9.1 Design of piping systems and designated as having an 𝐼𝑝 =1.5, but not designed
attachments for the seismic forces and relative and constructed in accordance with the
displacements of Section 13.3 shall not be required requirements of ASME BPVC, shall comply with
where one of the following conditions apply: the requirements of Section 13.6.11.
13.6.10 Elevator and Escalator Design designed and constructed in accordance with the
Requirements. Elevators and escalators designed reference documents in CHAPTER 23 shall meet the
in accordance with the seismic requirements of following:
ASME A17.1 shall be deemed to meet the seismic
1. Components, their supports and
force requirements of this section, except as
attachments shall comply with the
modified in the following text. The exceptions of
requirements of Sections 13.4 , 13.6.3 ,
Section 13.6.8.9 shall not apply to elevator piping.
13.6.4 , and 13.6.5 .
13.6.10.1 Escalators, Elevators, and 2. For mechanical components with
Hoistway Structural System. Escalators, hazardous substances and assigned a
elevators, and hoistway structural systems shall be component importance factor, 𝐼𝑝 , of 1.5 in
designed to meet the force and displacement accordance with Section 13.1.3 , and for
requirements of Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 . boilers and pressure vessels not designed
13.6.10.2 Elevator Equipment and in accordance with ASME BPVC, the
Controller Supports and Attachments. Elevator design strength for seismic loads in
equipment and controller supports and attachments combination with other service loads and
shall be designed to meet the force and appropriate environmental effects shall be
displacement requirements of Sections 13.3.1 and based on the following material properties:
13.3.2 . (a) For mechanical components
13.6.10.3 Seismic Controls for Elevators. constructed with ductile materials (e.g.,
Elevators operating with a speed of 46 m/min or steel, aluminum, or copper), 90 percent
greater shall be provided with seismic switches. of the minimum specified yield
Seismic switches shall provide an electric signal strength.
indicating that structural motions are of such a (b) For threaded connections in
magnitude that the operation of the elevators may components constructed with ductile
be impaired. Seismic switches in accordance with materials, 70 percent of the minimum
Section 8.4.10.1.2 of ASME A17.1 shall be deemed specified yield strength.
to meet the requirements of this section. (c) For mechanical components
Exception: In cases where seismic switches cannot constructed with nonductile materials
be located near a column in accordance with ASME (e.g., plastic, cast iron, or ceramics), 10
A17.1, they shall have two horizontal axes of percent of the material minimum
sensitivity and have a trigger level set to 20 percent specified tensile strength.
of the acceleration of gravity where located at or (d) For threaded connections in
near the base of the structure and 50 percent of the components constructed with
acceleration of gravity in all other locations. Upon nonductile materials, 8 percent of the
activation of the seismic switch, elevator operations material minimum specified tensile
shall conform to requirements of ASME A17.1, strength.
except as noted in the following text. In facilities
where the loss of the use of an elevator is a life-
safety issue, the elevator shall only be used after the
seismic switch has triggered provided that:
1. The elevator shall operate no faster than
the service speed.
2. Before the elevator is occupied, it is
operated from top to bottom and back to
top to verify that it is operable.
13.6.10.4 Retainer Plates. Retainer plates
are required at the top and bottom of the car and
counterweight.
13.6.11 Other Mechanical and Electrical
Components. Mechanical and electrical
components, including conveyor systems, not
where the weight of the nonbuilding structure is 15.4.1.1 Nonbuilding structures having
equal to or greater than 25 percent of the combined specific seismic design criteria established in
effective seismic weights of the nonbuilding reference documents shall be designed using the
structure and supporting structure, an analysis standards as amended herein. Where reference
combining the structural characteristics of both the documents are not cited herein, nonbuilding
nonbuilding structure and the supporting structures structures shall be designed in compliance with
shall be performed to determine the seismic design Sections 15.5 and 15.6 to resist minimum seismic
forces as follows: lateral forces that are not less than the requirements
of Section 12.8 with the following additions and
1. Where the fundamental period, 𝑇, of the
exceptions:
nonbuilding structure is less than 0.06 s,
the nonbuilding structure shall be 1. The seismic force-resisting system shall be
considered a rigid element with selected as follows:
appropriate distribution of its effective (a) For nonbuilding structures similar to
seismic weight. The supporting structure buildings, a system shall be selected from
shall be designed in accordance with the among the types indicated in Table 12-1 or
requirements of CHAPTER 12 or Section Table 15-1 subject to the system limitations
15.5 as appropriate, and the 𝑅 value of the and limits on structural height, ℎ𝑛 , based
combined system is permitted to be taken on the seismic design category indicated in
as the 𝑅 value of the supporting structural the table. The appropriate values of 𝑅, 𝛺0 ,
system. The nonbuilding structure and and 𝐶𝑑 indicated in the selected table shall
attachments shall be designed for the be used in determining the base shear,
forces using the procedures of CHAPTER element design forces, and design story
13 where the value of 𝑅𝑝 shall be taken as drift as indicated in this code. Design and
equal to the 𝑅 value of the nonbuilding detailing requirements shall comply with
structure as set forth in Table 15-2, and 𝑎𝑝 the sections referenced in the selected
shall be taken as 1.0. table.
2. Where the fundamental period, 𝑇, of the (b) For nonbuilding structures not similar to
nonbuilding structure is 0.06 s or greater, buildings, a system shall be selected from
the nonbuilding structure and supporting among the types indicated in Table 15-2
structure shall be modeled together in a subject to the system limitations and limits
combined model with appropriate stiffness on structural height, ℎ𝑛 , based on seismic
and effective seismic weight distributions. design category indicated in the table. The
The combined structure shall be designed appropriate values of 𝑅, 𝛺0 , and 𝐶𝑑
in accordance with Section 15.5 with the 𝑅 indicated in Table 15-2 shall be used in
value of the combined system taken as the determining the base shear, element design
lesser 𝑅 value of the nonbuilding structure forces, and design story drift as indicated in
or the supporting structure. The this code. Design and detailing
nonbuilding structure and attachments requirements shall comply with the
shall be designed for the forces determined sections referenced in Table 15-2.
for the nonbuilding structure in the (c) Where neither Table 15-1 nor Table 15-2
combined analysis. contains an appropriate entry, applicable
15.3.4 Architectural, Mechanical, and strength and other design criteria shall be
Electrical Components. Architectural, obtained from a reference document that is
mechanical, and electrical components supported applicable to the specific type of
by nonbuilding structures shall be designed in nonbuilding structure. Design and detailing
accordance with CHAPTER 13 of this code. requirements shall comply with the
reference document.
2. For nonbuilding systems that have an 𝑅 value
15.4 —Structural design provided in Table 15-2, the mini-mum specified
requirements value in (12-16) shall be replaced by
𝐶𝑠 = 0.044𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝐼𝑒 15-1)
15.4.1 Design Basis.
The value of 𝐶𝑠 shall not be taken as less than
0.03.
And for nonbuilding structures located where formance with the requirements of Section
𝑆1 ≥ 0.6𝑔, the minimum specified value in 11.4 .
Equation (12-17) shall be replaced by (b) The values for total lateral force and total
0.8𝑆1 15-2) base overturning moment used in design
𝐶𝑠 =
𝑅 shall not be less than 80 percent of the base
𝐼𝑒 shear value and overturning moment, each
Exception: Tanks and vessels that are designed adjusted for the effects of soil–structure
to AWWA D100, AWWA D103, API 650 interaction that is obtained using this code.
Appendix E, and API 620 Appendix L as
7. The base shear is permitted to be reduced in
modified by this code, and stacks and chimneys
accordance with Section 19.2.1 to account for the
that are designed to ACI 307 as modified by this
effects of soil–structure interaction. In no case
code, shall be subject to the larger of the
shall the reduced base shear be less than 0.7V.
minimum base shear value defined by the
reference document or the value determined by 8. Unless otherwise noted in CHAPTER 15 , the
replacing Equation (12-16) with the following: effects on the nonbuilding structure due to
gravity loads and seismic forces shall be
𝐶𝑠 = 0.044𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝐼𝑒 15-3) combined in accordance with the factored load
combinations as presented in Section 2.3.
The value of 𝐶𝑆 shall not be taken as less than 9. Where specifically required by CHAPTER 15 ,
0.01. And for nonbuilding structures located the design seismic force on nonbuilding
where 𝑆1 ≥ 0.6𝑔, the minimum specified value structures shall be as defined in Section 12.4.3 .
in Equation (12-17) shall be replaced by 15.4.1.2 Importance Factor.
0.5𝑆1 15-4) 15.4.1.2.1 The importance factor, 𝐼𝑒 , and risk
𝐶𝑠 = category for nonbuilding structures are based on the
𝑅
𝐼𝑒 relative hazard of the contents and the function. The
Minimum base shear requirements need not value of 𝐼𝑒 shall be the largest value determined by
apply to the convective (sloshing) component of the following:
liquid in tanks. (a) Applicable reference document listed in
3. The importance factor, 𝐼𝑒 , shall be as set forth in CHAPTER 23 .
Section 15.4.1.2 . (b) The largest value as selected from Table 1-3
4. The vertical distribution of the lateral seismic (c) As specified elsewhere in CHAPTER 15 .
forces in nonbuilding structures covered by this
section shall be determined: 15.4.2 Rigid Nonbuilding Structures.
(a) Using the requirements of Section 12.8.3, or 15.4.2.1 Nonbuilding structures that have a
(b) Using the procedures of Section 12.9, or fundamental period, 𝑇, less than 0.06 s, including
their anchorages, shall be designed for the lateral
(c) In accordance with the reference document
force obtained from the following:
applicable to the specific non-building
structure. 𝑉 = 0.30𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝑊𝐼𝑒 (15-5)
5. For nonbuilding structural systems containing where,
liquids, gases, and granular solids supported at 𝑉 = the total design lateral seismic base shear force
the base as defined in Section 15.7.1, the applied to a nonbuilding structure;
minimum seismic design force shall not be less 𝑆𝐷𝑆 = the site design response acceleration as
than that required by the reference document for determined from Section 11.4.3;
the specific system. 𝑊 = nonbuilding structure operating weight;
6. Where a reference document provides a basis for 𝐼𝑒 = the importance factor determined in
the earthquake resistant design of a particular accordance with Section 15.4.1.2 .
type of nonbuilding structure covered by of The force shall be distributed with height in
CHAPTER 15 , such a standard shall not be used
accordance with Section 12.8.3 .
unless the following limitations are met: 15.4.3 Loads.
(a) The seismic ground accelerations, and 15.4.3.1 The seismic effective weight 𝑊 for
seismic coefficients, shall be in con- nonbuilding structures shall include the dead load
and other loads as defined for structures in Section 15.4.7.1 Deflection limits and structure
12.7.2 . separation shall be determined in accordance with
this code unless specifically amended in CHAPTER
15.4.3.2 For purposes of calculating design
15 .
seismic forces in nonbuilding structures, 𝑊 also
shall include all normal operating contents for items 15.4.8 Site-Specific Response Spectra. Where
such as tanks, vessels, bins, hoppers, and the required by a reference document or the Building
contents of piping. Official, specific types of nonbuilding structures
shall be designed for site-specific criteria that
15.4.4 Fundamental Period.
account for local seismicity and geology, expected
15.4.4.1 The fundamental period of the recurrence intervals, and magnitudes of events from
nonbuilding structure shall be determined using the known seismic hazards (see Section 11.4.6 of this
structural properties and deformation code). If a longer recurrence interval is defined in
characteristics of the resisting elements in a the reference document for the nonbuilding
properly substantiated analysis as indicated in structure, such as liquefied natural gas (LNG) tanks
Section 12.8.2 . (NFPA 59A), the recurrence interval required in the
15.4.4.2 Alternatively, the fundamental reference document shall be used.
period 𝑇 is permitted to be computed from the 15.4.9 Anchors in Concrete or Masonry
following equation:
15.4.9.1 Anchors in Concrete. Anchors in
concrete used for nonbuilding structure anchorage
∑𝑛 𝑤𝑖 𝛿𝑖2
𝑇 = 2𝜋√ 𝑖=1 (15-6) shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 17 of
𝑔 ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑓𝑖 𝛿𝑖 SBC 304.
15.4.4.3 The values of 𝑓𝑖 represent any 15.4.9.2 Anchors in Masonry. Anchors in
lateral force distribution in accordance with the masonry used for nonbuilding structure anchorage
principles of structural mechanics. The elastic shall be designed in accordance with SBC 305.
deflections, 𝛿𝑖 , shall be calculated using the applied Anchors shall be designed to be governed by the
lateral forces, 𝑓𝑖 . tensile or shear strength of a ductile steel element.
15.4.4.4 Equations (12-18) through (12-21) Exception: Anchors shall be permitted to be
shall not be used for determining the period of a designed so that the attachment that the anchor is
nonbuilding structure. connecting to the structure undergoes ductile
yielding at a load level corresponding to anchor
forces not greater than their design strength, or the
15.4.5 Drift Limitations. minimum design strength of the anchors shall be at
least 2.5 times the factored forces transmit-ted by
15.4.5.1 The drift limitations of Section the attachment.
12.12.1 need not apply to nonbuilding structures if
a rational analysis indicates they can be exceeded 15.4.9.3 Post-Installed Anchors in
without adversely affecting structural stability or Concrete and Masonry. Post-installed anchors in
attached or interconnected components and concrete shall be prequalified for seismic
elements such as walkways and piping. applications in accordance with ACI 355.2. Post-
installed anchors in masonry shall be prequalified
15.4.5.2 P-delta effects shall be considered for seismic applications in accordance with
where critical to the function or stability of the approved qualification procedures.
structure.
15.5 —Nonbuilding structures similar
15.4.6 Materials Requirements.
to buildings
15.4.6.1 The requirements regarding
15.5.1 General.
specific materials in CHAPTER 14 shall be
applicable unless specifically exempted in 15.5.1.1 Nonbuilding structures similar to
CHAPTER 15 . buildings as defined in Section 11.2 shall be
designed in accordance with this code as modified
15.4.7 Deflection Limits and Structure
by this section and the specific reference
Separation.
documents.
code and the appropriate factors contained in berthing, wave, and current on piers and wharves as
Section 15.4. required.
15.5.5 Structural Towers for Tanks and Vessels 15.5.6.2.4 Structural detailing shall consider
the effects of the marine environment.
15.5.5.1 General. In addition to the
requirements of Section 15.5.1 , structural towers 15.6 —General requirements for
that support tanks and vessels shall be designed to nonbuilding structures not similar to
meet the requirements of Section 15.3 . In addition, buildings
the following special considerations shall be
included: 15.6.1 Nonbuilding structures that do not have
lateral and vertical seismic force-resisting systems
(a) The distribution of the lateral base shear that are similar to buildings shall be designed in
from the tank or vessel onto the supporting accordance with this code as modified by this
structure shall consider the relative section and the specific reference documents.
stiffness of the tank and resisting structural
elements. 15.6.1.1 Loads and load distributions shall
not be less demanding than those determined in this
(b) The distribution of the vertical reactions
code.
from the tank or vessel onto the supporting
structure shall consider the relative 15.6.1.2 The combination of earthquake
stiffness of the tank and resisting structural load effects, 𝐸, shall be determined in accordance
elements. Where the tank or vessel is with Section 12.4.2 .
supported on grillage beams, the calculated
Exception: The redundancy factor, 𝜌, per Section
vertical reaction due to weight and
12.3.4 shall be taken as 1.
overturning shall be increased at least 20
percent to account for nonuniform support. 15.6.2 Earth-Retaining Structures.
The grillage beam and vessel attachment
15.6.2.1 This section applies to all earth-
shall be designed for this increased design
retaining structures assigned to Seismic Design
value.
Category D, E, or F.
(c) Seismic displacements of the tank and
vessel shall consider the deformation of the 15.6.2.2 The lateral earth pressures due to
support structure where determining P- earthquake ground motions shall be determined in
delta effects or evaluating required accordance with Section 11.8.3 .
clearances to prevent pounding of the tank 15.6.2.3 The risk category shall be
on the structure. determined by the proximity of the earth-retaining
15.5.6 Piers and Wharves structure to other buildings and structures.
15.5.6.1 General. Piers and wharves are 15.6.2.4 If failure of the earth-retaining
structures located in waterfront areas that project structure would affect the adjacent building or
into a body of water or that parallel the shoreline. structure, the risk category shall not be less than that
of the adjacent building or structure.
15.5.6.2 Design Basis.
15.6.2.5 Earth-retaining walls are permitted
15.5.6.2.1 In addition to the requirements of to be designed for seismic loads as either yielding
Section 15.5.1 , piers and wharves that are accessible or nonyielding walls.
to the general public, such as cruise ship terminals
and piers with retail or commercial offices or 15.6.2.6 Cantilevered reinforced concrete
restaurants, shall be designed to comply with this or masonry retaining walls shall be assumed to be
code. yielding walls and shall be designed as simple
flexural wall elements.
15.5.6.2.2 Piers and wharves that are not
accessible to the general public are beyond the 15.6.3 Stacks and Chimneys.
scope of this section. 15.6.3.1 Stacks and chimneys are permitted
15.5.6.2.3 The design shall account for the to be either lined or unlined and shall be constructed
effects of liquefaction and soil failure collapse from concrete, steel, or masonry.
mechanisms, as well as consider all applicable 15.6.3.2 Steel stacks, concrete stacks, steel
marine loading combinations, such as mooring, chimneys, concrete chimneys, and liners shall be
designed to resist seismic lateral forces determined the stack, the jamb reinforcing shall be extended
from a substantiated analysis using reference and developed into the footing or base mat.
documents.
15.6.3.12 The percentage of longitudinal
15.6.3.3 Interaction of the stack or chimney reinforcement in jamb regions shall meet the
with the liners shall be considered. requirements of 10.6.1.1 of SBC 304 for
compression members.
15.6.3.4 A minimum separation shall be
provided between the liner and chimney equal to 𝐶𝑑 15.6.4 Amusement Structures. Amusement
times the calculated differential lateral drift. structures are permanently fixed structures
constructed primarily for the conveyance and
15.6.3.5 Concrete chimneys and stacks
entertainment of people. Amusement structures
shall be designed in accordance with the
shall be designed to resist seismic lateral forces
requirements of ACI 307 except that (1) the design
determined from a substantiated analysis using
base shear shall be determined based on Section
reference documents.
15.4.1 of this code; (2) the seismic coefficients shall
be based on the values provided in Table 15-2, and 15.6.5 Special Hydraulic Structures.
(3) openings shall be detailed as required below.
15.6.5.1 Special hydraulic structures are
When modal response spectrum analysis is used for
structures that are contained inside liquid-
design, the procedures of Section 12.9 shall be
containing structures. These structures are exposed
permitted to be used.
to liquids on both wall surfaces at the same head
15.6.3.6 For concrete chimneys and stacks elevation under normal operating conditions.
assigned to SDC D, E, and F, splices for vertical Special hydraulic structures are subjected to out-of-
rebar shall be staggered such that no more than 50% plane forces only during an earthquake where the
of the bars are spliced at any section and alternate structure is subjected to differential hydrodynamic
lap splices are staggered by the development length. fluid forces. Examples of special hydraulic
structures include separation walls, baffle walls,
15.6.3.7 In addition, where the loss of cross-
weirs, and other similar structures.
sectional area is greater than 10%, cross sections in
the regions of breachings/openings shall be 15.6.5.2 Design Basis.
designed and detailed for vertical force, shear force,
15.6.5.2.1 Special hydraulic structures shall
and bending moment demands along the vertical
be designed for out-of-phase movement of the fluid.
direction, determined for the affected cross section
Unbalanced forces from the motion of the liquid
using an overstrength factor of 1.5.
must be applied simultaneously “in front of” and
15.6.3.8 The region where the overstrength “behind” these elements.
factor applies shall extend above and below the
15.6.5.2.2 Structures subject to
opening(s) by a distance equal to half of the width
hydrodynamic pressures induced by earthquakes
of the largest opening in the affected region.
shall be designed for rigid body and sloshing liquid
Appropriate reinforcement development lengths
forces and their own inertia force.
shall be provided beyond the required region of
overstrength. 15.6.5.2.3 The height of sloshing shall be
determined and compared to the freeboard height of
15.6.3.9 The jamb regions around each
the structure.
opening shall be detailed using the column tie
requirements of 10.7.6 of SBC 304. 15.6.5.2.4 Interior elements, such as baffles or
roof supports, also shall be designed for the effects
15.6.3.10 Such detailing shall extend for a
of unbalanced forces and sloshing.
jamb width of a minimum of two times the wall
thickness and for a height of the opening height plus 15.6.6 Secondary Containment Systems.
twice the wall thickness above and below the 15.6.6.1 Secondary containment systems,
opening, but no less than the development length of such as impoundment dikes and walls, shall meet
the longitudinal bars. the requirements of the applicable standards for
15.6.3.11 Where the existence of a footing or tanks and vessels and the Building Official.
base mat precludes the ability to achieve the 15.6.6.2 Secondary containment systems
extension distance below the opening and within shall be designed to withstand the effects of the
maximum considered earthquake ground motion
where empty and two thirds of the maximum at the base (hereafter referred to generically as
considered earthquake ground motion where full “tanks and vessels”).
including all hydrodynamic forces as determined in
15.7.1.2 Tanks and vessels covered herein
accordance with the procedures of Section 11.4 .
include reinforced concrete, prestressed concrete,
15.6.6.3 Where determined by the risk steel, aluminum, and fiber-reinforced plastic
assessment required by Section 1.6.3 or by the materials.
Building Official that the site may be subject to
15.7.1.3 Tanks supported on elevated levels
after shocks of the same magnitude as the maximum
in buildings shall be designed in accordance with
considered motion, secondary containment systems
Section 15.3 .
shall be designed to withstand the effects of the
maximum considered earthquake ground motion 15.7.2 Design Basis.
where full including all hydrodynamic forces as 15.7.2.1 Tanks and vessels storing liquids,
determined in accordance with the procedures of gases, and granular solids shall be designed in
Section 11.4. accordance with this code and shall be designed to
15.6.6.4 Freeboard. meet the requirements of the applicable reference
documents listed in CHAPTER 23 .
15.6.6.4.1 Sloshing of the liquid within the
secondary containment area shall be considered in 15.7.2.2 Resistance to seismic forces shall
determining the height of the impound. be determined from a substantiated analysis based
on the applicable reference documents listed in
15.6.6.4.2 Where the primary containment
CHAPTER 23 .
has not been designed with a reduction in the
structure category (i.e., no reduction in importance 1. Damping for the convective (sloshing)
factor 𝐼𝑒 ) as permitted by Section 1.6.3 , no force component shall be taken as 0.5
freeboard provision is required. percent.
15.6.6.4.3 Where the primary containment 2. Impulsive and convective components
has been designed for a reduced structure category shall be combined by the direct sum or the
(i.e., importance factor 𝐼𝑒 reduced) as permitted by square root of the sum of the squares
Section 1.6.3 , a minimum freeboard, 𝛿𝑠 , shall be (SRSS) method where the modal periods
provided where are separated. If significant modal
coupling may occur, the complete
𝛿𝑠 = 0.42𝐷𝑆𝑎𝑐 (15-8) quadratic combination (CQC) method
where, 𝑆𝑎𝑐 is the spectral acceleration of the shall be used.
convective component and is determined according 3. Vertical earthquake forces shall be
to the procedures of Section 15.7.6.1 using 0.5 considered in accordance with the
percent damping; For circular impoundment dikes, applicable reference document. If the
𝐷 shall be taken as the diameter of the reference document permits the user the
impoundment dike. For rectangular impoundment option of including or excluding the
dikes, 𝐷 shall be taken as the plan dimension of the vertical earthquake force to comply with
impoundment dike, 𝐿, for the direction under this code, it shall be included. For tanks
consideration. and vessels not covered by a reference
15.6.7 Telecommunication Towers. document, the forces due to the vertical
acceleration shall be defined as follows:
15.6.7.1 Self-supporting and guyed
telecommunication towers shall be designed to (a) Hydrodynamic vertical and lateral
resist seismic lateral forces determined from a forces in tank walls: The increase in
substantiated analysis using reference documents. hydrostatic pressures due to the vertical
excitation of the contained liquid shall
15.7 —Tanks and vessels correspond to an effective increase in
15.7.1 General. unit weight, 𝐿 , of the stored liquid equal
to 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝐿 .
15.7.1.1 This section applies to all tanks,
vessels, bins, and silos, and similar containers (b) Hydrodynamic hoop forces in
storing liquids, gases, and granular solids supported cylindrical tank walls: In a cylindrical
tank wall, the hoop force per unit height,
𝑁ℎ , at height 𝑦 from the base, associated
with the vertical excitation of the Support towers using tension-only bracing
contained liquid, shall be computed in shall be designed such that the full cross-
accordance with Equation (15-9). section of the tension element can yield
𝐷𝑖 during overload conditions.
𝑁ℎ = 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 γ𝐿 (𝐻𝐿 − 𝑦) ( ) (15-9)
2 (d) In support towers for tanks and vessels,
where, compression struts that resist the reaction
𝐷 = inside tank diameter;
𝑖 forces from tension braces shall be
𝐻𝐿 = liquid height inside the tank; designed to resist the lesser of the yield load
𝑦 = distance from base of the tank to of the brace, 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑦 , or 𝛺𝑜 times the
height being investigated; calculated tension load in the brace.
𝐿 = unit weight of stored liquid. (e) The vessel stiffness relative to the support
(c) Vertical inertia forces in cylindrical and system (foundation, support tower, skirt,
rectangular tank walls: Vertical inertia etc.) shall be considered in determining
forces associated with the vertical forces in the vessel, the resisting elements,
acceleration of the structure itself shall and the connections.
be taken equal to 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆𝑊. (f) For concrete liquid-containing structures,
15.7.3 Strength and Ductility. system ductility, and energy dissipation
under unfactored loads shall not be allowed
15.7.3.1 Structural members that are part of to be achieved by inelastic deformations to
the seismic force-resisting system shall be designed such a degree as to jeopardize the
to provide the following: serviceability of the structure. Stiffness
(a) Connections to seismic force-resisting degradation and energy dissipation shall be
elements, excluding anchors (bolts or rods) allowed to be obtained either through
embedded in concrete, shall be designed to limited microcracking, or by means of
develop 𝛺𝑜 times the calculated connection lateral force resistance mechanisms that
design force. For anchors (bolts or rods) dissipate energy without damaging the
embedded in concrete, the design of the structure.
anchor embedment shall meet the 15.7.4 Flexibility of Piping Attachments.
requirements of Section 15.7.5.
Additionally, the connection of the anchors 15.7.4.1 Design of piping systems
to the tank or vessel shall be designed to connected to tanks and vessels shall consider the
develop the lesser of the strength of the potential movement of the connection points during
anchor in tension as determined by the earthquakes and provide sufficient flexibility to
reference document or 𝛺𝑜 times the avoid release of the product by failure of the piping
calculated anchor design force. The system.
overstrength requirements of Section 15.7.4.2 The piping system and supports
12.4.3 , and the 𝛺𝑜 values tabulated in Table shall be designed so as not to impart significant
15-2 , do not apply to the design of walls, mechanical loading on the attachment to the tank or
including interior walls, of tanks or vessel shell.
vessels.
15.7.4.3 Mechanical devices that add
(b) Penetrations, manholes, and openings in flexibility, such as bellows, expansion joints, and
shell elements shall be designed to maintain other flexible apparatus, are permitted to be used
the strength and stability of the shell to where they are designed for seismic displacements
carry tensile and compressive membrane and defined operating pressure.
shell forces.
(c) Support towers for tanks and vessels with 15.7.4.4 Unless otherwise calculated, the
irregular bracing, unbraced panels, minimum displacements in Table 15-3 shall be
asymmetric bracing, or concentrated assumed. For attachment points located above the
masses shall be designed using the support or foundation elevation, the displacements
requirements of Section 12.3.2 for irregular in Table 15-3 shall be increased to account for drift
structures. Support towers using chevron or of the tank or vessel relative to the base of support.
eccentric braced framing shall comply with 15.7.4.5 The piping system and tank
the seismic requirements of this code. connection shall also be designed to tolerate Cd
times the displacements given in Table 15-3 without 15.7.5.3 The following special detailing
rupture, although permanent deformations and requirements shall apply to steel tank and vessel
inelastic behavior in the piping supports and tank anchor bolts in SDC C, D, E, and F.
shell is permitted.
15.7.5.3.1 Anchorage shall be in accordance
15.7.4.6 For attachment points located with Section 15.4.9, whereby the anchor
above the support or foundation elevation, the embedment into the concrete shall be designed to
displacements in Table 15-3 shall be increased to develop the steel strength of the anchor in tension.
account for drift of the tank or vessel.
15.7.5.3.2 The steel strength of the anchor in
15.7.4.7 The values given in Table 15-3 do tension shall be determined in accordance with SBC
not include the influence of relative movements of 304, Equation 17.4.1.2. The anchor shall have a
the foundation and piping anchorage points due to minimum gauge length of eight diameters.
foundation movements (e.g., settlement, seismic
15.7.5.3.3 Post-installed anchors are
displacements).
permitted to be used in accordance with Section
15.7.4.8 The effects of the foundation 15.4.9.3 provided the anchor embedment into the
movements shall be included in the piping system concrete is designed to develop the steel strength of
design including the determination of the the anchor in tension.
mechanical loading on the tank or vessel, and the
15.7.5.3.4 In either case, the load
total displacement capacity of the mechanical
combinations with overstrength of Section 12.4.3
devices intended to add flexibility.
are not to be used to size the anchor bolts for tanks
15.7.4.9 The anchorage ratio, 𝐽, for self- and horizontal and vertical vessels.
anchored tanks shall comply with the criteria shown
15.7.6 Ground-Supported Storage Tanks for
in Table 15-4 and is defined as
Liquids
𝑀𝑟𝑤
𝐽= 2 (15-10) 15.7.6.1 General. Ground-supported, flat
𝐷 (𝑤𝑡 + 𝑤𝑎 ) bottom tanks storing liquids shall be designed to
𝑊𝑠 resist the seismic forces calculated using one of the
𝑤𝑡 = + 𝑤𝑟 (15-11)
𝜋𝐷 following procedures:
where,
𝑤𝑟 = roof load acting on the shell in N/m of shell 1. The base shear and overturning moment
circumference. Only permanent roof loads shall be calculated as if the tank and the entire
included. Roof live load shall not be included; contents are a rigid mass system per
𝑤𝑎 = maximum weight of the tank contents that Section 15.4.2 .
may be used to resist the shell overturning moment 2. Tanks or vessels storing liquids in Risk
in N/m of shell circumference. Usually consists of Category IV, or with a diameter greater
an annulus of liquid limited by the bending strength than 6 m, shall be designed to consider the
of the tank bottom or annular plate; hydrodynamic pressures of the liquid in
𝑀𝑟𝑤 = the overturning moment applied at the determining the equivalent lateral forces
bottom of the shell due to the seismic design loads and lateral force distribution per the
in N-m (also known as the “ringwall moment”); applicable reference documents listed in
𝐷 = tank diameter in m; CHAPTER 23 and the requirements of
𝑊𝑠 = total weight of tank shell in N. Section 15.7 .
15.7.5 Anchorage. 3. The force and displacement requirements
of Section 15.4 of this code.
15.7.5.1 Tanks and vessels at grade are
permitted to be designed without anchorage where 15.7.6.2 The design of tanks storing liquids
they meet the requirements for unanchored tanks in shall consider the impulsive and convective
reference documents. (sloshing) effects and their consequences on the
tank, foundation, and attached elements.
15.7.5.2 Tanks and vessels supported above
grade on structural towers or building structures 15.7.6.3 The impulsive component
shall be anchored to the supporting structure. corresponds to the high-frequency amplified
response to the lateral ground motion of the tank
roof, the shell, and the portion of the contents that
moves in unison with the shell.
tank is full of stored product. The vertical bending in the wall. The
maximum calculated seismic base shear, 𝑉, connection between the wall and floor shall
shall not exceed be designed to resist the maximum
𝑉 < 𝑊 𝑡𝑎𝑛 30° (15-22) tangential shear.
𝑊 shall be determined using the effective seismic 15.7.6.8.7 Pressure Stability.
weight of the tank, roof, and contents after
reduction for coincident vertical earthquake. Lower 15.7.6.8.7.1 For steel tanks, the internal
values of the friction factor shall be used if the pressure from the stored product stiffens thin
design of the tank bottom to supporting foundation cylindrical shell structural elements subjected to
does not justify the friction value above (e.g., leak membrane compression forces.
detection membrane beneath the bottom with a 15.7.6.8.7.2 This stiffening effect is permitted
lower friction factor, smooth bottoms, etc.). to be considered in resisting seismically induced
Alternatively, the friction factor is permitted to be compressive forces if permitted by the reference
determined by testing in accordance with Section document or the Building Official.
11.1.4 .
15.7.6.8.8 Shell Support.
(a) No additional lateral anchorage is required
for anchored steel tanks designed in 15.7.6.8.8.1 Steel tanks resting on concrete
accordance with reference documents. ring walls or slabs shall have a uniformly supported
(b) The lateral shear transfer behavior for annulus under the shell.
special tank configurations (e.g., shovel 15.7.6.8.8.2 Uniform support shall be provided
bottoms, highly crowned tank bottoms, by one of the following methods:
tanks on grillage) can be unique and are
(a) Shimming and grouting the annulus.
beyond the scope of this code.
(b) Using fiberboard or other suitable padding.
15.7.6.8.6 Local Shear Transfer.
(c) Using butt-welded bottom or annular plates
15.7.6.8.6.1 Local transfer of the shear from the resting directly on the foundation.
roof to the wall and the wall of the tank into the base (d) Using closely spaced shims (without
shall be considered. structural grout) provided that the localized
15.7.6.8.6.2 For cylindrical tanks and vessels, bearing loads are considered in the tank
the peak local tangential shear per unit length shall wall and foundation to prevent local
be calculated by crippling and spalling.
2𝑉 15.7.6.8.8.3 Anchored tanks shall be shimmed
𝑣𝑚𝑎𝑥 = (15-23) and grouted.
𝜋𝐷
15.7.6.8.8.4 Local buckling of the steel shell for
(a) Tangential shear in flat bottom steel tanks the peak compressive force due to operating loads
shall be transferred through the welded and seismic overturning shall be considered.
connection to the steel bottom. This
transfer mechanism is deemed acceptable 15.7.6.8.9 Repair, Alteration, or
for steel tanks designed in accordance with Reconstruction.
the reference documents where SDS < 1.0g. 15.7.6.8.9.1 Repairs, modifications, or
(b) For concrete tanks with a sliding base reconstruction (i.e., cut down and re-erect) of a tank
where the lateral shear is resisted by or vessel shall conform to industry standard practice
friction between the tank wall and the base, and this code.
the friction coefficient value used for
15.7.6.8.9.2 For welded steel tanks storing
design shall not exceed tan 30°.
liquids, see API 653 and the applicable reference
(c) Fixed-base or hinged-base concrete tanks document listed in CHAPTER 23 .
transfer the horizontal seismic base shear
shared by membrane (tangential) shear and 15.7.6.8.9.3 Tanks that are relocated shall be re-
radial shear into the foundation. For evaluated for the seismic loads for the new site and
anchored flexible-base concrete tanks, the the requirements of new construction in accordance
majority of the base shear is resisted by with the appropriate reference document and this
membrane (tangential) shear through the code.
anchoring system with only insignificant
15.7.7 Water Storage and Water Treatment design, and erection requirements for vertical,
Tanks and Vessels cylindrical, aboveground bolted tanks in nominal
capacities of 100 to 10,000 barrels for production
15.7.7.1 Welded Steel. Welded steel water
service.
storage tanks and vessels shall be designed in
accordance with the seismic requirements of 15.7.8.2.2 Unless required by the Building
AWWA D100. Official, these temporary structures need not be
designed for seismic loads. If design for seismic
15.7.7.2 Bolted Steel. Bolted steel water
load is required, the loads are permitted to be
storage structures shall be designed in accordance
adjusted for the temporary nature of the anticipated
with the seismic requirements of AWWA D103
service life.
except that the design input forces of AWWA D100
shall be modified in the same manner shown in 15.7.8.3 Reinforced and Prestressed
Section 15.7.7.1 of this code. Concrete. Reinforced concrete tanks for the storage
of petrochemical and industrial liquids shall be
15.7.7.3 Reinforced and Prestressed
designed in accordance with the force requirements
Concrete. Reinforced and prestressed concrete
of Section 15.7.7.3 .
tanks shall be designed in accordance with the
seismic requirements of AWWA D110, AWWA 15.7.9 Ground-Supported Storage Tanks for
D115, or ACI 350.3 except that the importance Granular Materials
factor, 𝐼𝑒 , shall be determined according to Section
15.7.9.1 General.
15.4.1.2 , the response modification coefficient, 𝑅,
shall be taken from Table 15-2, and the design input 15.7.9.1.1 The intergranular behavior of the
forces for strength design procedures shall be material shall be considered in determining
determined using the procedures of ACI 350.3 effective mass and load paths, including the
except following behaviors:
(a) Sac shall be substituted for 𝐶𝑐 in ACI 350.3 (a) Increased lateral pressure (and the
Section 9.4.2 using Equation (15-16) for resulting hoop stress) due to loss of the
𝑇𝑐 ≤ 𝑇𝐿 and Equation (15-17) for 𝑇𝑐 > intergranular friction of the material during
𝑇𝐿 from Section 15.7.6.1 ;and the seismic shaking.
(b) The value of 𝐶𝑡 from ACI 350.3 Section (b) Increased hoop stresses generated from
9.4.3 shall be determined using the temperature changes in the shell after the
procedures of Section 15.7.2 (c). The values material has been compacted.
of 𝐼, 𝑅𝑖 , 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑏 as defined in ACI 350.3 shall (c) Intergranular friction, which can transfer
be taken as 1.0 in the determination of seismic shear directly to the foundation.
vertical seismic effects.
15.7.8 Petrochemical and Industrial Tanks and 15.7.9.2 Lateral Force Determination.
Vessels Storing Liquids
15.7.9.2.1 The lateral forces for tanks and
15.7.8.1 Welded Steel. vessels storing granular materials at grade shall be
15.7.8.1.1 Welded steel petrochemical and determined by the requirements and accelerations
industrial tanks and vessels storing liquids under an for short period structures (i.e., 𝑆𝐷𝑆).
internal pressure of less than or equal to 17 kPa g 15.7.9.3 Force Distribution to Shell and
shall be designed in accordance with the seismic Foundation
requirements of API 650.
15.7.9.3.1 Increased Lateral Pressure. The
15.7.8.1.2 Welded steel petrochemical and increase in lateral pressure on the tank wall shall be
industrial tanks and vessels storing liquids under an added to the static design lateral pressure but shall
internal pressure of greater than 17 kPa g and less not be used in the determination of pressure stability
than or equal to 103.5 kPa g shall be designed in effects on the axial buckling strength of the tank
accordance with the seismic requirements of API shell.
620.
15.7.9.3.2 Effective Mass. A portion of a
15.7.8.2 Bolted Steel. stored granular mass will act with the shell (the
15.7.8.2.1 Bolted steel tanks used for storage effective mass). The effective mass is related to the
of production liquids. API 12B covers the material, physical characteristics of the product, the height-
ratio less than 5, shear deformations of the Category IV shall be designed to resist the seismic
pedestal shall be considered. forces as follows:
(d) The dead load effects of roof-mounted (a) The seismic response coefficient for this
equipment or platforms shall be included in evaluation shall be in accordance with
the analysis. Section 12.8.1.1 of this code with 𝐼𝑒 /𝑅 set
(e) If constructed within the plumbness equal to 1.0. Soil–structure and fluid–
tolerances specified by the reference structure interaction is permitted to be
document, initial tilt need not be considered utilized in determining the structural
in the P-delta analysis. response. Vertical or orthogonal
combinations need not be considered.
15.7.10.4 Transfer of Lateral Forces into
Support Tower. For post supported tanks and (b) The resistance of the structure shall be
vessels that are cross-braced: defined as the critical buckling resistance of
the element, that is, a factor of safety set
(a) The bracing shall be installed in such a equal to 1.0.
manner as to provide uniform resistance to
the lateral load (e.g., pretensioning or 15.7.10.6 Welded Steel. Water Storage
tuning to attain equal sag). Structures. Welded steel elevated water storage
structures shall be designed and detailed in
(b) The additional load in the brace due to the
accordance with the seismic requirements of
eccentricity between the post to tank
AWWA D100 with the structural height limits
attachment and the line of action of the
imposed by Table 15-2.
bracing shall be included.
(c) Eccentricity of compression strut line of 15.7.10.7 Concrete Pedestal (Composite)
action (elements that resist the tensile pull Tanks. Concrete pedestal (composite) elevated
from the bracing rods in the seismic force- water storage structures shall be designed in
resisting systems) with their attachment accordance with the requirements of ACI 371R
points shall be considered. except that the design input forces shall be modified
as follows:
(d) The connection of the post or leg with the
foundation shall be designed to resist both 1. In Equation 4-8a of ACI 371R,
the vertical and lateral resultant from the 1.2𝐶𝑣
yield load in the bracing assuming the For 𝑇𝑆 < 𝑇 ≤ 2.5 𝑠, replace the term
𝑅𝑇 2/3
direction of the lateral load is oriented to with
produce the maximum lateral shear at the 𝑆𝐷1
post to foundation interface. Where 𝑅 (15-24)
multiple rods are connected to the same 𝑇 (𝐼 )
𝑒
location, the anchorage shall be designed to
2. In Equation 4-8b of ACI 371R, replace the
resist the concurrent tensile loads in the 2.5𝐶𝑎
braces. term with
𝑅
15.7.10.5 Evaluation of Structures 𝑆𝐷
Sensitive to Buckling Failure. 𝑅 (15-25)
𝑇 (𝐼 )
15.7.10.5.1 Shell structures that support 𝑒
substantial loads may exhibit a primary mode of 3. In Equation 4-9 of ACI 371R, replace the
failure from localized or general buckling of the term 0.5𝐶𝑎 with
support pedestal or skirt due to seismic loads. 0.2𝑆𝐷𝑆 (15-26)
15.7.10.5.2 Such structures may include single 15.7.10.7.1 Analysis Procedures.
pedestal water towers, skirt-supported process
vessels, and similar single member towers. 15.7.10.7.1.1 The equivalent lateral force
procedure is permitted for all concrete pedestal
15.7.10.5.3 Where the structural assessment tanks and shall be based on a fixed-base, single
concludes that buckling of the support is the degree-of-freedom model.
governing primary mode of failure, structures
specified in this code to be designed to subsections 15.7.10.7.1.2 All mass, including the liquid, shall
a and b below and those that are assigned as Risk be considered rigid unless the sloshing mechanism
(i.e., the percentage of convective mass and
centroid) is determined for the specific equipment shall be considered if the equipment can
configuration of the container by detailed fluid– damage the integrity of the pressure boundary.
structure interaction analysis or testing.
15.7.11.4 Coupling of Vessel and Support
15.7.10.7.1.3 Soil–structure interaction is Structure.
permitted to be included. A more rigorous analysis
15.7.11.4.1 Where the mass of the operating
is permitted.
vessel or vessels supported is greater than 25
15.7.10.7.2 Structure Period. percent of the total mass of the combined structure,
the structure and vessel designs shall consider the
15.7.10.7.2.1 The fundamental period of
effects of dynamic coupling between each other.
vibration of the structure shall be established using
the uncracked structural properties and 15.7.11.4.2 Coupling with adjacent, connected
deformational characteristics of the resisting structures such as multiple towers shall be
elements in a properly substantiated analysis. considered if the structures are interconnected with
elements that will transfer loads from one structure
15.7.10.7.2.2 The period used to calculate the
to the other.
seismic response coefficient shall not exceed 2.5 s.
15.7.11.5 Effective Mass. Fluid–structure
15.7.11 Boilers and Pressure Vessels
interaction (sloshing) shall be considered in
15.7.11.1 General. determining the effective mass of the stored
15.7.11.1.1 Attachments to the pressure material providing sufficient liquid surface exists
boundary, supports, and seismic force-resisting for sloshing to occur and the 𝑇𝑐 is greater than 3𝑇.
anchorage systems for boilers and pressure vessels Changes to or variations in material density with
shall be designed to meet the force and pressure and temperature shall be considered.
displacement requirements of Section 15.3 or 15.4 15.7.11.6 Other Boilers and Pressure
and the additional requirements of this section. Vessels. Boilers and pressure vessels designated
15.7.11.1.2 Boilers and pressure vessels Risk Category IV, but not designed and constructed
categorized as Risk Categories III or IV shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASME
designed to meet the force and displacement BPVC, shall meet the following requirements:
requirements of Section 15.3 or 15.4 . (a) The seismic loads in combination with
15.7.11.2 ASME Boilers and Pressure other service loads and appropriate
Vessels. Boilers or pressure vessels designed and environmental effects shall not exceed the
constructed in accordance with ASME BPVC shall material strength shown in Table 15-6.
be deemed to meet the requirements of this section (b) Consideration shall be made to mitigate
provided that the force and displacement seismic impact loads for boiler or vessel
requirements of Section 15.3 or 15.4 are used with elements constructed of nonductile
appropriate scaling of the force and displacement materials or vessels operated in such a way
requirements to the working stress design basis. that material ductility is reduced (e.g., low
temperature applications).
15.7.11.3 Attachments of Internal
Equipment and Refractory. 15.7.11.7 Supports and Attachments for
Boilers and Pressure Vessels.
15.7.11.3.1 Attachments to the pressure
boundary for internal and external ancillary 15.7.11.7.1 Attachments to the pressure
components (refractory, cyclones, trays, etc.) shall boundary and support for boilers and pressure
be designed to resist the seismic forces specified in vessels shall meet the following requirements:
this code to safeguard against rupture of the (a) Attachments and supports transferring
pressure boundary. seismic loads shall be constructed of
15.7.11.3.2 Alternatively, the element attached ductile materials suitable for the intended
is permitted to be designed to fail prior to damaging application and environmental conditions.
the pressure boundary provided that the (b) Anchorage shall be in accordance with
consequences of the failure do not place the Section 15.4.9 , whereby the anchor
pressure boundary in jeopardy. embedment into the concrete is designed to
15.7.11.3.3 For boilers or vessels containing develop the steel strength of the anchor in
liquids, the effect of sloshing on the internal tension. The steel strength of the anchor in
(a) The requirements of Section 15.7.10.5 effects of internal pressure shall not be
shall also apply. considered to increase the buckling
(b) The local buckling of the skirt under resistance of the vessel shell.
compressive membrane forces due to axial (d) If the vessel is a combination of liquid and
load and bending moments shall be gas storage, the vessel and supports shall be
considered. designed both with and without gas
(c) Penetration of the skirt support (manholes, pressure acting (assume piping has
piping, etc.) shall be designed and ruptured and pressure does not exist).
constructed to maintain the strength of the
skirt without penetrations.
15.7.13 Refrigerated Gas Liquid Storage Tanks
and Vessels
15.7.13.1 General.
15.7.13.1.1 Tanks and facilities for the storage
of liquefied hydrocarbons and refrigerated liquids
shall meet the requirements of this code.
15.7.13.1.2 Low-pressure welded steel storage
tanks for liquefied hydrocarbon gas (e.g., LPG,
butane, etc.) and refrigerated liquids (e.g.,
ammonia) shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 15.7.8 and API 620.
15.7.14 Horizontal, Saddle Supported Vessels
for Liquid or Vapor Storage
15.7.14.1 General. Horizontal vessels
supported on saddles (sometimes referred to as
“blimps”) shall be designed to meet the force and
displacement requirements of Section 15.3 or 15.4 .
15.7.14.2 Effective Mass. Changes to or
variations in material density shall be considered.
The design of the supports, saddles, anchorage, and
foundation for seismic overturning shall assume the
material stored is a rigid mass acting at the
volumetric center of gravity.
15.7.14.3 Vessel Design. Unless a more
rigorous analysis is performed.
(a) Horizontal vessels with a length-to-
diameter ratio of 6 or more are permitted to
be assumed to be a simply supported beam
spanning between the saddles for
determining the natural period of vibration
and global bending moment.
(b) For horizontal vessels with a length-to-
diameter ratio of less than 6, the effects of
“deep beam shear” shall be considered
where determining the fundamental period
and stress distribution.
(c) Local bending and buckling of the vessel
shell at the saddle supports due to seismic
load shall be considered. The stabilizing
Table 15-2: Seismic coefficients for nonbuilding structures not similar to buildings
Structural System and
Structural Height, 𝒉𝒏 ,
Detailing Limits (m)a, d
Nonbuilding Structure Type Requirementsc R Ω0 Cd B C D E F
Elevated tanks, vessels, bins or hoppers
On symmetrically braced legs (not similar to buildings) 15.7.10 2 2b 2.5 NL NL 50 30 30
Table 15-2: Seismic coefficients for nonbuilding structures not similar to buildings
Structural System and
Structural Height, 𝒉𝒏 ,
Detailing Limits (m)a, d
Nonbuilding Structure Type Requirementsc R Ω0 Cd B C D E F
On unbraced legs or asymmetrically braced legs (not similar 1.5 2 b
2.5 NL NL 30 18 18
15.7.10
buildings)
Horizontal, saddle supported welded steel vessels 15.7.14 2 2b 2.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Flat-bottom ground-supported tanks: 15.7
Steel or fiber-reinforced plastic:
Mechanically anchored 2 2b 2.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Self-anchored 2 2b 2 NL NL NL NL NL
Reinforced or prestressed concrete:
Reinforced nonsliding base 1.5 2b 2 NL NL NL NL NL
Anchored flexible base 2.5 2b 2 NL NL NL NL NL
Unanchored and unconstrained flexible base 1 1.5b 1.5 NL NL NL NL NL
All other 1 1.5b 1.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Cast-in-place concrete silos having walls continuous to the foundation 15.6.3 2 1.75 3 NL NL NL NL NL
All other reinforced masonry structures not similar to buildings 14.5 f 2 2 2.5 NL NL 15 15 15
detailed as intermediate reinforced masonry shear walls
All other reinforced masonry structures not similar to buildings 14.5 1.5 2.5 1.75 NL 50 NP NP NP
detailed as ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
All other nonreinforced masonry structures not similar to buildings 14.5 0.8 2 1.5 NL NP NP NP NP
Concrete chimneys and stacks 15.6.3 and ACI 307 2 1.5 2.0 NL NL NL NL NL
All steel and reinforced concrete distributed mass cantilever structures 15.6.3
not otherwise covered herein including stacks, chimneys, silos, skirt-
supported vertical vessels.
Single pedestal or skirt supported
Welded steel 15.7.10 1.5 2b 2 NL NL NL NL NL
Welded steel with special detailinge 15.7.10 &
2.5 2b 2 NL NL NL NL NL
15.7.10.5 a and b
Prestressed or reinforced concrete 15.7.10 1.5 2b 2 NL NL NL NL NL
b
Prestressed or reinforced concrete with special detailing 15.7.10 and 14.3 2.5 2 2 NL NL NL NL NL
Trussed towers (freestanding or guyed), guyed stacks, and chimneys 15.6.3 2.5 2 2.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Cooling towers
Concrete or steel 3 1.75 3 NL NL NL NL NL
Telecommunication towers 15.6.7
Truss: Steel 2.5 1.5 3 NL NL NL NL NL
Pole: Steel 1 1.5 1.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Concrete 1 1.5 1.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Frame: Steel 2.5 1.5 1.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Concrete 1.5 1.5 1.5 NL NL NL NL NL
Amusement structures and monuments 15.6.4 1.5 2 2 NL NL NL NL NL
Inverted pendulum type structures (except elevated tanks, vessels, 12.2.5.3 1.5 2 2 NL NL NL NL NL
bins, and hoppers)
Signs and billboards 2.5 1.75 3 NL NL NL NL NL
All other self-supporting structures, tanks, or vessels not covered 1 2 2.5 NL NL 15 15 15
above or by reference standards that are not similar to buildings
a NL = no limit and NP = not permitted.
b See Section 15.7.3a for the application of the overstrength factors, Ω0, for tanks and vessels.
c If a section is not indicated in the Detailing Requirements column, no specific detailing requirements apply.
d For the purpose of height limit determination, the height of the structure shall be taken as the height to the top of the structural frame
making up the primary seismic force-resisting system.
e Sections 15.7.10.5 a and 15.7.10.5 b shall be applied for any Risk Category.
f Detailed with an essentially complete vertical load carrying frame.
Condition Displacements
(mm)
Mechanically Anchored Tanks and Vessels
Upward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation 25
Downward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation 12
Range of horizontal displacement (radial and tangential) relative to support or foundation 12
Self-Anchored Tanks or Vessels (at grade)
Upward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation
If designed in accordance with a reference document as modified by this code
Anchorage ratio less than or equal to 0.785 (indicates no uplift) 25
Anchorage ratio greater than 0.785 (indicates uplift) 100
If designed for seismic loads in accordance with this code but not covered by a reference document
For tanks and vessels with a diameter less than 12 m 200
For tanks and vessels with a diameter equal to or greater than 12 m 300
Downward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation
For tanks with a ringwall/mat foundation 12
For tanks with a berm foundation 25
Range of horizontal displacement (radial and tangential) relative to support or foundation 50
16.1.4.1 Additional Scaling of Forces. used for those elements demonstrated by the
Where the maximum scaled base shear predicted by analysis to remain within their linear range of
the analysis, 𝑉𝑖 , is less than 85 percent of the response.
calculated base shear, 𝑉, using the equivalent lateral 16.2.2.3 The structure shall be assumed to
force procedure, the scaled member forces, 𝑄𝐸𝑖 , have a fixed-base, or alternatively, it is permitted to
shall be additionally multiplied by 0. 85𝑉/𝑉𝑖 , where use realistic assumptions with regard to the stiffness
𝑉 = the equivalent lateral force procedure base and load-carrying characteristics of the foundations
shear, calculated in accordance with Section 12.8 . consistent with site-specific soils data and rational
16.1.4.2 Additional Scaling of Drifts. principles of engineering mechanics.
Where the maximum scaled base shear predicted by 16.2.2.4 For regular structures with
the analysis, 𝑉𝑖 , is less than 0.85𝐶𝑠 𝑊, where 𝐶𝑠 is independent orthogonal seismic force-resisting
determined in accordance with Section 12.8.1.1 , the systems, independent 2-D models are permitted to
scaled story drifts, 𝛥𝑖 , shall be additionally be constructed to represent each system.
multiplied by 0.85𝐶𝑠 𝑊/𝑉𝑖 .
16.2.2.5 For structures having a horizontal
16.1.5 Horizontal Shear Distribution. The structural irregularity of Type 1a, 1b, 4, or 5 of
distribution of horizontal shear shall be in Table 12-2 or structures without independent
accordance with Section 12.8.4 except that orthogonal systems, a 3-D model incorporating a
amplification of torsion in accordance with Section minimum of three dynamic degrees of freedom
12.8.4.5 is not required where accidental torsion consisting of translation in two orthogonal plan
effects are included in the dynamic analysis model. directions and torsional rotation about the vertical
16.2 —Nonlinear response history axis at each level of the structure shall be used.
procedure 16.2.2.6 Where the diaphragms are not
Where nonlinear response history procedure is rigid compared to the vertical elements of the
performed the requirements of Section 16.2 shall be seismic force-resisting system, the model should
satisfied. include representation of the diaphragm’s
flexibility and such additional dynamic degrees of
16.2.1 Analysis Requirements. A nonlinear freedom as are required to account for the
response history analysis shall consist of an analysis participation of the diaphragm in the structure’s
of a mathematical model of the structure that dynamic response.
directly accounts for the nonlinear hysteretic
behavior of the structure’s elements to determine its 16.2.3 Ground Motion and Other Loading.
response through methods of numerical integration Ground motion shall conform to the requirements
to suites of ground motion acceleration histories of Section 16.1.3 . The structure shall be analyzed
compatible with the design response spectrum for for the effects of these ground motions
the site. The analysis shall be performed in simultaneously with the effects of dead load in
accordance with this section. See Section 12.1.1 for combination with not less than 25 percent of the
limitations on the use of this procedure. required live loads.
16.2.2 Modeling. A mathematical model of the 16.2.4 Response Parameters. For each ground
structure shall be constructed that represents the motion analyzed, individual response parameters
spatial distribution of mass throughout the consisting of the maximum value of the individual
structure. member forces, 𝑄𝐸𝑖 , member inelastic
deformations, 𝛹𝑖 , and story drifts, 𝛥𝑖 , at each story
16.2.2.1 The hysteretic behavior of shall be determined, where 𝑖 is the designation
elements shall be modeled consistent with suitable assigned to each ground motion.
laboratory test data and shall account for all
significant yielding, strength degradation, stiffness If at least seven ground motions are analyzed, the
degradation, and hysteretic pinching indicated by design values of member forces, 𝑄𝐸 , member
such test data. inelastic deformations, 𝛹, and story drift, Δ, are
permitted to be taken as the average of the 𝑄𝐸𝑖 , 𝛹𝑖 ,
16.2.2.2 Strength of elements shall be and 𝛥𝑖 values determined from the analyses. If
based on expected values considering material over fewer than seven ground motions are analyzed, the
strength, strain hardening, and hysteretic strength design member forces, 𝑄𝐸 , design member inelastic
degradation. Linear properties, consistent with the deformations, 𝛹, and the design story drift, 𝛥, shall
requirements of Section 12.7.3, are permitted to be
be taken as the maximum value of the 𝑄𝐸𝑖 i, 𝛹𝑖 , and 4. Review of the final design of the entire
𝛥𝑖 values determined from the analyses. structural system and all supporting
analyses.
16.2.4.1 Member Strength. The adequacy
of members to resist the combination of load effects
of Section 12.4 need not be evaluated.
Exception: Where this code requires consideration
of the seismic load effects including overstrength
factor of Section 12.4.3 , the maximum value of 𝑄𝐸𝑖
obtained from the suite of analyses shall be taken in
place of the quantity Ω 𝑄𝐸 ·
0
17.2.4.8 Inspection and Replacement forces calculated in accordance with Sections 17.5
or 17.6 .
(a) Access for inspection and replacement of
all components of the isolation system shall 17.2.6 Elements of Structures and
be provided. Nonstructural Components. Parts or portions of
(b) A registered design professional shall an isolated structure, permanent nonstructural
complete a final series of inspections or components and the attachments to them, and the
observations of structure separation areas attachments for permanent equipment supported by
and components that cross the isolation a structure shall be designed to resist seismic forces
interface prior to the issuance of the and displacements as prescribed by this section and
certificate of occupancy for the seismically the applicable requirements of CHAPTER 13 .
isolated structure. Such inspections and 17.2.6.1 Components at or above the
observations shall indicate that the Isolation Interface. Elements of seismically
conditions allow free and unhindered isolated structures and nonstructural components,
displacement of the structure to maximum or portions thereof, that are at or above the isolation
design levels and that all components that interface shall be designed to resist a total lateral
cross the isolation interface as installed are seismic force equal to the maximum dynamic
able to accommodate the stipulated response of the element or component under
displacements. consideration.
(c) Seismically isolated structures shall have a
Exception: Elements of seismically isolated
monitoring, inspection, and maintenance
structures and nonstructural components or portions
program for the isolation system
designed to resist seismic forces and displacements
established by the registered design
as prescribed in CHAPTER 12 or CHAPTER 13 as
professional responsible for the design of
appropriate.
the isolation system.
(d) Remodeling, repair, or retrofitting at the 17.2.6.2 Components Crossing the
isolation system interface, including that of Isolation Interface. Elements of seismically
components that cross the isolation isolated structures and nonstructural components,
interface, shall be performed under the or portions thereof, that cross the isolation interface
direction of a registered design shall be designed to withstand the total maximum
professional. displacement.
17.2.4.9 Quality Control. A quality control 17.2.6.3 Components below the Isolation
testing program for isolator units shall be Interface. Elements of seismically isolated
established by the registered design professional structures and nonstructural components, or
responsible for the structural design. portions thereof, that are below the isolation
interface shall be designed and constructed in
17.2.5 Structural System accordance with the requirements of Section 0 and
CHAPTER 13 .
17.2.5.1 Horizontal Distribution of Force.
A horizontal diaphragm or other structural elements 17.3 Ground Motion for Isolated
shall provide continuity above the isolation
Systems
interface and shall have adequate strength and
ductility to transmit forces (due to nonuniform
17.3.1 Design Spectra. The site-specific ground
ground motion) from one part of the structure to
motion procedures set forth in CHAPTER 21 are
another.
permitted to be used to determine ground motions
17.2.5.2 Building Separations. Minimum for any structure. For structures on Site Class F
separations between the isolated structure and sites, site response analysis shall be performed in
surrounding retaining walls or other fixed accordance with Section 21.1. For seismically
obstructions shall not be less than the total isolated structures on sites with 𝑆1 greater than or
maximum displacement. equal to 0.6, a ground motion hazard analysis shall
be performed in accordance with Section 21.2 .
17.2.5.3 Nonbuilding Structures.
Structures that do not require or use site-specific
Nonbuilding structures shall be designed and
ground motion procedures shall be analyzed using
constructed in accordance with the requirements of
CHAPTER 15 using design displacements and
the design spectrum for the design earthquake (c) The isolation system does not limit
developed in accordance with Section 11.4.4 . maximum considered earthquake
displacement to less than the total
A spectrum shall be constructed for the 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅
maximum displacement.
ground motion. The spectrum for 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 ground
motions shall not be taken as less than 1.5 times the 17.4.2 Dynamic Procedures. The dynamic
spectrum for the design earthquake ground motions. procedures of Section 17.6 are permitted to be used
as specified in this section.
17.3.2 Ground Motion Histories. Where
response-history procedures are used, ground 17.4.2.1 Response-Spectrum Procedure.
motions shall consist of pairs of appropriate Response-spectrum analysis shall not be used for
horizontal ground motion acceleration components design of a seismically isolated structure unless:
developed per Section 16.1.3.2 except that 0.2T and 1. The structure is located on a Site Class A,
1.5𝑇 shall be replaced by 0.5𝑇𝐷 and 1.25𝑇𝑀 , B, C, or D.
respectively, where 𝑇𝐷 and 𝑇𝑀 are defined in 2. The isolation system meets the criteria of
Section 17.5.3 . Item 7 of Section 17.4.1 .
17.4 Analysis Procedure Selection. 17.4.2.2 Response-History Procedure.
The response-history procedure is permitted for
Seismically isolated structures except those defined design of any seismically isolated structure and
in Section 17.4.1 shall be designed using the shall be used for design of all seismically isolated
dynamic procedures of Section 17.6 . structures not meeting the criteria of Section
17.4.1 Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure. 17.4.2.1 .
The equivalent lateral force procedure of Section 17.5 Equivalent Lateral Force
17.5 is permitted to be used for design of a
seismically isolated structure provided that: Procedure
1. The structure is located at a site with 𝑆1
17.5.1 General. Where the equivalent lateral force
less than 0.60g.
procedure is used to design seismically isolated
2. The structure is located on a Site Class A,
structures, the requirements of this section shall
B, C, or D.
apply.
3. The structure above the isolation interface
is less than or equal to four stories or 20 17.5.2 Deformation Characteristics of the
m in structural height, ℎ𝑛 . Isolation System. Minimum lateral earthquake
4. The effective period of the isolated design displacements and forces on seismically
structure at the maximum displacement, isolated structures shall be based on the
𝑇𝑀 , is less than or equal to 3.0 s. deformation characteristics of the isolation system.
5. The effective period of the isolated The deformation characteristics of the isolation
structure at the design displacement, 𝑇𝐷 , is system shall explicitly include the effects of the
greater than three times the elastic, fixed- wind-restraint system if such a system is used to
base period of the structure above the meet the design requirements of this code. The
isolation system as determined by deformation characteristics of the isolation system
Equation (12-18) or Equation (12-19). shall be based on properly substantiated tests
6. The structure above the isolation system is performed in accordance with Section 17.8 .
of regular configuration.
17.5.3 Minimum Lateral Displacements
7. The isolation system meets all of the
following criteria: 17.5.3.1 Design Displacement. The
(a) The effective stiffness of the isolation isolation system shall be designed and constructed
system at the design displacement is greater to withstand minimum lateral earthquake
than one-third of the effective stiffness at displacements, 𝐷𝐷 , that act in the direction of each
20 percent of the design displacement. of the main horizontal axes of the structure using
(b) The isolation system is capable of Equation (17-1):
producing a restoring force as specified in 𝑔𝑆𝐷1 𝑇𝐷
Section 17.2.4.4 . 𝐷𝐷 = (17-1)
4𝜋 2 𝐵𝐷
where
of the model by 100 percent of the ground motion The limits on displacements specified by this
in the critical direction and 30 percent of the ground section shall be evaluated using values of DTD and
motion in the perpendicular, horizontal direction. 𝐷𝑇𝑀 determined in accordance with Section 17.5.5
The maximum displacement of the isolation system except that 𝐷𝐷′ is permitted to be used in lieu of 𝐷𝐷
′
shall be calculated as the vectorial sum of the two and 𝐷𝑀 is permitted to be used in lieu of 𝐷𝑀 as
orthogonal displacements. prescribed in Eqs. (17-10) and (17-11):
The design shear at any story shall not be less than 𝐷𝐷
the story shear resulting from application of the 𝐷𝐷′ = (17-10)
story forces calculated using Equation (17-9) and a √1 + (𝑇⁄𝑇𝐷 )2
value of 𝑉𝑠 equal to the base shear obtained from the
response-spectrum analysis in the direction of ′
𝐷𝑀
𝐷𝑀 = (17-11)
interest. √1 + (𝑇⁄𝑇𝑀 )2
17.6.3.4 Response-History Procedure.
Where a response-history procedure is performed, a Where
suite of not fewer than three pairs of appropriate 𝐷𝐷 = Design displacement, in mm, at the
ground motions shall be used in the analysis; the center of rigidity of the isolation
ground motion pairs shall be selected and scaled in system in the direction under
accordance with Section 17.3.2 . consideration, as prescribed by
Equation (17-1)
Each pair of ground motion components shall be
𝐷𝑀 = Maximum displacement in mm, at the
applied simultaneously to the model considering the center of rigidity of the isolation
most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass. system in the direction under
The maximum displacement of the isolation system consideration, as prescribed by
shall be calculated from the vectorial sum of the two Equation (17-3)
orthogonal displacements at each time step.
𝑇 = Elastic, fixed-base period of the
The parameters of interest shall be calculated for structure above the isolation system as
each ground motion used for the response-history determined by Section 12.8.2
analysis. If seven or more pairs of ground motions
are used for the response-history analysis, the 𝑇𝐷 = Effective period of seismically isolated
average value of the response parameter of interest structure in 𝑠, at the design
displacement in the direction under
is permitted to be used for design. If fewer than
consideration, as prescribed by
seven pairs of ground motions are used for analysis, Equation (17-2)
the maximum value of the response parameter of
interest shall be used for design. 𝑇𝑀 = Effective period, in s, of the seismically
isolated structure, at the maximum
17.6.4 Minimum Lateral Displacements and displacement in the direction under
consideration, as prescribed by
Forces Equation (17-4)
17.6.4.1 Isolation System and Structural 17.6.4.2 Structural Elements above the
Elements below the Isolation System. The Isolation System. Subject to the procedure-specific
isolation system, foundation, and all structural limits of this section, structural elements above the
elements below the isolation system shall be isolation system shall be designed using the
designed using all of the appropriate requirements appropriate requirements for a nonisolated structure
for a nonisolated structure and the forces obtained and the forces obtained from the dynamic analysis
from the dynamic analysis without reduction, but reduced by a factor of 𝑅𝐼 as determined in
the design lateral force shall not be taken as less accordance with Section 17.5.4.2 .
than 90 percent of 𝑉𝑏 determined in accordance as
prescribed by Equation (17-7). The design lateral shear force on the structure above
the isolation system, if regular in configuration,
The total design displacement of the isolation shall not be taken as less than 80 percent of 𝑉𝑠 , or
system shall not be taken as less than 90 percent of less than the limits specified by Section 17.5.4.3 .
𝐷𝑇𝐷 as specified by Section 17.5.3.7 . The total Exception: The lateral shear force on the structure
maximum displacement of the isolation system above the isolation system, if regular in
shall not be taken as less than 80 percent of 𝐷𝑇𝑀 as configuration, is permitted to be taken as less than
prescribed by Section 17.5.3.7 . 80 percent, but shall not be less than 60 percent of
𝑉𝑠 , where the response-history procedure is used for theory and application of seismic isolation.
analysis of the seismically isolated structure. Isolation system design review shall include, but
The design lateral shear force on the structure above not be limited to, the following:
the isolation system, if irregular in configuration,
1. Review of site-specific seismic criteria
shall not be taken as less than 𝑉𝑠 or less than the
including the development of site-specific
limits specified by Section 17.5.4.3 .
spectra and ground motion histories and
Exception: The design lateral shear force on the all other design criteria developed
structure above the isolation system, if irregular in specifically for the project.
configuration, is permitted to be taken as less than 2. Review of the preliminary design
100 percent, but shall not be less than 80 percent of including the determination of the total
𝑉𝑠 where the response-history procedure is used for design displacement, the total maximum
analysis of the seismically isolated structure. displacement, and the lateral force level.
17.6.4.3 Scaling of Results. Where the 3. Overview and observation of prototype
factored lateral shear force on structural elements, testing (Section 17.8).
determined using either response-spectrum or 4. Review of the final design of the entire
response-history procedure, is less than the structural system and all supporting
minimum values prescribed by Sections 17.6.4.1 analyses.
and 17.6.4.2 , all response parameters, including 5. Review of the isolation system quality
member forces and moments, shall be adjusted control testing program (Section 17.2.4.9 ).
upward proportionally.
17.6.4.4 Drift Limits. Maximum story drift 17.8 Testing
corresponding to the design lateral force including
displacement due to vertical deformation of the 17.8.1 General. The deformation characteristics
isolation system shall not exceed the following and damping values of the isolation system used in
limits: the design and analysis of seismically isolated
1. The maximum story drift of the structure structures shall be based on tests of a selected
above the isolation system calculated by sample of the components prior to construction as
response-spectrum analysis shall not described in this section.
exceed 0.015ℎ𝑠𝑥 . The isolation system components to be tested shall
2. The maximum story drift of the structure include the wind-restraint system if such a system
above the isolation system calculated by is used in the design.
response-history analysis based on the The tests specified in this section are for
force-deflection characteristics of establishing and validating the design properties of
nonlinear elements of the seismic force- the isolation system and shall not be considered as
resisting system shall not exceed satisfying the manufacturing quality control tests of
0.020ℎ𝑠𝑥 . Section 17.2.4.9 .
Drift shall be calculated using Equation (12-26)
with the 𝐶𝑑 of the isolated structure equal to 𝑅𝐼 as 17.8.2 Prototype Tests. Prototype tests shall be
performed separately on two full-size specimens (or
defined in Section 17.5.4.2 .
The secondary effects of the maximum considered sets of specimens, as appropriate) of each
predominant type and size of isolator unit of the
earthquake lateral displacement of the structure
isolation system. The test specimens shall include
above the isolation system combined with gravity
the wind-restraint system as well as individual
forces shall be investigated if the story drift ratio
isolator units if such systems are used in the design.
exceeds 0.010/𝑅𝐼 .
Specimens tested shall not be used for construction
unless accepted by the registered design
17.7 Design Review professional responsible for the design of the
structure and approved by the authority having
17.7.1 A design review of the isolation system and jurisdiction.
related test programs shall be performed by an 17.8.2.1 Record. For each cycle of each
independent engineering team including persons test, the force-deflection and hysteretic behavior of
licensed in the appropriate disciplines and the test specimen shall be recorded.
experienced in seismic analysis methods and the
17.8.2.2 Sequence and Cycles. The property when tested at a frequency equal to the
following sequence of tests shall be performed for inverse of 𝑇𝐷 by more than 15 percent.
the prescribed number of cycles at a vertical load
17.8.2.4 Units Dependent on Bilateral
equal to the average dead load plus one-half the
Load. If the force-deflection properties of the
effects due to live load on all isolator units of a
isolator units are dependent on bilateral load, the
common type and size:
tests specified in Sections 17.8.2.2 and 17.8.2.3
1. Twenty fully reversed cycles of loading at shall be augmented to include bilateral load at the
a lateral force corresponding to the wind following increments of the total design
design force. displacement, 𝐷𝑇𝐷 : 0.25 and 1.0, 0.5 and 1.0, 0.75
2. Three fully reversed cycles of loading at and 1.0, and 1.0 and 1.0
each of the following increments of the
If reduced-scale prototype specimens are used to
total design displacement—0.25𝐷𝐷 ,
quantify bilateral-load-dependent properties, the
0.5𝐷𝐷 , 1.0𝐷𝐷 , and 1.0𝐷𝑀 where 𝐷𝐷 and
reduced-scale specimens shall be of the same type
𝐷𝑀 are as determined in Sections 17.5.3.1
and material and manufactured with the same
and 17.5.3.5 , respectively, or Section 17.6
processes and quality as full-scale prototypes.
as appropriate.
The force-deflection properties of an isolator unit
3. Three fully reversed cycles of loading at
shall be considered to be dependent on bilateral load
the total maximum displacement, 1.0𝐷𝑇𝑀 .
if the effective stiffness where subjected to bilateral
4. 30𝑆𝐷1 /𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝐵𝐷 , but not less than 10, fully loading is different from the effective stiffness
reversed cycles of loading at 1.0 times the where subjected to unilateral loading, by more than
total design displacement, 1.0𝐷𝑇𝐷 . 15 percent.
If an isolator unit is also a vertical-load-carrying
element, then item 2 of the sequence of cyclic tests 17.8.2.5 Maximum and Minimum
specified in the preceding text shall be performed Vertical Load. Isolator units that carry vertical load
for two additional vertical load cases specified in shall be statically tested for maximum and
Section 17.2.4.6 . The load increment due to minimum downward vertical load at the total
earthquake overturning, 𝑄𝐸 , shall be equal to or maximum displacement. In these tests, the
greater than the peak earthquake vertical force combined vertical loads shall be taken as specified
response corresponding to the test displacement in Section 17.2.4.6 on any one isolator of a common
being evaluated. In these tests, the combined type and size. The dead load, 𝐷, and live load, 𝐿,
vertical load shall be taken as the typical or average are specified in Section 12.4 . The seismic load 𝐸 is
downward force on all isolator units of a common given by Eqs. (12-1) and (12-2) where 𝑆𝐷𝑆 in these
type and size. equations is replaced by 𝑆𝑀𝑆 and the vertical loads
that result from application of horizontal seismic
17.8.2.3 Units Dependent on Loading forces, 𝑄𝐸 , shall be based on the peak response due
Rates. If the force-deflection properties of the to the maximum considered earthquake.
isolator units are dependent on the rate of loading,
each set of tests specified in Section 17.8.2.2 shall 17.8.2.6 Sacrificial Wind-Restraint
be performed dynamically at a frequency equal to Systems. If a sacrificial wind-restraint system is to
the inverse of the effective period, 𝑇𝐷 . be utilized, its ultimate capacity shall be established
by test.
If reduced-scale prototype specimens are used to
quantify rate-dependent properties of isolators, the 17.8.2.7 Testing Similar Units. Prototype
reduced-scale prototype specimens shall be of the tests are not required if an isolator unit is of similar
same type and material and be manufactured with size and of the same type and material as a
the same processes and quality as full-scale prototype isolator unit that has been previously
prototypes and shall be tested at a frequency that tested using the specified sequence of tests.
represents full-scale prototype loading rates. 17.8.3 Determination of Force-Deflection
The force-deflection properties of an isolator unit Characteristics. The force-deflection
shall be considered to be dependent on the rate of characteristics of the isolation system shall be based
loading if the measured property (effective stiffness on the cyclic load tests of prototype isolator
or effective damping) at the design displacement specified in Section 17.8.2 .
when tested at any frequency in the range of 0.1 to
2.0 times the inverse of 𝑇𝐷 is different from the
As required, the effective stiffness of an isolator stable where tested in accordance with
unit, 𝑘𝑒𝑓𝑓 , shall be calculated for each cycle of Section 17.8.2.5 .
loading as prescribed by Equation (17-12): 17.8.5 Design Properties of the Isolation System
|𝐹 + | + |𝐹 − |
𝑘eff = + (17-12)
|∆ | + |∆− | 17.8.5.1 Maximum and Minimum
Effective Stiffness. At the design displacement, the
where 𝐹 + and 𝐹 – are the positive and negative maximum and minimum effective stiffness of the
forces, at 𝛥+ and 𝛥– , respectively. isolated system, 𝑘𝐷𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝑘𝐷𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be based
on the cyclic tests of item 2 of Section 17.8.2.2 and
As required, the effective damping, 𝛽𝑒𝑓𝑓 , of an
calculated using Eqs. (17-14) and (17-15):
isolator unit shall be calculated for each cycle
∑|𝐹𝐷+ |max + ∑|𝐹𝐷− |max
of loading by Equation (17-13): 𝑘𝐷max = (17-14)
2𝐷𝐷
𝐸loop ∑|𝐹𝐷+ |min + ∑|𝐹𝐷− |min
2 𝑘𝐷min = (17-15)
βeff = (17-13) 2𝐷𝐷
𝜋 𝑘eff (|∆+ | + |∆− |)2
At the maximum displacement, the maximum and
minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system,
where the energy dissipated per cycle of 𝑘𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝑘𝑀𝑚𝑖𝑛 , shall be based on the cyclic tests
loading, 𝐸𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑝 , and the effective stiffness, of item 3 of Section 17.8.2.2 and calculated using
𝑘𝑒𝑓𝑓 , shall be based on peak test Eqs. (17-16) and (17-17):
displacements of 𝛥+ and 𝛥– . ∑|𝐹𝑀+ |max + ∑|𝐹𝑀− |max
𝑘𝑀max = (17-16)
2𝐷𝑀
17.8.4 Test Specimen Adequacy. The ∑|𝐹𝑀+ |min + ∑|𝐹𝑀− |min
performance of the test specimens shall be deemed 𝑘𝑀min = (17-17)
2𝐷𝑀
adequate if the following conditions are satisfied: The maximum effective stiffness of the isolation
1. The force-deflection plots for all tests system, 𝑘𝐷𝑚𝑎𝑥 (or 𝑘𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 ), shall be based on
specified in Section 17.8.2 have a positive forces from the cycle of prototype testing at a test
incremental force-resisting capacity. displacement equal to 𝐷𝐷 (or 𝐷𝑀 ) that produces the
2. For each increment of test displacement largest value of effective stiffness. Minimum
specified in item 2 of Section 17.8.2.2 and effective stiffness of the isolation system, 𝑘𝐷𝑚𝑖𝑛 (or
for each vertical load case specified in 𝑘𝑀𝑚𝑖𝑛 ), shall be based on forces from the cycle of
Section 17.8.2.2 , prototype testing at a test displacement equal to 𝐷𝐷
(a) For each test specimen, the difference (or 𝐷𝑀 ) that produces the smallest value of effective
between the effective stiffness at each stiffness.
of the three cycles of test and the For isolator units that are found by the tests of
average value of effective stiffness is Sections 17.8.2.2 , 17.8.2.3 , and 17.8.2.4 to have
no greater than 15 percent. force-deflection characteristics that vary with
vertical load, rate of loading, or bilateral load,
(b) For each cycle of test, the difference
respectively, the values of 𝑘𝐷𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝑘𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 shall
between effective stiffness of the two
be increased and the values of 𝑘𝐷𝑚𝑖𝑛 and 𝑘𝑀𝑚𝑖𝑛 ,
test specimens of a common type and
shall be decreased, as necessary, to bound the
size of the isolator unit and the average
effects of measured variation in effective stiffness.
effective stiffness is no greater than15
percent. 17.8.5.2 Effective Damping. At the design
3. For each specimen there is no greater than displacement, the effective damping of the isolation
a 20 percent change in the initial effective system, 𝛽𝐷 , shall be based on the cyclic tests of item
stiffness over the cycles of test specified in 2 of Section 17.8.2.2 and calculated using Equation
item 4 of Section 17.8.2.2 . (17-18):
4. For each specimen there is no greater than ∑ 𝐸𝐷
a 20 percent decrease in the initial β𝐷 = (17-18)
effective damping over the cycles of test 2𝜋𝑘𝐷max 𝐷𝐷2
specified in item 4 of Section 17.8.2.2 . In Equation (17-18), the total energy dissipated per
5. All specimens of vertical-load-carrying cycle of design displacement response, ∑𝐸𝐷 , shall
elements of the isolation system remain be taken as the sum of the energy dissipated per
cycle in all isolator units measured at a test
structure in the direction of interest, 𝐹𝑖𝑅 = Inertial force at Level 𝑖 (or mass point 𝑖)
Section 18.4.2.4 or 18.5.2.3 (𝑚 = 1) in the residual mode of vibration of the
𝐶𝑆𝑚 = Seismic response coefficient of the mth structure in the direction of interest,
mode of vibration of the structure in the Section 18.5.2.8
direction of interest, Section 18.4.2.4 𝑞𝐻 = Hysteresis loop adjustment factor as
(𝑚 = 1) or Section 18.4.2.6 (𝑚 > 1) determined in Section 18.6.2.2.1
𝐶𝑆𝑅 = Seismic response coefficient of the 𝑄𝐷𝑆𝐷 = Force in an element of the damping
residual mode of vibration of the structure system required to resist design seismic
in the direction of interest, Section forces of displacement-dependent
18.5.2.7 damping devices, Section 18.7.2.5
𝐷1𝐷 = Fundamental mode design displacement 𝑄𝑚𝐷𝑆𝑉 = Forces in an element of the damping
at the center rigidity of the roof level of system required to resist design seismic
the structure in the direction under forces of velocity-dependent damping
consideration, Section 18.5.3.2 devices due to the mth mode of vibration
𝐷1𝑀 = Fundamental mode maximum of the structure in the direction of interest,
displacement at the center of rigidity of Section 18.7.2.5
the roof level of the structure in the 𝑄𝑚𝑆𝐹𝑅𝑆 = Force in an element of the damping
direction under consideration, Section system equal to the design seismic force
18.5.3.5 of the mth mode of vibration of the
𝐷𝑚𝐷 = Design displacement at the center of structure in the direction of interest,
rigidity of the roof level of the structure Section 18.7.2.5
due to the mth mode of vibration in the 𝑇1 = The fundamental period of the structure in
direction under consideration, section the direction under consideration
18.4.3.2
𝑇1𝐷 = Effective period, in seconds, of the
𝐷𝑚𝑀 = Maximum displacement at the center of fundamental mode of vibration of the
rigidity of the roof level of the structure structure at the design displacement in the
due to the mth mode of vibration in the direction under consideration, as
direction under consideration, Section prescribed by Section 18.4.2.5 or
18.4.3.5 18.5.2.4
𝐷𝑅𝐷 = Residual mode design displacement at the 𝑇1𝑀 = Effective period, in seconds, of the
center of rigidity of the roof level of the fundamental mode of vibration of the
structure in the direction under structure at the maximum displacement in
consideration, Section 18.5.3.2 the direction under consideration, as
𝐷𝑅𝑀 = Residual mode maximum displacement at prescribed by Section 18.4.2.5 or
the center of rigidity of the roof level of 18.5.2.4
the structure in the direction under 𝑇𝑅 = Period, in seconds, of the residual mode
consideration, Section 18.5.3.5 of vibration of the structure in the
𝐷𝑌 = Displacement at the center of rigidity of direction under consideration, Section
the roof level of the structure at the 18.5.2.6
effective yield point of the seismic force- 𝑉𝑚 = Design value of the seismic base shear of
resisting system, Section 18.6.3 the mth mode of vibration of the structure
𝑓𝑖 = Lateral force at Level 𝑖 of the structure in the direction of interest, Section
distributed approximately in accordance 18.4.2.2
with Section 12.8.3, Section 18.5.2.2 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = Minimum allowable value of base shear
𝐹𝑖1 = Inertial force at Level 𝑖 (or mass point 𝑖) permitted for design of the seismic force-
in the fundamental mode of vibration of resisting system of the structure in the
the structure in the direction of interest, direction of interest, Section 18.2.2.1
Section 18.5.2.8 𝑉𝑅 = Design value of the seismic base shear of
𝐹𝑖𝑚 = Inertial force at Level 𝑖 (or mass point 𝑖) the residual mode of vibration of the
in the mth mode of vibration of the structure in a given direction, as
structure in the direction of interest, determined in Section 18.5.2.5
Section 18.4.2.7
̅1 =
𝑊 Effective fundamental mode seismic structure in the direction under
weight determined in accordance with consideration, Section 18.5.3.1
Equation (18-4b) for 𝑚 = 1 𝛿𝑖𝐷 = Total design deflection of Level 𝑖 at the
𝑊𝑅 = Effective residual mode seismic weight center of rigidity of the structure in the
determined in accordance with Equation direction under consideration, Section
(18-32) 18.5.3
𝜙𝑖𝑅 = Displacement amplitude at Level 𝑖 of the 𝛻1𝐷 = Design story velocity due to the
residual mode of vibration of the structure fundamental mode of vibration of the
in the direction of interest normalized to structure in the direction of interest,
unity at the roof level, Section 18.5.2.6 Section 18.5.3.4
𝜙1 = Participation factor of the fundamental 𝛻𝐷 = Total design story velocity of the structure
mode of vibration of the structure in the in the direction of interest, Section
direction of interest, Section 18.4.2.3 or 18.4.3.4
18.5.2.2 (𝑚 = 1)
𝛻𝑀 = Total maximum story velocity of the
𝛤𝑚 = Participation factor in the mth mode of structure in the direction of interest,
vibration of the structure in the direction Section 18.5.3
of interest, Section 18.4.2.3
𝛻𝑚𝐷 = Design story velocity due to the mth mode
𝛤𝑅 = Participation factor of the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the
of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest, Section 18.4.3.4
direction of interest, Section 18.5.2.6
damping system function and inelastic response is 2. The total effective damping of the
limited in accordance with the requirements of fundamental mode, 𝛽𝑚𝐷 (m = 1), of the
Section 18.7.2.6 . structure in the direction of interest is not
greater than 35 percent of critical.
18.2.3 Ground Motion
18.2.4.3 Equivalent Lateral Force
18.2.3.1 Design Spectra. Spectra for the Procedure. The equivalent lateral force procedure
design earthquake ground motions and maximum of Section 18.5 is permitted to be used for design of
considered earthquake ground motions developed a structure with a damping system provided that
in accordance with Section 17.3.1 shall be used for
1. In the direction of interest, the damping
the design and analysis of a structure with a
system has at least two damping devices in
damping system. Site-specific design spectra shall
each story, configured to resist torsion.
be developed and used for design of a structure with
2. The total effective damping of the
a damping system if either of the following
fundamental mode, 𝛽𝑚𝐷 (m = 1), of the
conditions apply:
structure in the direction of interest is not
1. The structure is located on a Class F site. greater than 35 percent of critical.
2. The structure is located at a site with 𝑆1 3. The seismic force-resisting system does not
greater than or equal to 0.6. have horizontal irregularity Type 1a or 1b
(Table 12-2) or vertical irregularity Type 1a,
18.2.3.2 Ground Motion Histories. 1b, 2, or 3 (Table 12-3).
Ground motion histories for the design earthquake 4. Floor diaphragms are rigid as defined in
and the maximum considered earthquake developed Section 12.3.1 .
in accordance with Section 17.3.2 shall be used for 5. The height of the structure above the base
design and analysis of all structures with a damping does not exceed 30 m.
system if either of the following conditions apply:
1. The structure is located at a site with 𝑆1
greater than or equal to 0.6.
2. The damping system is explicitly modeled 18.2.5 Damping System
and analyzed using the response-history
analysis method. 18.2.5.1 Device Design. The design,
construction, and installation of damping devices
18.2.4 Procedure Selection. A structure with a shall be based on response to maximum considered
damping system shall be designed using linear earthquake ground motions and consideration of the
procedures, nonlinear procedures, or a combination following:
of linear and nonlinear procedures, as permitted in
this section. Regardless of the analysis method 1. Low-cycle, large-displacement
used, the peak dynamic response of the structure degradation due to seismic loads.
and elements of the damping system shall be 2. High-cycle, small-displacement
confirmed by using the nonlinear response-history degradation due to wind, thermal, or other
procedure if the structure is located at a site with cyclic loads.
𝑆1 greater than or equal to 0.6. 3. Forces or displacements due to gravity
18.2.4.1 Nonlinear Procedures. The loads.
nonlinear procedures of Section 18.3 are permitted 4. Adhesion of device parts due to corrosion
to be used for design of all structures with damping or abrasion, biodegradation, moisture, or
systems. chemical exposure.
18.2.4.2 Response-Spectrum Procedure. 5. Exposure to environmental conditions,
The response-spectrum procedure of Section 18.4 is including, but not limited to, temperature,
permitted to be used for design of a structure with a humidity, moisture, radiation (e.g.,
damping system provided that: ultraviolet light),and reactive or corrosive
substances (e.g., saltwater).
1. In the direction of interest, the damping
Damping devices subject to failure by low-cycle
system has at least two damping devices in
fatigue shall resist wind forces without slip,
each story, configured to resist torsion.
movement, or inelastic cycling. The design of
damping devices shall incorporate the range of
thermal conditions, device wear, manufacturing system support higher values. If the calculated force
tolerances, and other effects that cause device in an element of the seismic force-resisting system
properties to vary during the design life of the does not exceed 1.5times its nominal strength, that
device. element is permitted to be modeled as linear.
18.2.5.2 Multiaxis Movement. Connection 18.3.1.1 Damping Device Modeling.
points of damping devices shall provide sufficient Mathematical models of displacement-dependent
articulation to accommodate simultaneous damping devices shall include the hysteretic
longitudinal, lateral, and vertical displacements of behavior of the devices consistent with test data and
the damping system. accounting for all significant changes in strength,
stiffness, and hysteretic loop shape. Mathematical
18.2.5.3 Inspection and Periodic Testing.
models of velocity-dependent damping devices
Means of access for inspection and removal of all
shall include the velocity coefficient consistent with
damping devices shall be provided.
test data. If this coefficient changes with time
The registered design professional responsible for and/or temperature, such behavior shall be modeled
design of the structure shall establish an appropriate explicitly. The elements of damping devices
inspection and testing schedule for each type of connecting damper units to the structure shall be
damping device to ensure that the devices respond included in the model.
in a dependable manner throughout their design life.
Exception: If the properties of the damping devices
The degree of inspection and testing shall reflect the
are expected to change during the duration of the
established in-service history of the damping
time history analysis, the dynamic response is
devices and the likelihood of change in properties
permitted to be enveloped by the upper and lower
over the design life of the devices.
limits of device properties. All these limit cases for
18.2.5.4 Quality Control. As part of the variable device properties must satisfy the same
quality assurance plan developed in accordance conditions as if the time-dependent behavior of the
with Section , the registered design professional devices were explicitly modeled.
responsible for the structural design shall establish
18.3.1.2 Response Parameters. In addition
a quality control plan for the manufacture of
to the response parameters given in Section 16.2.4 ,
damping devices. As a minimum, this plan shall
for each ground motion used for response-history
include the testing requirements of Section 18.9.2 .
analysis, individual response parameters consisting
18.3 Nonlinear Procedures of the maximum value of the discrete damping
device forces, displacements, and velocities, in the
The stiffness and damping properties of the case of velocity-dependent devices, shall be
damping devices used in the models shall be based determined.
on or verified by testing of the damping devices as If at least seven pairs of ground motions are used
specified in Section 18.9 . The nonlinear force- for response-history analysis, the design values of
deflection characteristics of damping devices shall the damping device forces, displacements, and
be modeled, as required, to explicitly account for velocities are permitted to be taken as the average
device dependence on frequency, amplitude, and of the values determined by the analyses. If less
duration of seismic loading. than seven pairs of ground motions are used for
18.3.1 Nonlinear Response-History Procedure. response-history analysis, the design damping
A nonlinear response-history analysis shall utilize a device forces, displacements, and velocities shall be
mathematical model of the structure and the taken as the maximum value determined by the
damping system as provided in Section 16.2.2 and analyses. A minimum of three pairs of ground
this section. The model shall directly account for motions shall be used.
the nonlinear hysteretic behavior of elements of the 18.3.2 Nonlinear Static Procedure. The
structure and the damping devices to determine its nonlinear modeling described in Section 16.2.2 and
response. The analysis shall be performed in the lateral loads described in Section 16.2 shall be
accordance with Section 16.2 together with the applied to the seismic force-resisting system. The
requirements of this section. Inherent damping of resulting force-displacement curve shall be used in
the structure shall not be taken as greater than 5 lieu of the assumed effective yield displacement,
percent of critical unless test data consistent with 𝐷𝑌 , of Equation (18-56) to calculate the effective
levels of deformation at or just below the effective ductility demand due to the design earthquake
yield displacement of the seismic force-resisting
ground motions, D, and due to the maximum 18.4.2.1 Seismic Base Shear. The seismic
considered earthquake ground motions, 𝑀 , in Eqs. base shear, 𝑉, of the structure in a given direction
(18-54) and (18-55), respectively. The value of shall be determined as the combination of modal
(𝑅/𝐶𝑑 ) shall be taken as 1.0 in Eqs. (18-6), (18-7), components, 𝑉𝑚 , subject to the limits of Equation
(18-10), and (18-11) for the response-spectrum (18-3):
procedure, and in Eqs. (18-25), (18-26), and (18-34) 𝑉 ≥ 𝑉min (18-3)
for the equivalent lateral force procedure. The seismic base shear, 𝑉, of the structure shall be
determined by the sum of the square root method
(SRSS) or complete quadratic combination of
18.4 Response-Spectrum Procedure modal base shear components, 𝑉𝑚 .
Where the response-spectrum procedure is used to 18.4.2.2 Modal Base Shear. Modal base
th
analyze a structure with a damping system, the shear of the m mode of vibration, 𝑉𝑚 , of the
requirements of this section shall apply. structure in the direction of interest shall be
determined in accordance with Eqs. (18-4):
18.4.1 Modeling. A mathematical model of the
seismic force-resisting system and damping system ̅
𝑉m = 𝐶𝑠𝑚 𝑊 (18-4a)
shall be constructed that represents the spatial
distribution of mass, stiffness, and damping (∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑤𝑖 ϕ𝑖𝑚 )2
̅𝑚 =
𝑊 (18-4b)
throughout the structure. The model and analysis ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑤𝑖 ϕ2𝑖𝑚
shall comply with the requirements of Section 12.9
for the seismic force-resisting system and to the Where
requirements of this section for the damping
system. The stiffness and damping properties of the 𝐶𝑠𝑚 = Seismic response Coefficient of the
mth mode of vibration of the
damping devices used in the models shall be based structure in the direction of interest
on or verified by testing of the damping devices as as determined from Section
specified in Section 18.9 . 18.4.2.4 (m =1) or Section
The elastic stiffness of elements of the damping 18.4.2.6 (m > 1)
system other than damping devices shall be ̅̅̅𝒎
𝑾 = Effective seismic weight of the mth
explicitly modeled. Stiffness of damping devices mode of vibration of the structure
shall be modeled depending on damping device
type as follows: 18.4.2.3 Modal Participation Factor. The
modal participation factor of the mth mode of
1. Displacement-dependent damping
vibration, 𝛤𝑚 , of the structure in the direction of
devices: Displacement-dependent
interest shall be determined in accordance with
damping devices shall be modeled with an
Equation (18-5):
effective stiffness that represents damping
device force at the response displacement 𝑊̅𝑚
of interest (e.g., design story drift). Γ𝑚 = (18-5)
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑤𝑖 𝑖𝑚
Alternatively, the stiffness of hysteretic
and friction damping devices is permitted
to be excluded from response spectrum where
analysis provided design forces in 𝑖𝑚 = displacement amplitude at the ith level of
displacement-dependent damping devices, the structure in the mth mode of vibration in the
QDSD, are applied to the model as external direction of interest, normalized to unity at the
loads (Section 18.7.2.5 ). roof level.
2. Velocity-dependent damping devices:
18.4.2.4 Fundamental Mode Seismic
Velocity-dependent damping devices that
Response Coefficient. The fundamental mode
have a stiffness component (e.g.,
(m=1) seismic response coefficient, 𝐶𝑆1 , in the
viscoelastic damping devices) shall be
direction of interest shall be determined in
modeled with an effective stiffness
accordance with Eqs. (18-6) and (18-7):
corresponding to the amplitude and
frequency of interest. For 𝑇1𝐷 < 𝑇𝑆 ,
18.4.2 Seismic Force-Resisting System
18.5.2.2 Fundamental Mode Properties. 𝑆𝐷1 = The design spectral response acceleration
The fundamental mode shape, 𝜙𝑖1 , and parameter at a period of 1 s
participation factor, 𝛤1 , shall be determined by 𝐵1𝐷 = Numerical Coefficient as set forth in
either dynamic analysis using the elastic structural Table 18-1 for effective damping equal to
properties and deformational characteristics of the 𝛽𝑚𝐷 (m = 1) and period of the structure
resisting elements or using Eqs. (18-22) and (18-23): equal to 𝑇1𝐷
𝑾𝑹 = The effective residual mode effective Displacements and velocities used to determine
weight of the structure determined using maximum forces in damping devices at each story
Equation (18-32) shall account for the angle of orientation of each
device from the horizontal and consider the effects
of increased response due to torsion required for
18.5.2.6 Residual Mode Properties. design of the seismic force-resisting system.
Residual mode shape, 𝜙𝑖𝑅 , participation factor, 𝛤𝑅 , Floor deflections at Level 𝑖, 𝛿𝑖𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛿𝑖𝑀 , story
effective residual mode seismic weight of the drifts, 𝛥𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛥𝑀 , and story velocities,
structure, 𝑊𝑅 , and effective period, 𝑇𝑅 , shall be 𝛻𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛻𝑀 , shall be calculated for both the design
determined using Eqs. (18-30) through (18-33): earthquake ground motions and the maximum
1 − Γ1 ϕ𝑖1
considered earthquake ground motions,
ϕ𝑖𝑅 = (18-30) respectively, in accordance with the following
1 − Γ1
sections.
Γ𝑅 = 1 − Γ1 (18-31)
18.5.3.1 Design Earthquake Floor
𝑊𝑅 = W − 𝑊1 (18-32) Deflection. The total design deflection at each floor
T𝑅 = 0.4𝑇1 (18-33)
of the structure in the direction of interest shall be
calculated as the SRSS of the fundamental and
residual mode floor deflections. The fundamental
18.5.2.7 Residual Mode Seismic Response and residual mode deflections due to the design
Coefficient. The residual mode seismic response earthquake ground motions, 𝛿𝑖1𝐷 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛿𝑖𝑅𝐷 , at the
Coefficient, 𝐶𝑆𝑅 , shall be determined in accordance center of rigidity of Level 𝑖 of the structure in the
with Equation (18-34): direction of interest shall be determined using Eqs.
(18-37) and (18-38):
𝑅 𝑆𝐷𝑆
𝐶𝑆𝑅 = ( ) (18-34) 𝛿𝑖1𝐷 = 𝐷1𝐷 ϕ𝑖1 (18-37)
𝐶𝑑 Ω0 𝐵𝑅
where Where
𝛥1𝐷 = Design story drift due to the 𝑺𝑴𝟏 = The 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 , 5 percent damped,
fundamental mode of vibration of the spectral response acceleration
structure in the direction of interest parameter at a period of 1 s
adjusted for site class effects as
𝛥𝑅𝐷 = Design story drift due to the residual defined in Section 11.4.2
mode of vibration of the structure in
the direction of interest 𝑺𝑴𝑺 = The 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 , 5 percent damped,
spectral response acceleration
Modal design story drifts, parameter at short periods adjusted
𝛥1𝐷 and 𝛥𝑅𝐷 , shall be determined as the difference for site class effects as defined in
of the deflections at the top and bottom of the story Section 11.4.2
under consideration using the floor deflections of
𝑩𝟏𝑴 = Numerical Coefficient as set forth
Section 18.5.3.1 .
in Table 18-1 for effective
18.5.3.4 Design Earthquake Story damping equal to 𝛽𝑚𝑚 (m = 1) and
Velocity. Design story velocities, ∇𝐷 , in the period of structure equal to 𝑇1𝑀
direction of interest shall be calculated in
accordance with Eqs. (18-42) through (18-44): 18.6 Damped Response Modification
on a value of 𝛼 equal to 1.0. The effective system shall be based on the prototype tests
modal damping shall be taken as equal to specified in this section. The fabrication and quality
the total effective damping of the mode of control procedures used for all prototype and
interest (𝛽𝑚𝐷 𝑜𝑟 𝛽𝑚𝑀 ). For determination production damping devices shall be identical.
of the Coefficient 𝐶𝑚𝐹𝐷 , the ductility 18.9.1 Prototype Tests. The following tests shall
demand shall be taken as equal to that of the be performed separately on two full-size damping
fundamental mode ( = 𝐷 𝑜𝑟 = 𝑀 ). devices of each type and size used in the design, in
18.7.2.6 Inelastic Response Limits. the order listed as follows. Representative sizes of
Elements of the damping system are permitted to each type of device are permitted to be used for
exceed strength limits for design loads provided it prototype testing, provided both of the following
is shown by analysis or test that conditions are met:
1. Inelastic response does not adversely 1. Fabrication and quality control procedures
affect damping system function. are identical for each type and size of
2. Element forces calculated in accordance device used in the structure.
with Section 18.7.2.5 , using a value of 𝛺0 2. Prototype testing of representative sizes is
taken as equal to 1.0, do not exceed the accepted by the registered design
strength required to satisfy the load professional responsible for design of the
combinations of Section 12.4. structure.
Test specimens shall not be used for construction,
unless they are accepted by the registered design
18.8 Design Review professional responsible for design of the structure
and meet the requirements for prototype and
A design review of the damping system and related production tests.
test programs shall be performed by an independent
team of registered design professionals in the 18.9.1.1 Data Recording. The force-
appropriate disciplines and others experienced in deflection relationship for each cycle of each test
seismic analysis methods and the theory and shall be recorded.
application of energy dissipation systems. 18.9.1.2 Sequence and Cycles of Testing.
The design review shall include, but need not be For the following test sequences, each damping
limited to, the following: device shall be subjected to gravity load effects and
1. Review of site-specific seismic criteria thermal environments representative of the installed
including the development of the site- condition. For seismic testing, the displacement in
specific spectra and ground motion the devices calculated for the maximum considered
histories and all other project-specific earthquake ground motions, termed herein as the
design criteria. maximum device displacement, shall be used.
2. Review of the preliminary design of the 1. Each damping device shall be subjected to
seismic force-resisting system and the the number of cycles expected in the
damping system, including design design windstorm, but not less than 2,000
parameters of damping devices. continuous fully reversed cycles of wind
3. Review of the final design of the seismic load. Wind load shall be at amplitudes
force-resisting system and the damping expected in the design windstorm and shall
system and all supporting analyses. be applied at a frequency equal to the
4. Review of damping device test inverse of the fundamental period of the
requirements, device manufacturing structure (𝑓1 = 1/𝑇1).
quality control and assurance, and Exception: Damping devices need not be
scheduled maintenance and inspection subjected to these tests if they are not
requirements. subject to wind-induced forces or
displacements or if the design wind force
is less than the device yield or slip force.
18.9 Testing 2. Each damping device shall be loaded with
five fully reversed, sinusoidal cycles at the
The force-velocity displacement and damping maximum earthquake device displacement
properties used for the design of the damping
Table 18-1: Damping Coefficient, BV+I, B1D, BR, B1M, BmD, BmM
(Where Period of the Structure ≥ T0)
Effective Damping, β Bv+I, B1D, BR, B1M, BmD, BmM
(percentage of critical) (where period of the structure ≥ T 0)
≤2 0.8
5 1.0
10 1.2
20 1.5
30 1.8
40 2.1
50 2.4
60 2.7
70 3.0
80 3.3
90 3.6
≥100 4.0
The foundation stiffnesses (𝐾𝑦 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐾𝜃 ) shall be 𝛼𝜃 = Dynamic foundation stiffness modifier for
rocking as determined from Table 19-2
computed by established principles of foundation
mechanics using soil properties that are compatible 𝑣𝑠 = Shear wave velocity
with the soil strain levels associated with the design 𝑇 = Fundamental period as determined in
earthquake motion. The average shear modulus (𝐺) Section 12.8.2
for the soils beneath the foundation at large strain
levels and the associated shear wave velocity (𝑣𝑠 ) 19.2.1.2 Effective Damping. The effective
needed in these computations shall be determined damping factor for the structure-foundation system
from Table 19-1 (β̃) shall be computed as follows:
where 3
𝑇̃
𝑣𝑠𝑜 = The average shear wave velocity for the β̃ = 0.05β𝑜 / ( ) (19-9)
soils beneath the foundation at small strain 𝑇
levels (10–3 percent or less) where
𝐺𝑜 = 𝑉𝑠𝑜2 /𝑔 = the average shear modulus for 𝛽𝑜 = the foundation damping factor as
the soils beneath the foundation at small specified in Figure 19-1
strain levels For values of (𝑆𝐷𝑆 /2.5) between 0.10 and 0.20 the
= The average unit weight of the soils values of 𝛽𝑜 shall be determined by linear
Alternatively, for structures supported on mat interpolation between the solid lines and the dashed
foundations that rest at or near the ground surface lines of Figure 19-1.
or are embedded in such a way that the side wall The quantity 𝑟 in Figure 19-1 is a characteristic
contact with the soil is not considered to remain foundation length that shall be determined as
effective during the design ground motion, the follows:
effective period of the structure is permitted to be ℎ̅
determined from 𝐹𝑜𝑟 ≤ 0.5, 𝑟 = r𝑎 (19-10)
𝐿𝑜
25𝛼 𝑟𝑎 ℎ̅ 1.12𝑟𝑎 ℎ̅2
𝑇̃ = 𝑇√1 + (1 + ) (19-5)
ℎ̅
𝑣𝑠2 𝑇 2 𝛼𝜃 𝑟𝑚3
𝐹𝑜𝑟 ≥ 1, 𝑟 = r𝑚 (19-11)
𝐿𝑜
where 𝛼 = the relative weight density of the
structure and the soil defined by where
𝑊̅ 𝐿𝑜 = The overall length of the side of the
𝛼= (19-6) foundation in the direction being
γ𝐴0 ℎ̅ analyzed
𝑟𝑎 and = Characteristic foundation lengths
𝑟𝑎 and 𝑟𝑚 = characteristic foundation lengths 𝑟𝑚 defined in Eqs. (19-7) and (19-8),
defined by respectively
The value of β̃ computed from Equation (19-9), the design response spectra at the fundamental
both with or without the adjustment represented by period of the fixed-base structure (𝑇1 ).
Equation (19-12), shall in no case be taken as less The period 𝑇̃ shall be determined from Equation
than β̃ = 0.05 or greater than β̃ = 0.20 . (19-3) or from Equation (19-5) where applicable,
taking 𝑇 = 𝑇1 , evaluating 𝑘̅ from Equation (19-4)
19.2.2 Vertical Distribution of Seismic Forces. ̅ =𝑊 ̅1 , and computing ℎ̅ as follows:
with 𝑊
The distribution over the height of the structure of
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑤𝑖 𝜑𝑖1 ℎ𝑖
the reduced total seismic force (𝑉̃) shall be ℎ̅ = (19-15)
considered to be the same as for the structure ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑤𝑖 𝜑𝑖1
without interaction.
19.2.3 Other Effects. The modified story shears, where
overturning moments, and torsional effects about a 𝑤𝑖 = The portion of the total gravity load of the
vertical axis shall be determined as for structures structure at Level 𝑖
without interaction using the reduced lateral forces. 𝜙𝑖1 = The displacement amplitude at the ith level
of the structure when vibrating in its
The modified deflections (δ̃) shall be determined as fundamental mode
follows:
𝑉̃ 𝑀𝑜 ℎ𝑥 ℎ𝑖 = The height above the base to Level 𝑖
𝛿̃𝑥 = [ + 𝛿𝑥 ] (19-13)
𝑉 𝐾𝜃
The preceding designated values of 𝑊 ̅ , ℎ̅, T, and 𝑇̃
also shall be used to evaluate the factor α from
where
Equation (19-6) and the factor βo from Figure 19-1.
𝑀𝑜 = The overturning moment at the base using No reduction shall be made in the shear components
the unmodified seismic forces and not
contributed by the higher modes of vibration. The
including the reduction permitted in the
design of the foundation reduced base shear (𝑉̃1) shall in no case be taken
less than 0.7𝑉1.
ℎ𝑥 = The height above the base to the level
under consideration 19.3.2 Other Modal Effects. The modified modal
seismic forces, story shears, and overturning
𝛼𝑥 = The deflections of the fixed-base structure
as determined in Section 12.8.6 using the
moments shall be determined as for structures
unmodified seismic forces without interaction using the modified base shear
(𝑉̃1) instead of 𝑉1. The modified modal deflections
The modified story drifts and P-delta effects shall (δ̃𝑥𝑚 ) shall be determined as follows:
be evaluated in accordance with the provisions of 𝑉̃1 𝑀𝑜1 ℎ𝑥
Sections 12.8.6 and 12.8.7 using the modified story δ̃𝑥1 = [ + δ𝑥1 ] (19-16)
shears and deflections determined in this section. 𝑉1 𝐾𝜃
and
δ̃𝑥𝑚 = δ𝑥𝑚 for 𝑚 = 2, 3, … (19-17)
19.3 Modal Analysis Procedure where
𝑀𝑜1 = The overturning base moment for the
The following provisions are supplementary to fundamental mode of the fixed-base
those presented in Section 12.9 . structure using the unmodified modal
19.3.1 Modal Base Shears. To account for the base shear 𝑉1
effects of soil–structure interaction, the base shear 𝛿𝑥𝑚 = The modal deflections at Level 𝑥 of the
corresponding to the fundamental mode of vibration fixed-base structure using the unmodified
(𝑉1) shall be reduced to modal shears, 𝑉𝑚
A site response analysis in accordance with Section (a) 𝑣̅𝑠 for the top 30 m (𝑣̅𝑠 method).
21.1 shall be provided for Site Class F soils, unless (b) ̅
𝑁 for the top 30 m (𝑁 ̅ method).
the exception to Section 20.3.1 is applicable. (c) 𝑁̅ch for cohesionless soil layers (𝑃𝐼 < 20)
20.3 —Site class definitions in the top 30 m and 𝑠̅𝑢 for cohesive soil
layers (𝑃𝐼 > 20) in the top 30 m (𝑠̅𝑢
20.3.1 Site Class F. Where any of the following method). Where the 𝑁 ̅ch and 𝑠̅𝑢 criteria
conditions is satisfied, the site shall be classified as differ, the site shall be assigned to the
Site Class F and a site response analysis in category with the softer soil.
accordance with Section 21.1 shall be performed.
20.3.4 Shear Wave Velocity for Site Class B.
1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or
collapse under seismic loading, such as 20.3.4.1 The shear wave velocity for rock,
liquefiable soils, quick and highly sensitive Site Class B, shall be either measured on site or
clays, and collapsible weakly cemented estimated by a geotechnical engineer, engineering
soils. geologist, or seismologist for competent rock with
moderate fracturing and weathering.
Exception: For structures having
fundamental periods of vibration equal to 20.3.4.2 Softer and more highly fractured
or less than 0.5 s, site response analysis is and weathered rock shall either be measured on site
not required to determine spectral for shear wave velocity or classified as Site Class
accelerations for liquefiable soils. Rather, a C.
site class is permitted to be determined in
20.3.5 Shear Wave Velocity for Site Class A.
accordance with Section 20.3 and the
corresponding values of 𝐹𝑎 and 𝐹𝑣 20.3.5.1 The hard rock, Site Class A,
determined from Table 11-1 and Table 11-2. category shall be supported by shear wave velocity
measurement either on site or on profiles of the
same rock type in the same formation with an equal 20.4.4 𝒔̅𝒖 , Average Undrained Shear Strength.
or greater degree of weathering and fracturing. 𝑠̅𝑢 shall be determined in accordance with the
20.3.5.2 Where hard rock conditions are following formula:
known to be continuous to a depth of 30 m, surficial 𝑑𝑐
shear wave velocity measurements are permitted to 𝑠̅𝑢 =
𝑑𝑖 (20-4)
be extrapolated to assess 𝑣̅𝑠 . ∑𝑘𝑖=1
𝑠𝑢𝑖
where,
20.4 —Definitions of site class
∑𝑘𝑖=1 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑑𝑐 ;
parameters
𝑑𝑐 = the total thickness of cohesive soil layers in
20.4.1 The definitions presented in this section the top 30 m;
shall apply to the upper 30 m of the site profile. 𝑃𝐼 = the plasticity index as determined in
20.4.1.1 Profiles containing distinct soil and accordance with ASTM D4318;
rock layers shall be subdivided into those layers 𝑤 = the moisture content in percent as determined
designated by a number that ranges from 1 to n at in accordance with ASTM D2216;
the bottom where there are a total of n distinct layers 𝑠𝑢𝑖 = the undrained shear strength in kPa, not to
in the upper 30 m. exceed 240 kPa as determined in accordance with
ASTM D2166 or ASTM D2850.
20.4.1.2 Where some of the n layers are
cohesive and others are not, k is the number of
cohesive layers and m is the number of cohesionless
layers. The symbol i refers to any one of the layers
between 1 and n.
20.4.2 𝒗̅𝒔 , Average Shear Wave Velocity. 𝑣̅s shall
be determined in accordance with the following
formula:
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑑𝑖
𝑣̅𝑠 = (20-1)
𝑑
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑖
𝑣𝑠𝑖
where, 𝑑𝑖 = the thickness of any layer between 0
and 30 m; 𝑣𝑠𝑖 = the shear wave velocity in m/s;
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑑𝑖 = 30 m.
20.4.3 𝑵̅ , Average Field Standard Penetration
Resistance and 𝑵̅ ch, Average Standard Penetration
̅ and 𝑁
Resistance for Cohesionless Soil Layers. 𝑁 ̅ch
shall be determined in accordance with the
following formulas:
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑑𝑖
̅=
𝑁
𝑑 (20-2)
∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑖
𝑁𝑖
where 𝑁𝑖 and 𝑑𝑖 in Equation (20-2) are for
cohesionless soil, cohesive soil, and rock layers.
𝑑𝑠
𝑁̅𝑐ℎ =
𝑑𝑖 (20-3)
∑𝑚𝑖=1 𝑁
𝑖
where 𝑁𝑖 and 𝑑𝑖 in Equation (20-3) are for
cohesionless soil layers only and ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑑𝑖 = 𝑑𝑆
where 𝑑𝑠 is the total thickness of cohesionless soil
layers in the top 30 m. 𝑁𝑖 is the standard penetration
resistance (ASTM D1586) not to exceed 100
blows/30 cm as directly measured in the field
without corrections. Where refusal is met for a rock
layer, 𝑁𝑖 shall be taken as 100 blows/30 cm.
21.1 Site Response Analysis 11.4.2 consistent with the classification of the soils
at the profile base.
The requirements of Section 21.1 shall be satisfied 21.1.3 Site Response Analysis and Computed
where site response analysis is performed or Results. Base ground motion time histories shall be
required by Section 11.4.6. The analysis shall be input to the soil profile as outcropping motions.
documented in a report. Using appropriate computational techniques that
treat nonlinear soil properties in a nonlinear or
21.1.1 Base Ground Motions. A 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 response equivalent-linear manner, the response of the soil
spectrum shall be developed for bedrock, using the profile shall be determined and surface ground
procedure of Sections 11.4.5 or 21.2 . Unless a site- motion time histories shall be calculated. Ratios of
specific ground motion hazard analysis described in 5 percent damped response spectra of surface
Section 21.2 is carried out, the 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 rock response ground motions to input base ground motions shall
spectrum shall be developed using the procedure of be calculated. The recommended surface 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅
Section 11.4.5 assuming Site Class B. If bedrock ground motion response spectrum shall not be
consists of Site Class A, the spectrum shall be lower than the 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 response spectrum of the base
adjusted using the site coefficients in Section 11.4.2 motion multiplied by the average surface-to-base
unless other site coefficients can be justified. At response spectral ratios (calculated period by
least five recorded or simulated horizontal ground period) obtained from the site response analyses.
motion acceleration time histories shall be selected The recommended surface ground motions that
from events having magnitudes and fault distances result from the analysis shall reflect consideration
that are consistent with those that control the 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 of sensitivity of response to uncertainty in soil
ground motion. Each selected time history shall be properties, depth of soil model, and input motions.
scaled so that its response spectrum is, on average, 21.2 Risk-Targeted Maximum
approximately at the level of the 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 rock Considered Earthquake (MCER) Ground
response spectrum over the period range of
Motion Hazard Analysis
significance to structural response.
The requirements of Section 21.2 shall be satisfied
21.1.2 Site Condition Modeling. A site response
where a ground motion hazard analysis is
model based on low-strain shear wave velocities,
performed or required by Section 11.4.6 . The
nonlinear or equivalent linear shear stress–strain
ground motion hazard analysis shall account for the
relationships, and unit weights shall be developed.
regional tectonic setting, geology, and seismicity,
Low-strain shear wave velocities shall be
the expected recurrence rates and maximum
determined from field measurements at the site or
magnitudes of earthquakes on known faults and
from measurements from similar soils in the site
source zones, the characteristics of ground motion
vicinity. Nonlinear or equivalent linear shear
attenuation, near source effects, if any, on ground
stress– strain relationships and unit weights shall be
motions, and the effects of subsurface site
selected on the basis of laboratory tests or published
conditions on ground motions. The characteristics
relationships for similar soils. The uncertainties in
of subsurface site conditions shall be considered
soil properties shall be estimated. Where very deep
either using attenuation relations that represent
soil profiles make the development of a soil model
regional and local geology or in accordance with
to bedrock impractical, the model is permitted to be
Section 21.1 . The analysis shall incorporate current
terminated where the soil stiffness is at least as great
seismic interpretations, including uncertainties for
as the values used to define Site Class D in
models and parameter values for seismic sources
CHAPTER 20 . In such cases, the MCER response
and ground motions. If the spectral response
spectrum and acceleration time histories of the base
accelerations predicted by the attenuation relations
motion developed in Section 21.1.1 shall be
do not represent the maximum response in the
adjusted upward using site coefficients in Section
horizontal plane, then the response spectral
accelerations computed from the hazard analysis within a 50-year period for a collapse fragility
shall be scaled by factors to increase the motions to having (i) a 10 percent probability of collapse at
the maximum response. If the attenuation relations said ordinate of the probabilistic ground motion
predict the geometric mean or similar metric of the response spectrum and (ii) a logarithmic standard
two horizontal components, then the scale factors deviation value of 0.6.
shall be: 1.1 for periods less than or equal to 0.2 sec;
21.2.2 Deterministic (MCER) Ground Motions.
1.3 for a period of 1.0 sec., and, 1.5 for periods
The deterministic spectral response acceleration at
greater than or equal to 5.0 sec., unless it can be
each period shall be calculated as an 84th-percentile
shown that other scale factors more closely
5 percent damped spectral response acceleration in
represent the maximum response, in the horizontal
the direction of maximum horizontal response
plane, to the geometric mean of the horizontal
computed at that period. The largest such
components. Scale factors between these periods
acceleration calculated for the characteristic
shall be obtained by linear interpolation. The
earthquakes on all known active faults within the
analysis shall be documented in a report.
region shall be used. For the purposes of this code,
21.2.1 Probabilistic (MCER) Ground Motions. the ordinates of the deterministic ground motion
The probabilistic spectral response accelerations response spectrum shall not be taken as lower than
shall be taken as the spectral response accelerations the corresponding ordinates of the response
in the direction of maximum horizontal response spectrum determined in accordance with Figure
represented by a 5 percent damped acceleration 21-1 , where 𝐹𝑎 and 𝐹𝑣 are determined using Table
response spectrum that is expected to achieve a 1 11-1 and Table 11-2 , respectively, with the value of
percent probability of collapse within a 50-year 𝑆𝑆 taken as 1.5 and the value of 𝑆1 taken as 0.6.
period. For the purpose of this code, ordinates of the
21.2.3 Site-Specific MCER. The site-specific
probabilistic ground motion response spectrum
𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 spectral response acceleration at any period,
shall be determined by either Method 1 of Section
𝑆𝑎𝑀 , shall be taken as the lesser of the spectral
21.2.1.1 or Method 2 of Section 21.2.1.2 .
response accelerations from the probabilistic
21.2.1.1 Method 1. At each spectral ground motions of Section 21.2.1 and the
response period for which the acceleration is deterministic ground motions of Section 21.2.2 .
computed, ordinates of the probabilistic ground
motion response spectrum shall be determined as 21.3 Design Response Spectrum
the product of the risk coefficient, 𝐶𝑅 , and the
spectral response acceleration from a 5 percent The design spectral response acceleration at any
damped acceleration response spectrum having a 2 period shall be determined from Equation (21-1):
percent probability of exceedance within a 50-year 2
𝑆𝑎 = 𝑆 (21-1)
period. The value of the risk coefficient, 𝐶𝑅 , shall 3 𝑎𝑀
be determined using values of 𝐶𝑅𝑆 and 𝐶𝑅1 from where 𝑆𝑎𝑀 is the 𝑀𝐶𝐸𝑅 spectral response
Figure 22-5 and Figure 22-6, respectively. At acceleration obtained from Section 21.1 or 21.2 .
spectral response periods less than or equal to 0.2 s, The design spectral response acceleration at any
𝐶𝑅 shall be taken as equal to 𝐶𝑅𝑆 . At spectral period shall not be taken as less than 80 percent of
response periods greater than or equal to 1.0 s, 𝐶𝑅 𝑆𝑎 determined in accordance with Section 11.4.4.
shall be taken as equal to 𝐶𝑅1 . At response spectral For sites classified as Site Class F requiring site
periods greater than 0.2 s and less than 1.0 s, 𝐶𝑅 response analysis in accordance with Section
shall be based on linear interpolation of 𝐶𝑅𝑆 and CR1. 11.4.6 , the design spectral response acceleration at
any period shall not be taken as less than 80 percent
21.2.1.2 Method 2. At each spectral of 𝑆𝑎 determined for Site Class E in accordance with
response period for which the acceleration is Section 11.4.4 .
computed, ordinates of the probabilistic ground
motion response spectrum shall be determined from 21.4 Design Acceleration Parameters
iterative integration of a site-specific hazard curve
with a lognormal probability density function Where the site-specific procedure is used to
representing the collapse fragility (i.e., probability determine the design ground motion in accordance
of collapse as a function of spectral response with Section 21.3, the parameter 𝑆𝐷𝑆 shall be taken
acceleration). The ordinate of the probabilistic as the spectral acceleration, 𝑆𝑎 , obtained from the
ground motion response spectrum at each period site-specific spectra at a period of 0.2 s, except that
shall achieve a 1 percent probability of collapse it shall not be taken as less than 90 percent of the
Figure 22-1: SS Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) ground motion parameter for 0.2 s spectral response acceleration (5% of
critical damping), site class B.
Figure 22-1a: SS Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) ground motion for 0.2 s spectral response acceleration (5% of critical
damping), site class B, Northern Saudi Arabia.
Figure 22-1b: SS Risk Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) ground motion for 0.2 s spectral response acceleration (5% of critical
damping), site class B, Southern Saudi Arabia.
Figure 22-2: S1 Risk- Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) ground motion parameter for 1 s spectral response acceleration (5% of
critical damping), site class B.
Figure 22-2a: S1 Risk- Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) ground motion parameter for 1 s spectral response acceleration (5% of
critical damping), site class B, Northern Saudi Arabia.
Figure 22-2b: S1 Risk- Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) ground motion parameter for 1 s spectral response acceleration (5% of
critical damping), site class B, Southern Saudi Arabia.
Figure 22-3: Maximum Considered Earthquake Geometric Mean (MCEG) PGA, %g, Site Class B.
Figure 22-3 a: Maximum Considered Earthquake Geometric Mean (MCEG) PGA, %g, Site Class B, Northern Saudi Arabia.
Figure 22-3 b: Maximum Considered Earthquake Geometric Mean (MCEG) PGA, %g, Site Class B, Southern Saudi Arabia.
Figure 22-5: Mapped risk coefficient at 0.2 s spectral response period, CRS.
Figure 22-6: Mapped risk coefficient at 1.0 s spectral response period, CR1.
Rules for Construction of Power Boilers, BPVC-I 2010 AWWA D100-05: Welded Steel Tanks for Water
Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers, BPVC-IV Storage, 2006
2010 AWWA D103: Factory-Coated Bolted Steel Tanks for
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, BPVC-VIII Water Storage, 2009
Division 1 2010 AWWA D110: Wire- and Strand-Wound Circular
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, BPVC-VIII Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks, 2004
Division 2 Alternative Rules 2010 AWWA D115: Tendon-Prestressed Concrete Water
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, BPVC-VIII Tanks, 2006
Division 3 Alternative Rules for Construction of ICC-ES: International Code Council Evaluation Service
High Pressure Vessels 2010
*ICC-ES AC 156-04: Acceptance Criteria for Seismic
ASTM: ASTM International Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of
Nonstructural Components and Systems, 2007
ASTM A 108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, MSS
Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished, 2007 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Fitting Industry
Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength, *MSS SP-58: Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials,
2007b Design, and Manufacture, 2002
ASTM A 500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural NFPA : National Fire Protection Association
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes, 2009
NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Systems, 2007
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
NFPA 59A: Standard for the Production, Storage, and
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG), 2009
2009
RMI: Rack Manufacturers Institute
ASTM A706/A706M Standard Specification for Low-
Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete RMI
Reinforcement, 2004b ANSI/MH 16.1 : Specification for the Design, Testing,
ASTM C635 Standard Specification for the and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks,
Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal 2011
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in
Panel Ceilings, 2004 SJI: Steel Joist Institute
ASTM C636 Standard Practice for Installation of 1173 B London Links Drive
Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Forest, VA 24551
Tile and Lay-in Panels, 2004
ASTM D1586 Standard Test Method for Penetration
Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils, 2004 ANSI/SJI-CJ-2010 : Standard Specification for
ASTM D2166 Standard Test Method for Unconfined Composite Steel Joists, CJ-series, 2010
Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil, 2000 ANSI/SJI-JG-2010: Standard Specification for Joist
ASTM D2216 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Girders, 2010
Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil ANSI/SJI-K-2010 : Standard Specifications for Open
and Rock by Web Steel Joists, K-Series, 2010
Mass, 1998 ANSI/SJI-LH/DLH-2010 : Standard Specifications for
ASTM D2850 Standard Test Method for Long span Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Long
Unconsolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression span Steel Joists, DLH-Series, 2010
Test on Cohesive Soils, 2003a ANSI/SJI-JG-1.1
ASTM D4318 Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, ANSI/SJI-CJ-1.0
and Plasticity Index of Soils, 2000
ASTM E 580 Standard Practice for Installation of TMS: The Masonry Society
Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile 3970 Broadway
and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake
Ground Motions, 2009a Unit 201-D
AWWA: American Water Works Association Boulder, CO 80304-1135
TMS 402
TMS 602
SBC: Saudi Building Code National Committee
1. The total area of openings in a wall that DESIGN FORCE, 𝑭—Equivalent static force to
receives positive external pressure exceeds be used in the determination of wind loads
the sum of the areas of openings in the for other structures.
balance of the building envelope (walls DESIGN PRESSURE, 𝒑—Equivalent static
and roof) by more than 10 percent. pressure to be used in the determination of
2. The total area of openings in a wall that wind loads for buildings.
receives positive external pressure exceeds DIAPHRAGM—Roof, floor, or other membrane
0.4 m2 or 1 percent of the area of that wall, or bracing system acting to transfer lateral
whichever is smaller, and the percentage of forces to the vertical Main Wind-Force
openings in the balance of the building Resisting System. For analysis under wind
envelope does not exceed 20 percent. loads, diaphragms constructed of untopped
These conditions are expressed by the following steel decks, concrete filled steel decks, and
concrete slabs, each having a span-to-depth
equations:
ratio of two or less, shall be permitted to be
1. 𝐴𝑜 > 1.10𝐴𝑜𝑖 idealized as rigid.
2. 𝐴𝑜 > 0.4 m2 or > 0.01𝐴𝑔 , whichever is DIRECTIONAL PROCEDURE—A procedure
smaller, and 𝐴𝑜𝑖 /𝐴𝑔𝑖 ≤ 0.20 for determining wind loads on buildings
where, 𝐴𝑜 , 𝐴𝑔 are as defined for Open Building and other structures for specific wind
directions, in which the external pressure
𝐴𝑜𝑖 = the sum of the areas of openings in the coefficients utilized are based on past wind
building envelope (walls and roof) not tunnel testing of prototypical building
including 𝐴𝑜 , in m2 models for the corresponding direction of
𝐴𝑔𝑖 = the sum of the gross surface areas of the wind.
building envelope (walls and roof) not EAVE HEIGHT, 𝒉𝒆 —The distance from the
including 𝐴𝑔 , in m2 ground surface adjacent to the building to
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE, the roof eave line at a particular wall. If the
REGULAR-SHAPED—A building or height of the eave varies along the wall, the
other structure having no unusual average height shall be used.
geometrical irregularity in spatial form. EFFECTIVE WIND AREA, 𝑨—The area used to
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE, determine (𝐺𝐶𝑝 ). For component and
RIGID—A building or other structure cladding elements, the effective wind area
whose fundamental frequency is greater in Figure 30-1 through Figure 30-7, Figure
than or equal to 1 Hz. 30-8 . Figure 30-9 , and Figure 30-12 through
BUILDING, SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM—A Figure 30-14 is the span length multiplied
building in which both windward and by an effective width that needs not be less
leeward wind loads are transmitted by roof than one-third the span length. For cladding
and vertically spanning wall assemblies, fasteners, the effective wind area shall not
through continuous floor and roof be greater than the area that is tributary to
diaphragms, to the MWFRS. an individual fastener.
BUILDING, TORSIONALLY REGULAR ENVELOPE PROCEDURE—A procedure for
UNDER WIND LOAD—A building with determining wind load cases on buildings,
the MWFRS about each principal axis in which pseudo-external pressure
proportioned so that the maximum coefficients are derived from past wind
displacement at each story under Case 2, tunnel testing of prototypical building
the torsional wind load case, of Figure 27-9, models successively rotated through 360
does not exceed the maximum degrees, such that the pseudo-pressure
displacement at the same location under cases produce key structural actions (uplift,
Case 1 of Figure 27-9, the basic wind load horizontal shear, bending moments, etc.)
case. that envelop their maximum values among
COMPONENTS AND CLADDING (C&C)— all possible wind directions.
Elements of the building envelope that do ESCARPMENT—Also known as scarp, with
not qualify as part of the MWFRS. respect to topographic effects in Section
26.8 , a cliff or steep slope generally
separating two levels or gently sloping projected on a plane normal to the wind
areas (see Figure 26-3). direction, in m2
FREE ROOF—Roof with a configuration 𝐴𝑔 The gross area of that wall in which 𝐴𝑜 is
generally conforming to those shown in identified, in m2
Figure 27-4 through Figure 27-6 𝐴𝑔𝑖 The sum of the gross surface areas of the
(monoslope, pitched, or troughed) in an building envelope (walls and roof not
open building with no enclosing walls including 𝐴𝑔 , in m2
underneath the roof surface. 𝐴𝑜 Total area of openings in a wall that
GLAZING—Glass or transparent or translucent receives positive external pressure, in m2
plastic sheet used in windows, doors, 𝐴𝑜𝑖 The sum of the areas of openings in the
skylights, or curtain walls. building envelope (walls and roof) not
HILL—With respect to topographic effects in
including 𝐴𝑜 , in m2
Section 26.8 , a land surface characterized
𝐴𝑜𝑔 Total area of openings in the building
by strong relief in any horizontal direction
envelope in m2
(see Figure 26-3).
MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM 𝐴𝑠 Gross area of the solid freestanding wall or
(MWFRS) —An assemblage of structural solid sign, in m2
elements assigned to provide support and 𝑎 Width of pressure coefficient zone, in m
stability for the overall structure. The 𝐵 Horizontal dimension of building measured
system generally receives wind loading normal to wind direction, in m
from more than one surface. 𝑏̅ Mean hourly wind speed factor in Equation
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT, 𝒉—The average of the (26-17b) from Table 26-2
roof eave height and the height to the 𝑏̂ 3-s gust speed factor from Table 26-2
highest point on the roof surface, except 𝐶𝑓 Force coefficient to be used in
that, for roof angles of less than or equal to determination of wind loads for other
10°, the mean roof height is permitted to be structures
taken as the roof eave height. 𝐶𝑁 Net pressure coefficient to be used in
OPENINGS—Apertures or holes in the building determination of wind loads for open
envelope that allow air to flow through the buildings
building envelope and that are designed as 𝐶𝑝 External pressure coefficient to be used in
“open” during design winds as defined by determination of wind loads for buildings
these provisions. 𝑐 Turbulence intensity factor from Table 26-2
RECOGNIZED LITERATURE—Published 𝐷 Diameter of a circular structure or member,
research findings and technical papers that in m
are approved. 𝐷′ Depth of protruding elements such as ribs
RIDGE—With respect to topographic effects in and spoilers, in m
Section 26.8 an elongated crest of a hill 𝐹 Design wind force for other structures, in N
characterized by strong relief in two 𝐺 Gust-effect factor
directions (see Figure 26-3). 𝐺𝑓 Gust-effect factor for MWFRS of flexible
WIND TUNNEL PROCEDURE—A procedure buildings and other structures
for determining wind loads on buildings (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑛 ) Combined net pressure coefficient for a
and other structures, in which pressures parapet
and/or forces and moments are determined (𝐺𝐶𝑝 ) Product of external pressure coefficient and
for each wind direction considered, from a
gust-effect factor to be used in
model of the building or other structure and
determination of wind loads for buildings
its surroundings, in accordance with
(𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑓 ) Product of the equivalent external pressure
CHAPTER 31 .
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be used
26.3 —Symbols in determination of wind loads for MWFRS
The following symbols apply only to the provisions of low-rise buildings
of CHAPTER 26 through CHAPTER 31 : (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 ) Product of internal pressure coefficient and
gust-effect factor to be used in
𝐴 Effective wind area, in m2 determination of wind loads for buildings
𝐴𝑓 Area of open buildings and other structures (𝐺𝐶𝑟 ) Product of external pressure coefficient and
either normal to the wind direction or gust-effect factor to be used in
determination of wind loads for rooftop 𝑝0 Net pressure on walls at base of building
structures 𝑝𝑝 Combined net pressure on a parapet from
𝑔𝑄 Peak factor for background response in Equation (27-6), in N/m2
Equation (26-12) 𝑝𝑠 Net design wind pressure from Equation
𝑔𝑅 Peak factor for resonant response in (28-4), N/m2
Equation (26-12) 𝑝𝑠10 Simplified design wind pressure for
𝑔𝑣 Peak factor for wind response in Equation Exposure B at h = 10 m and I = 1.0 from
(26-12) Figure 28-2 , in N/m2
𝐻 Height of hill or escarpment in Figure 26-3, 𝑝𝑧 Net roof pressure, in N/m2
in m 𝑃𝑊 Wind pressure acting on windward face in
ℎ Mean roof height of a building or height of Figure 27-9 , in N/m2
other structure, except that eave height 𝑞 Velocity pressure, in N/m2
shall be used for roof angle 𝜃 less than or 𝑞ℎ Velocity pressure evaluated at height z = h,
equal to 10°, in m in N/m2
ℎ𝑒 Roof eave height at a particular wall, or the 𝑞𝑖 Velocity pressure for internal pressure
average height if the eave varies along the determination, in N/m2
wall 𝑞𝑝 Velocity pressure at top of parapet, in N/m2
ℎ𝑝 Height to top of parapet in Figure 30-10 𝑞𝑧 Velocity pressure evaluated at height z
𝐾1 , 𝐾2 , 𝐾3 Multipliers in Figure 26-3 to obtain above ground, in N/m2
𝐾𝑧𝑡 𝑅 Resonant response factor from Equation
𝐾𝑑 Wind directionality factor in Table 26-1 (26-14)
𝐾ℎ Velocity pressure exposure coefficient 𝑅𝐵 , 𝑅ℎ , 𝑅𝐿 Values from Equation (26-17a)
evaluated at height 𝑧 = ℎ 𝑅𝑖 Reduction factor from Equation (26-19)
𝐾𝑧 Velocity pressure exposure coefficient 𝑅𝑛 Value from Equation (26-15)
evaluated at height 𝑧 𝑠 Vertical dimension of the solid
𝐾𝑧𝑡 Topographic factor as defined in Section freestanding wall or solid sign from Figure
26.8 29-1 , in m
𝐿 Horizontal dimension of a building 𝑟 Rise-to-span ratio for arched roofs
measured parallel to the wind direction, 𝑉 Ultimate wind speed obtained from Figure
in m 26-2 A through Figure 26-2C, in m/s. The
𝐿ℎ Distance upwind of crest of hill or Ultimate wind speed corresponds to a 3-sec
escarpment in Figure 26-3 to where the gust speed at 10 m above the ground in
difference in ground elevation is half the Exposure Category C
height of the hill or escarpment, in m 𝑉𝑖 Unpartitioned internal volume, m3
𝐿𝑧 Integral length scale of turbulence, in m 𝑉̅𝑧̅ Mean hourly wind speed at height z̅, m/s
𝐿𝑟 Horizontal dimension of return corner for a 𝑊 Width of building in Figure 30-3and Figure
solid freestanding wall or solid sign from 30-5A and Figure 30-5B and width of span
Figure 29-1 , in m in Figure 30-4 and Figure 30-6, in m
𝑙 Integral length scale factor from Table 26-2, 𝑥 Distance upwind or downwind of crest in
m Figure 26-3 , in m
𝑁1 Reduced frequency from Equation (26-16) 𝑧 Height above ground level, in m
𝑛𝑎 Approximate lower bound natural 𝑧̅ Equivalent height of structure, in m
frequency (𝐻𝑧 from Section 26.9.2 ) 𝑧𝑔 Nominal height of the atmospheric
𝑛1 Fundamental natural frequency, Hz boundary layer used in this code. Values
𝑝 Design pressure to be used in determination appear in Table 26-2
of wind loads for buildings, in N/m2 𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛 Exposure constant from Table 26-2
𝑝ℎ Net pressure on walls at top of building 𝛼 3-sec gust-speed power law exponent from
𝑃𝐿 Wind pressure acting on leeward face in Table 26-2
Figure 27-8 , in N/m2 α
̂ Reciprocal of α from Table 26-2
𝑝𝑛𝑒𝑡 Net design wind pressure from Equation ̅
α Mean hourly wind-speed power law
(30-3), in N/m2 exponent in Equation (26-17b) from Table
𝑝𝑛𝑒𝑡10 Net design wind pressure for Exposure B at 26-2
h = 10 m and I = 1.0 from Figure 30-8, in 𝛽 Damping ratio, percent critical for
N/m2 buildings or other structures
∈ Ratio of solid area to gross area for solid 26.5.2.2 The Building Official shall, if
freestanding wall, solid sign, open sign, necessary, adjust the values given Figure 26-2 to
face of a trussed tower, or lattice structure account for higher local wind speeds.
𝜆 Adjustment factor for building height and 26.5.2.3 Such adjustment shall be based on
exposure from Figure 28-2 and Figure 30-8
meteorological information and an estimate of the
𝜂 Value used in Equation (26-17a) (see Ultimate wind speed obtained in accordance with
Section 26.9.4) the provisions of Section 26.5.3 .
𝜃 Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in
degrees 26.5.3 Estimation of Ultimate Wind Speeds
𝑣 Height-to-width ratio for solid sign from Regional Climatic Data.
26.4 —General 26.5.3.1 Regional climatic data shall only
be used in lieu of the Ultimate wind speeds given in
26.4.1 Sign Convention. Positive pressure acts Figure 26-2 when (1) approved extreme-value
toward the surface and negative pressure acts away statistical-analysis procedures have been employed
from the surface. in reducing the data; and (2) the length of record,
26.4.2 Critical Load Condition. Values of sampling error, averaging time, anemometer height,
external and internal pressures shall be combined data quality, and terrain exposure of the
algebraically to determine the most critical load. anemometer have been taken into account.
26.4.3 Wind Pressures Acting on Opposite 26.5.3.2 Reduction in Ultimate wind speed
Faces of Each Building Surface. In the calculation below that of Figure 26-2 shall be permitted.
of design wind loads for the MWFRS and for 26.5.3.3 When the Ultimate wind speed is
components and cladding for buildings, the estimated from regional climatic data, the Ultimate
algebraic sum of the pressures acting on opposite wind speed shall not be less than the wind speed
faces of each building surface shall be taken into associated with the specified mean recurrence
account. interval, and the estimate shall be adjusted for
26.5 —Wind Hazard Map equivalence to a 3-sec gust wind speed at 10 m
above ground in Exposure C.
26.5.1 Ultimate wind Speed.
26.5.3.4 The data analysis shall be
26.5.1.1 The Ultimate wind speed, 𝑉, used performed in accordance with this chapter.
in the determination of design wind loads on
buildings and other structures shall be determined 26.5.4 Limitation. Tornadoes and hurricane
from Figure 26-2 as follows, except as provided in borne regions have not been considered in
Section 26.5.2 and 26.5.3: developing the Ultimate wind-speed distributions.
26.7.2.1 For each selected wind direction at Roughness D, prevails in the upwind
which the wind loads are to be determined, the direction for a distance greater than 1500
exposure of the building or structure shall be m or 20 times the building height,
determined for the two upwind sectors extending whichever is greater.
45º either side of the selected wind direction. (b) Exposure D shall also apply where the
26.7.2.2 The exposure in these two sectors ground surface roughness immediately
shall be determined in accordance with Sections upwind of the site is B or C, and the site is
26.7.3 and 26.7.4, and the exposure that would result within a distance of 180 m or 20 times the
in the highest wind loads shall be used to represent building height, whichever is greater, from
the winds from that direction. an Exposure D condition as defined
previously.
26.7.3 Surface Roughness Categories.
26.7.4.4 For a site located in the transition
26.7.3.1 A ground Surface Roughness zone between exposure categories, the category
within each 45° sector shall be determined for a resulting in the largest wind forces shall be used.
distance upwind of the site as defined in Section
26.7.4 from the categories defined in the following Exception: An intermediate exposure between the
text, for the purpose of assigning an exposure preceding categories is permitted in a transition
category as defined in Section 26.7.4 . zone provided that it is determined by a rational
analysis method defined in the recognized
(a) Surface Roughness B: Urban and literature.
suburban areas, wooded areas, or other
terrain with numerous closely spaced 26.7.5 Exposure Requirements
obstructions having the size of single- 26.7.5.1 Directional Procedure
family dwellings or larger. (CHAPTER 27 ).
(b) Surface Roughness C: Open terrain with 26.7.5.1.1 For each wind direction
scattered obstructions having heights considered, wind loads for the design of the
generally less than 10 m. This category MWFRS of enclosed and partially enclosed
includes flat open country and grasslands. buildings using the Directional Procedure of
(c) Surface Roughness D: Flat, unobstructed CHAPTER 27 shall be based on the exposures as
areas and water surfaces. This category defined in Section 26.7.4 .
includes smooth mud flats and salt flats.
26.7.5.1.2 Wind loads for the design of open
26.7.4 Exposure Categories. buildings with monoslope, pitched, or troughed free
26.7.4.1 Exposure B: roofs shall be based on the exposures, as defined in
Section 26.7.4 , resulting in the highest wind loads
(a) For buildings with a mean roof height of for any wind direction at the site.
less than or equal to 9 m, Exposure B shall
apply where the ground surface roughness, 26.7.5.2 Envelope Procedure (CHAPTER
as defined by Surface Roughness B, 28 ). Wind loads for the design of the MWFRS for
prevails in the upwind direction for a all low-rise buildings designed using the Envelope
distance greater than 450 m. Procedure of CHAPTER 28 shall be based on the
exposure category resulting in the highest wind
(b) For buildings with a mean roof height loads for any wind direction at the site.
greater than 9 m, Exposure B shall apply
where Surface Roughness B prevails in the 26.7.5.3 Directional Procedure for
upwind direction for a distance greater than Building Appurtenances and Other Structures
780 m or 20 times the height of the (CHAPTER 29 ). Wind loads for the design of
building, whichever is greater. building appurtenances (such as rooftop structures
and equipment) and other structures (such as solid
26.7.4.2 Exposure C: freestanding walls and freestanding signs,
(a) Exposure C shall apply for all cases where chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice frameworks,
Exposures B or D do not apply. and trussed towers) as specified in CHAPTER 29
shall be based on the appropriate exposure for each
26.7.4.3 Exposure D:
wind direction considered.
(a) Exposure D shall apply where the ground
surface roughness, as defined by Surface
𝐶𝑤
𝑛
100 ℎ 2 𝐴𝑖 𝑔𝑅 = √2 𝑙𝑛 (3600 𝑛1 )
= ∑( ) 2 (26-7) 0.577
𝐴𝐵 ℎ𝑖 ℎ (26-13)
𝑖=0 [1 + 0.83 ( 𝑖 ) ] +
𝐷𝑖 √2 𝑙𝑛 (3600 𝑛1 )
26.10.3 Protection of Glazed Openings. Glazed Exception: Other testing methods and/or
openings in Risk Category II, III or IV buildings performance criteria are permitted to be used when
located in hurricane-prone regions shall be approved.
protected as specified in this Section.
26.10.3.2.3 Glazing and impact-protective
26.10.3.1 Wind-borne Debris Regions. systems in buildings and other structures classified
Glazed openings shall be protected in accordance as Risk Category IV in accordance with Section 1.6
with Section 26.10.3.2 in the following locations: shall comply with the “enhanced protection”
requirements of Table 3 of ASTM E1996. Glazing
1. Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high
and impact-protective systems in all other structures
water line where the Ultimate wind speed
shall comply with the “basic protection”
is equal to or greater than 210 km/h (58
requirements of Table 3 of ASTM E1996.
m/s), or
2. In areas where the Ultimate wind speed is User Note: The wind zones that are specified in
equal to or greater than 225 km/h (63 m/s). ASTM E1996 for use in determining the applicable
For Risk Category II buildings and other missile size for the impact test, have to be adjusted
structures and Risk Category III buildings for use with the wind speed maps of SBC 301 and
and other structures, except health care the corresponding wind borne debris regions, see
facilities, the wind-borne debris region commentary of Section 26.10.
shall be based on Figure 26-2 A. 26.10.4 Multiple Classifications. If a building by
For Risk Category III health care facilities and Risk definition complies with both the “open” and
Category IV buildings and other structures, the “partially enclosed” definitions, it shall be
wind-borne debris region shall be based on Figure classified as an “open” building. A building that
26-2 B. Risk Categories shall be determined in does not comply with either the “open” or “partially
accordance with Section 1.6. enclosed” definitions shall be classified as an
Exception: Glazing located over 18 m above the “enclosed” building.
ground and over 9 m above aggregate-surfaced-
roofs, including roofs with gravel or stone ballast, 26.11 —Internal pressure coefficient
located within 450 m of the building shall be 26.11.1 Internal Pressure Coefficients. Internal
permitted to be unprotected. pressure coefficients, (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 ), shall be determined
26.10.3.2 Protection Requirements for from Table 26-3 based on building enclosure
Glazed Openings. classifications determined from Section 26.10 .
Table 26-3: Main wind force resisting system and components and cladding, enclosed,
partially enclosed, and open buildings, walls & roofs, all heights
Enclosure Classification Internal Pressure Coefficient (GCpi)
Open Buildings 0.00
+0.55
Partially Enclosed Buildings
- 0.55
+0.18
Enclosed Buildings
- 0.18
Notes:
1. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the internal surfaces, respectively.
2. Values of (GCpi) shall be used with qz or qh as specified.
3. Two cases shall be considered to determine the critical load requirements for the appropriate condition:
(i) a positive value of (GCpi) applied to all internal surfaces
(ii) a negative value of (GCpi) applied to all internal surfaces
CHAPTER 27 : Directional
procedure for buildings of
all heights CHAPTER 30 :
- Envelope Procedure in Parts 1 and
CHAPTER 31 : 2, or Directional Procedure in Parts
Wind tunnel 3, 4 and 5
CHAPTER 28 : Envelope
procedure for - Building appurtenances (roof
procedure for low rise
any building or overhangs and parapets) in Part 6
buildings
other
structure:
CHAPTER 29 : Directional
MWFRS - C&C
procedure for building
appurtenances (roof
overhangs and parapets)
and other structures
Figure 26-1: Outline of process for determining wind loads. additional outlines and user notes are
provided at the beginning of each chapter for more detailed step-by-step procedures for determining
the wind loads.
Notes:
1.Values are design 3-second gust
wind speeds in (m/s) at 10 m above
ground for Exposure C category.
2.Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3.Islands and coastal areas outside
the last contour shall use the last
wind speed contour of the coastal
area.
4.Mountainous terrain, gorges,
ocean promontories, and special
wind regions shall be examined for
unusual wind conditions.
5.Wind speeds correspond to
approximately a 7% probability of
exceedance in 50 years (Annual
Exceedance Probability = 0.00143,
MRI = 700 Years).
Figure 26-2A: Ultimate wind speeds for Risk category II Buildings and other structures.
Notes:
1.Values are design 3-second gust wind
speeds in (m/s) at 10 m above ground
for Exposure C category.
2.Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3.Islands and coastal areas outside the
last contour shall use the last wind
speed contour of the coastal area.
4.Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean
promontories, and special wind
regions shall be examined for unusual
wind conditions.
5.Wind speeds correspond to
approximately a 3% probability of
exceedance in 50 years (Annual
Exceedance Probability = 0.000588,
MRI = 1700 Years).
Figure 26-2B: Ultimate wind speeds for Risk Category III and IV Buildings and other structures.
Notes:
1.Values are design 3-second gust
wind speeds in (m/s) at 10 m above
ground for Exposure C category.
2.Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3.Islands and coastal areas outside the
last contour shall use the last wind
speed contour of the coastal area.
4.Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean
promontories, and special wind
regions shall be examined for unusual
wind conditions.
5.Wind speeds correspond to
approximately a 15% probability of
exceedance in 50 years (Annual
Exceedance Probability = 0.00333,
MRI = 300 Years).
Figure 26-2C: Ultimate wind speeds for Risk Category I Buildings and other Structures.
Equations:
Kzt = (1+ K1 K2 K3)2
K1 determined from table below
|x|
𝐾2 = (1 − μ𝐿 )
ℎ
𝐾3 = e−γz/𝐿ℎ
27.1.3.1 The provisions of this chapter take Exposure category (Section 26.7 )
into consideration the load magnification effect Topographic factor, 𝐾𝑧𝑡 (Section 26.8)
caused by gusts in resonance with along-wind
vibrations of flexible buildings. Gust-effect factor (Section 26.9 )
27.1.3.2 Buildings not meeting the Enclosure classification (Section 26.10 )
requirements of Section 27.1.2 , or having unusual Internal pressure coefficient, (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 )
shapes or response characteristics shall be designed (Section 26.11 ).
using recognized literature documenting such wind
load effects or shall use the wind tunnel procedure 27.3 —Velocity pressure
specified in CHAPTER 31 . 27.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient.
27.1.4 Shielding. There shall be no reductions in 27.3.1.1 Based on the exposure category
velocity pressure due to apparent shielding afforded determined in Section 26.7.4 , a velocity pressure
by buildings and other structures or terrain features.
exposure coefficient 𝐾𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐾ℎ , as applicable, shall defined as the level of the highest opening in
be determined from Table 27-2. the building that could affect the positive
internal pressure. For positive internal
27.3.1.2 For a site located in a transition pressure evaluation, 𝒒𝒊 may conservatively be
zone between exposure categories that is near to a evaluated at height ℎ (𝑞𝑖 = 𝑞ℎ )
change in ground surface roughness, intermediate
𝑮 = Gust-effect factor, see Section 26.9
values of 𝐾𝑧 or 𝐾ℎ , between those shown in Table
27-2 are permitted provided that they are External pressure coefficient from Figure
determined by a rational analysis method defined in 𝑪𝒑 = 27-1, Figure 27-2, Figure 27-3 and Figure
the recognized literature. 27-4
(𝑮𝑪𝒑𝒊 ) = Internal pressure coefficient from Table 26-3
27.3.2 Velocity Pressure.
27.3.2.1 Velocity pressure, 𝑞𝑧 , evaluated at 27.4.2 𝑞 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑞𝑖 shall be evaluated using exposure
height 𝑧 shall be calculated by the following defined in Section 26.7.4 .
equation: 27.4.3 Pressure shall be applied simultaneously on
2 windward and leeward walls and on roof surfaces
𝑞𝑧 = 0.613 𝐾𝑧 𝐾𝑧𝑡 𝐾𝑑 𝑉 (27-1)
where, as defined in Figure 27-1, Figure 27-2, Figure 27-3
and Figure 27-4.
𝑲𝒅 = Wind directionality factor, see Section 26.6 27.4.4 Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Flexible
𝑲𝒛 = Velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see Buildings. Design wind pressures for the MWFRS
Section 27.3.1 of flexible buildings shall be determined from the
following equation:
𝑲𝒛𝒕 = Topographic factor, see Section 26.8.2
𝑽 = Ultimate wind speed, see Section 26.5
𝑝 = 𝑞𝐺𝑓 𝐶𝑝 – 𝑞𝑖 (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 ) (27-3)
where, 𝑞, 𝑞𝑖 , 𝐶𝑝 , and (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 ) are as defined in
𝒒𝒛 = Velocity pressure calculated using Equation
Section 27.4.1; 𝐺𝑓 (gust-effect factor) is determined
(27-1) at height 𝑧, (N/m2)
in accordance with Section 26.9.5 .
𝒒𝒉 = Velocity pressure calculated using Equation
(27-1) at mean roof height ℎ. 27.4.5 Open Buildings with Monoslope,
Pitched, or Troughed Free Roofs.
27.4.5.1 The net design pressure for the
27.3.2.2 The numerical coefficient 0.613
MWFRS of open buildings with monoslope,
shall be used except where sufficient climatic data
are available to justify the selection of a different pitched, or troughed roofs shall be determined by
the following equation:
value of this coefficient for a design application.
𝑝 = 𝑞ℎ 𝐺 𝐶𝑁 (27-4)
27.4 —Wind loads—Main wind force-
where,
resisting system
27.4.1 Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Rigid 𝑞ℎ = Velocity pressure evaluated at mean
Buildings. Design wind pressures for the MWFRS roof height ℎ using the exposure as
of buildings of all heights shall be determined by defined in Section 26.7.4 that results in
the following equation: the highest wind loads for any wind
direction at the site
𝑝 = 𝑞𝐺𝐶𝑝 – 𝑞𝑖 (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 ) (N/m2) (27-2)
𝐺 = Gust-effect factor from Section 26.9
where, 𝐶𝑁 = Net pressure coefficient determined
𝒒𝒛 for windward walls evaluated at height z from Figure 27-5 through Figure 27-8
𝒒 =
above the ground
27.4.5.2 Net pressure coefficients, 𝐶𝑁 ,
𝒒 for leeward walls, side walls, and roofs,
𝒒 = 𝒉 include contributions from top and bottom surfaces.
evaluated at height h
All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be
𝒒𝒉 for windward walls, side walls, leeward investigated. Plus and minus signs signify pressure
walls, and roofs of enclosed buildings and for acting toward and away from the top surface of the
𝒒𝒊 =
negative internal pressure evaluation in roof, respectively.
partially enclosed buildings
27.4.5.3 For free roofs with an angle of
𝒒𝒊 = 𝒒𝒛 for positive internal pressure evaluation in plane of roof from horizontal 𝜃 less than or equal to
partially enclosed buildings where height z is
Table 27-1: Steps to determine MWFRS wind loads for enclosed, partially enclosed and
open buildings of all heights
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for the applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2
A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3.
➢ Gust Effect Factor, G, see Section 26.9
➢ Enclosure classification, see Section 26.10
➢ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Section 26.11 and Table 26-3
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 27-2
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure qz or qh Equation (27-1)
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient, Cp or CN
➢ Figure 27-1 and Figure 27-2 for walls and flat, gable, hip, monoslope or mansard roofs
➢ Figure 27-3 for domed roofs
➢ Figure 27-4 for arched roofs
➢ Figure 27-5 for monoslope roof, open building
➢ Figure 27-6 for pitched roof, open building
➢ Figure 27-7 for troughed roof, open building
➢ Figure 27-8 for along-ridge/valley wind load case for monoslope, pitched or troughed
roof, open building
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, on each building surface
➢ Equation (27-2) for rigid buildings
➢ Equation (27-3) for flexible buildings
➢ Equation (27-4) for open buildings
Table 27-2
Notes:
1. The velocity exposure coefficient Kz may be determined from the following formula:
2
𝑧 𝛼
2.01 ( ) for 5 m ≤ 𝑧 ≤ 𝑧𝑔
𝑧𝑔
𝐾𝑧 = 2
5 𝛼
2.01 ( ) for 𝑧 < 5 𝑚
{ 𝑧𝑔
Note: z shall not be taken less than 10 m in exposure B.
2. α and zg are tabulated in Table 26-2
3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height z is acceptable.
4. Exposure categories are defined in Section 26.7.
Cp
Rise-to-span
Conditions Windward Center Leeward
ratio, r
quarter half quarter
0 < r < 0.2 -0.9 -0.7- r -0.5
Roof on elevated structure 0.2 ≤ r < 0.3* 1.5r - 0.3 -0.7- r -0.5
0.3 ≤ r ≤ 0.6 2.75r - 0.7 -0.7 - r -0.5
Roof springing from ground level 0 < r ≤ 0.6 1.4r -0.7 - r -0.5
*When the rise-to-span ratio is 0.2 ≤ r ≤ 0.3, alternate coefficients given by 6r - 2.1 shall also be used for the
windward quarter.
Notes:
1. Values listed are for the determination of average loads on main wind force resisting systems.
2. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
3. For wind directed parallel to the axis of the arch, use pressure coefficients from Figure 27-1 and Figure
27-2 with wind directed parallel to ridge.
4. For components and cladding: (1) At roof perimeter, use the external pressure coefficients in Figure
30-2A, B and C with θ based on spring-line slope and (2) for remaining roof areas, use external pressure
coefficients of this table multiplied by 0.87.
Notes:
1. CNW and CNL denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and
leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of θ between 7.5o and 45º, linear interpolation is permitted. For values of θ less than 7.5º, use
load coefficients for 0º.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
5. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
6. Notation:
L : horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, m
h : mean roof height, m
γ : direction of wind, degrees
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
Notes:
1. CNW and CNL denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and
leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of θ between 7.5º and 45º, linear interpolation is permitted. For values of θ less than 7.5º,
use monoslope roof load coefficients.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface,
respectively.
5. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
6. Notation:
L : horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, m
h : mean roof height, m
γ : direction of wind, degrees
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
Notes:
1. CNW and CNL denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and
leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of θ between 7.5º and 45º, linear interpolation is permitted. For values of θ less than 7.5º,
use monoslope roof load coefficients.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface,
respectively.
5. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
6. Notation:
L : horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, m
h : mean roof height, m
γ : direction of wind, degrees
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
Notes:
1. CN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
4. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
5. For monoslope roofs with theta less than 5 degrees, CN values shown apply also for cases where gamma
= 0 degrees and 0.05 less than or equal to h/L less than or equal to 0.25. See Figure 27-5 for other h/L
values.
6. Notation:
L : horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, m
h : mean roof height, m. See Figure 27-5, Figure 27-6 or Figure 27-7 for a graphical depiction of this
dimension.
γ : direction of wind, degrees
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
Case 1. Full design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the
structure, considered separately along each principal axis.
Case 2. Three quarters of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each
principal axis of the structure in conjunction with a torsional moment as shown, considered
separately for each principal axis.
Case 3. Wind loading as defined in Case 1, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified
value.
Case 4. Wind loading as defined in Case 2, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified
value.
Notes:
1. Design wind pressures for windward and leeward faces shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of Sections 27.4.1 and 27.4.4 as applicable for building of all heights.
2. Diagrams show plan views of building.
3. Notation:
PWX, PWY: Windward face design pressure acting in the x, y principal axis, respectively.
PLX, PLY: Leeward face design pressure acting in the x, y principal axis, respectively.
e (eX. eY) : Eccentricity for the x, y principal axis of the structure, respectively.
MT: Torsional moment per unit height acting about a vertical axis of the building.
28.1.2 Conditions. A building whose design wind Topographic factor 𝐾𝑧𝑡 (Section 26.8)
loads are determined in accordance with this section Enclosure classification (Section 26.10 )
shall comply with all of the following conditions:
Internal pressure coefficient (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 )
1. The building is a regular-shaped building (Section 26.11).
or structure as defined in Section 26.2 .
2. The building does not have response 28.3 —Velocity pressure
characteristics making it subject to across 28.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient.
wind loading, vortex shedding, instability
due to galloping or flutter, or it does not 28.3.1.1 Based on the Exposure Category
have a site location for which channeling determined in Section 26.7.4 , a velocity pressure
effects or buffeting in the wake of upwind exposure coefficient 𝐾𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐾ℎ , as applicable, shall
obstructions warrant special consideration. be determined from Table 28-2.
28.1.3 Limitations. The provisions of this chapter 28.3.1.2 For a site located in a transition
take into consideration the load magnification effect zone between exposure categories that is near to a
caused by gusts in resonance with along-wind change in ground surface roughness, intermediate
vibrations of flexible buildings. Buildings not values of 𝐾𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐾ℎ , between those shown in Table
meeting the requirements of Section 28.1.2 , or 28-2 , are permitted, provided that they are
having unusual shapes or response characteristics determined by a rational analysis method defined in
shall be designed using recognized literature the recognized literature.
documenting such wind load effects or shall use the 28.3.2 Velocity Pressure. Velocity pressure, 𝑞𝑧 ,
wind tunnel procedure specified in CHAPTER 31 . evaluated at height 𝑧 shall be calculated by the
28.1.4 Shielding. There shall be no reductions in following equation:
velocity pressure due to apparent shielding afforded 𝑞𝑧 = 0.613𝐾𝑧 𝐾𝑧𝑡 𝐾𝑑 𝑉 2 (28-1)
by buildings and other structures or terrain features.
where,
Part 1: Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Low- 𝑲𝒅 = Wind directionality factor, see Section 26.6
Rise Buildings
𝑲𝒛 = Velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see
Section 28.3.1
𝑲𝒛𝒕 = Topographic factor, see Section 26.8.2 28.4.3.1 The positive external pressure on
the bottom surface of windward roof overhangs
𝑽 = Ultimate wind speed, see Section 26.5.1
shall be determined using 𝐺𝐶𝑝 = 0.7 in
𝒒𝒛 = Velocity pressure calculated using Equation combination with the top surface pressures
(28-1) at height 𝑧, (N/m2) determined using Figure 28-1.
𝒒𝒉 = Velocity pressure calculated using Equation 28.4.4 Minimum Design Wind Loads. The wind
(28-1) at mean roof height h.
load to be used in the design of the MWFRS for an
28.3.2.1 The numerical coefficient 0.613 enclosed or partially enclosed building shall not be
shall be used except where sufficient climatic data less than 0.8 kN/m2 multiplied by the wall area of
are available to justify the selection of a different the building and 0.4 kN/m2 multiplied by the roof
value of this factor for a design application. area of the building projected onto a vertical plane
normal to the assumed wind direction.
28.4 —Wind loads-Main wind-force
resisting system Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Low-Rise
Buildings
28.4.1 Design Wind Pressure for Low-Rise
Buildings. Design wind pressures for the MWFRS 28.5 —General Requirements
of low-rise buildings shall be determined by the 28.5.1 The steps required for the determination of
following equation: MWFRS wind loads on enclosed simple diaphragm
𝑃 = 𝑞ℎ [(𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑓 )– (𝐺𝐶𝑝𝑖 )] (N/m2 ) (28-2) buildings are shown in Table 28-3.
where, 28.5.2 Wind Load Parameters Specified in
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof CHAPTER 26 . The following wind load parameters
𝒒𝒉 =
height h as defined in Section 26.3 are specified in CHAPTER 26 :
𝑮𝑪𝒑𝒇 = external pressure coefficient from Figure 28-1 Ultimate Wind Speed 𝑉 (Section 26.5)
(𝑮𝑪𝒑𝒊 ) = Internal pressure coefficient from Table 26-3 Exposure category (Section 26.7 )
4. The building is a regular-shaped building 28.6.3.2 For the horizontal pressures (Zones
or structure as defined in Section 26.2 . A, B, C, D), 𝑝𝑠 is the combination of the windward
5. The building is not classified as a flexible and leeward net pressures.
building as defined in Section 26.2 . 28.6.3.3 𝑝𝑠 shall be determined by the
6. The building does not have response following equation:
characteristics making it subject to across
𝑝𝑠 = 𝜆 𝐾𝑧𝑡 𝑝𝑠10 (28-4)
wind loading, vortex shedding, instability
due to galloping or flutter; and it does not where,
have a site location for which channeling
effects or buffeting in the wake of upwind 𝜆 = Adjustment factor for building height and
obstructions warrant special consideration. exposure from Figure 28-2
7. The building has an approximately 𝐾𝑧𝑡 = Topographic factor as defined in Section
symmetrical cross-section in each 26.8 evaluated at mean roof height, h
direction with either a flat roof or a gable
𝑝𝑠10 = Simplified design wind pressure for
or hip roof with 𝜃 ≤ 45°. Exposure B, at h = 10 m from Figure 28-2
8. The building is exempted from torsional
28.6.4 Minimum Design Wind Loads. The load
load cases as indicated in Note 5 of Figure
effects of the design wind pressures from Section
28-1 , or the torsional load cases defined in
28.6.3 shall not be less than a minimum load defined
Note 5 do not control the design of any of
by assuming the pressures, 𝑝𝑠 , for zones A and C
the MWFRS of the building.
equal to +0.8 kN/m2, Zones B and D equal to +0.4
28.6.3 Design Wind Loads. kN/m2, while assuming 𝑝𝑠 for Zones E, F, G, and H
28.6.3.1 Simplified design wind pressures, are equal to 0 kN/m2.
𝑝𝑠 , for the MWFRS of low-rise simple diaphragm
buildings represent the net pressures (sum of
internal and external) to be applied to the horizontal
and vertical projections of building surfaces as
shown in Figure 28-2.
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Enclosure classification, see Section 26.10
➢ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Section 26.11 and Table 26-3
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 28-2
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qz or qh, Equation (28-1)
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient, (GCp), using Figure 28-1 for flat and gable roofs.
Step7: Calculate wind pressure, p, from Equation (28-2)
Table 28-2
Table 28-3: Steps to determine wind loads on MWFRS simple diaphragm low-rise
buildings
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
Step 4: Enter figure to determine wind pressures for h = 10 m., ps10, see Figure 28-2
Step 5: Enter figure to determine adjustment for building height and exposure, λ, see Figure 28-2.
Step 6: Determine adjusted wind pressures, ps, see Equation (28-4)
Notes:
1. Pressures shown are applied to the horizontal and vertical projections, for exposure B, at h= 10 m.
Adjust to other exposures and heights with adjustment factor λ.
2. The load patterns shown shall be applied to each corner of the building in turn as the reference corner.
(See Figure 28-1)
3. For Case B use θ = 0°.
4. Load cases 1 and 2 must be checked for 25° < θ ≤ 45°. Load case 2 at 25° is provided only for
interpolation between 25° and 30°.
5. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the projected surfaces,
respectively.
6. For roof slopes other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
7. The total horizontal load shall not be less than that determined by assuming p S = 0 in zones B & D.
8. Where zone E or G falls on a roof overhang on the windward side of the building, use E OH and GOH
for the pressure on the horizontal projection of the overhang. Overhangs on the leeward and side
edges shall have the basic zone pressure applied.
9. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4%
of least horizontal dimension or 1 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for roof angles <10°.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
10. For Load Case A, the roof pressure the roof pressure coefficient (GCpf), when negative in Zone 2 and
2E, shall be applied in Zone 2/2E for a distance from the edge of roof equal to 0.5 times the
horizontal dimension of the building measured perpendicular to the ridge line or 2.5 times the eave
height at the windward wall, whichever is less; the remainder of Zone 2/2E extending to the ridge
line shall use the pressure coefficient (GCpf) for Zone 3/3E.
Load
Case
Roof Angle
Wind Speed Horizontal Pressurs Vertical Pressures Overhangs
(degrees)
(km/h) A B C D E F G H EOH GOH
0 to 5 1 0.92 -0.48 0.61 -0.28 -1.11 -0.63 -0.77 -0.48 -1.55 -1.21
10 1 1.03 -0.43 0.69 -0.25 -1.11 -0.68 -0.77 -0.52 -1.55 -1.21
15 1 1.15 -0.38 0.77 -0.22 -1.11 -0.72 -0.77 -0.55 -1.55 -1.21
20 1 1.27 -0.34 0.85 -0.19 -1.11 -0.77 -0.77 -0.58 -1.55 -1.21
177
25 1 1.15 0.19 0.83 0.19 -0.51 -0.70 -0.37 -0.56 -0.95 -0.81
2 ... ... ... ... -0.20 -0.38 -0.05 -0.24 ... ...
30 to 45 1 1.03 0.71 0.82 0.57 0.08 -0.63 0.03 -0.54 -0.36 -0.42
2 1.03 0.71 0.82 0.57 0.40 -0.31 0.34 -0.22 -0.36 -0.42
0 to 5 1 1.01 -0.52 0.67 -0.31 -1.21 -0.68 -0.84 -0.53 -1.69 -1.32
10 1 1.14 -0.47 0.75 -0.27 -1.21 -0.74 -0.84 -0.57 -1.69 -1.32
15 1 1.26 -0.42 0.84 -0.24 -1.21 -0.79 -0.84 -0.60 -1.69 -1.32
20 1 1.39 -0.37 0.93 -0.20 -1.21 -0.84 -0.84 -0.64 -1.69 -1.32
185
25 1 1.26 0.20 0.91 0.21 -0.56 -0.76 -0.41 -0.61 -1.04 -0.89
2 … … … … -0.21 -0.42 -0.06 -0.26 … …
30 to 45 1 1.13 0.77 0.90 0.62 0.09 -0.68 0.03 -0.59 -0.40 -0.46
2 1.13 0.77 0.90 0.62 0.44 -0.34 0.38 -0.24 -0.40 -0.46
0 to 5 1 1.09 -0.57 0.72 -0.34 -1.31 -0.75 -0.91 -0.58 -1.84 -1.44
10 1 1.24 -0.51 0.82 -0.30 -1.31 -0.80 -0.91 -0.62 -1.84 -1.44
15 1 1.37 -0.46 0.91 -0.26 -1.31 -0.86 -0.91 -0.66 -1.84 -1.44
20 1 1.51 -0.40 1.01 -0.22 -1.31 -0.91 -0.91 -0.69 -1.84 -1.44
193
25 1 1.37 0.22 0.99 0.23 -0.61 -0.83 -0.44 -0.67 -1.14 -0.97
2 ... ... ... ... -0.23 -0.45 -0.06 -0.29 ... ...
30 to 45 1 1.23 0.84 0.98 0.67 0.10 -0.75 0.03 -0.64 -0.43 -0.49
2 1.23 0.84 0.98 0.67 0.47 -0.37 0.41 -0.26 -0.43 -0.49
0 to 5 1 1.28 -0.67 0.85 -0.39 -1.54 -0.88 -1.07 -0.68 -2.16 -1.69
10 1 1.45 -0.60 0.96 -0.35 -1.54 -0.94 -1.07 -0.72 -2.16 -1.69
15 1 1.61 -0.54 1.07 -0.31 -1.54 -1.01 -1.07 -0.77 -2.16 -1.69
20 1 1.78 -0.47 1.18 -0.26 -1.54 -1.07 -1.07 -0.81 -2.16 -1.69
209
25 1 1.61 0.26 1.16 0.26 -0.71 -0.98 -0.52 -0.79 -1.33 -1.14
2 ... ... ... ... -0.27 -0.53 -0.07 -0.34 ... ...
30 to 45 1 1.44 0.99 1.15 0.79 0.11 -0.88 0.04 -0.75 -0.51 -0.58
2 1.44 0.99 1.15 0.79 0.56 -0.43 0.48 -0.31 -0.51 -0.58
0 to 5 1 1.49 -0.77 0.99 -0.46 -1.79 -1.02 -1.25 -0.79 -2.51 -1.96
10 1 1.68 -0.69 1.12 -0.41 -1.79 -1.09 -1.25 -0.84 -2.51 -1.96
15 1 1.87 -0.62 1.25 -0.35 -1.79 -11.69 -1.25 -0.89 -2.51 -1.96
20 1 2.06 -0.55 1.37 -0.30 -1.79 -1.25 -1.25 -0.94 -2.51 -1.96
225
25 1 1.87 0.30 1.35 0.31 -0.83 -1.13 -0.60 -0.91 -1.55 -1.32
2 ... ... ... ... -0.32 -0.61 -0.09 -0.39 ... ...
30 to 45 1 1.68 1.14 1.33 0.91 0.13 -1.02 0.04 -0.87 -0.59 -0.67
2 1.68 1.14 1.33 0.91 0.64 -0.50 0.56 -0.36 -0.59 -0.67
0 to 5 1 1.71 -0.89 1.14 -0.53 -2.05 -1.17 -1.43 -0.91 -2.87 -2.25
10 1 1.93 -0.80 1.28 -0.46 -2.05 -1.25 -1.43 -0.96 -2.87 -2.25
15 1 2.15 -0.71 1.43 -0.41 -2.05 -1.34 -1.43 -1.03 -2.87 -2.25
20 1 2.37 -0.62 1.58 -0.34 -2.05 -1.43 -1.43 -1.08 -2.87 -2.25
241
25 1 2.15 0.34 1.55 0.35 -0.95 -1.30 -0.69 -1.04 -1.77 -1.51
2 ... ... ... ... -0.36 -0.70 -0.10 -0.45 ... ...
30 to 45 1 1.92 1.31 1.53 1.05 0.15 -1.17 0.05 -1.00 -0.68 -0.77
2 1.92 1.31 1.53 1.05 0.74 -0.57 0.64 -0.41 -0.68 -0.77
0 to 5 1 1.94 -1.01 1.29 -0.60 -2.34 -1.33 -1.63 -1.03 -3.27 -2.56
10 1 2.19 -0.91 1.46 -0.53 -2.34 -1.43 -1.63 -1.10 -3.27 -2.56
15 1 2.44 -0.81 1.63 -0.46 -2.34 -1.53 -1.63 -1.16 -3.27 -2.56
20 1 2.69 -0.71 1.80 -0.39 -2.34 -1.63 -1.63 -1.24 -3.27 -2.56
25 1 2.44 0.39 1.77 0.40 -1.08 -1.48 -0.79 -1.19 -2.02 -1.72
258
2 ... ... ... ... -4.12 -0.80 -0.11 -0.51 ... ...
30 to 45 1 2.19 1.49 1.74 1.20 0.17 -1.33 0.06 -1.14 -0.77 -0.88
2 2.19 1.49 1.74 1.20 0.84 -0.66 0.73 -0.47 -0.77 -0.88
0 to 5 1 1.94 -1.01 1.29 -0.60 -2.34 -1.33 -1.63 -1.03 -3.27 -2.56
10 1 2.19 -0.91 1.46 -0.53 -2.34 -1.43 -1.63 -1.10 -3.27 -2.56
Load
Case
Roof Angle
Wind Speed Horizontal Pressurs Vertical Pressures Overhangs
(degrees)
(km/h) A B C D E F G H EOH GOH
0 to 5 1 2.46 -1.28 1.63 -0.76 -2.96 -1.68 -2.06 -1.30 -4.14 -3.24
10 1 2.78 -1.15 1.84 -0.67 -2.96 -1.81 -2.06 -1.39 -4.14 -3.24
15 1 3.09 -1.03 2.06 -0.58 -2.96 -1.93 -2.06 -1.48 -4.14 -3.24
20 1 3.41 -0.90 2.27 -0.50 -2.96 -2.06 -2.06 -1.56 -4.14 -3.24
290
25 1 3.09 0.50 2.24 0.51 -1.37 -1.87 -0.99 -1.50 -2.55 -2.17
2 ... ... ... ... -0.52 -1.02 -0.14 -0.65 ... ...
30 to 45 1 2.77 1.89 2.20 1.51 0.21 -1.68 0.07 -1.44 -0.97 -1.11
2 2.77 1.89 2.20 1.51 1.06 -0.83 0.92 -0.59 -0.97 -1.11
0 to 5 1 3.04 -1.58 2.02 -0.93 -3.65 -2.07 -2.54 -1.60 -5.11 -4.00
10 1 3.42 -1.42 2.28 -0.83 -3.65 -2.23 -2.54 -1.71 -5.11 -4.00
15 1 3.82 -1.26 2.54 -0.72 -3.65 -2.39 -2.54 -1.82 -5.11 -4.00
20 1 4.21 -1.11 2.80 -0.61 -3.65 -2.54 -2.54 -1.93 -5.11 -4.00
322
25 1 3.81 0.61 2.76 0.63 -1.70 -2.31 -1.23 -1.85 -3.16 -2.69
2 … … … … -0.64 -1.25 -0.18 -0.80 … …
30 to 45 1 3.42 2.34 2.72 1.87 2.63 -2.07 0.09 -1.78 -1.20 -1.37
2 3.42 2.34 2.72 1.87 1.31 -1.02 1.14 -0.73 -1.20 -1.37
The final value used in the design shall not be less than that required by Section 28.6.4
29.1 —Scope
29.1.1 Structure Types.
29.1.1.1 This chapter applies to the determination of wind loads on building appurtenances (such as
rooftop structures and rooftop equipment) and other structures of all heights (such as solid freestanding walls
and freestanding solid signs, chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice frameworks, and trussed towers) using the
Directional Procedure.
29.1.1.2 The steps required for the determination of wind loads on building appurtenances and other
structures are shown in
29.1.4 Shielding. There shall be no reductions in
29.1.1.3 Table 29-1: Steps to determine
velocity pressure due to apparent shielding afforded
wind loads on MWFRS rooftop equipment and
by buildings and other structures or terrain features.
other structures
29.2 —General requirements
29.1.1.4 .
29.2.1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in
29.1.2 Conditions. A structure whose design CHAPTER 26 . The following wind load parameters
wind loads are determined in accordance with this shall be determined in accordance with CHAPTER
section shall comply with all of the following 26 :
conditions:
Ultimate Wind Speed 𝑉 (Section 26.5)
1. The structure is a regular-shaped structure
as defined in Section 26.2 . Wind directionality Factor 𝐾𝑑 (Section
26.6 )
2. The structure does not have response
characteristics making it subject to across- Exposure category (Section 26.7 )
wind loading, vortex shedding, or Topographic factor 𝐾𝑧𝑡 (Section 26.8)
instability due to galloping or flutter; or it
does not have a site location for which Enclosure classification (Section 26.10 )
channeling effects or buffeting in the wake 29.3 —Velocity pressure
of upwind obstructions warrant special
consideration. 29.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient.
29.1.3 Limitations. 29.3.1.1 Based on the exposure category
determined in Section 26.7.4 , a velocity pressure
29.1.3.1 The provisions of this chapter take exposure coefficient 𝐾𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐾ℎ , as applicable, shall
into consideration the load magnification effect be determined from Table 29-2.
caused by gusts in resonance with along-wind
vibrations of flexible structures. 29.3.1.2 For a site located in a transition
zone between exposure categories that is near to a
29.1.3.2 Structures not meeting the change in ground surface roughness, intermediate
requirements of Section 29.1.2 , or having unusual values of 𝐾𝑧 𝑜𝑟 𝐾ℎ , between those shown in Table
shapes or response characteristics, shall be designed 29-2 , are permitted, provided that they are
using recognized literature documenting such wind determined by a rational analysis method defined in
load effects or shall use the Wind Tunnel Procedure the recognized literature.
specified in CHAPTER 31 .
29.3.2 Velocity Pressure.
29.3.2.1 Velocity pressure, 𝑞𝑧 , evaluated at the sign is at least 1.0 m in from free edges of the
height 𝑧 shall be calculated by the following wall, i.e., side and top edges and bottom edges of
equation: elevated walls.
𝑞𝑧 = 0.613 𝐾𝑧 𝐾𝑧𝑡 𝐾𝑑 𝑉 2 (N/m2) (29-1) 29.5 —Design wind loads—Other
where, structures
𝑲𝒅 = Wind directionality factor, see Section 26.6
29.5.1 The design wind force for other structures
𝑲𝒛 = Velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see (chimneys, tanks, rooftop equipment for ℎ >
Section 29.3.1 18 𝑚, and similar structures, open signs, lattice
𝑲𝒛 𝒕 = Topographic factor, see Section 26.8.2 frameworks, and trussed towers) shall be
determined by the following equation:
𝑽 = Ultimate wind speed, see Section 26.5.1
𝐹 = 𝑞𝑧 𝐺 𝐶𝑓 𝐴𝑓 (N) (29-3)
𝒒𝒛 = Velocity pressure calculated using Equation
(29-1) at height 𝑧, (N/m2) where,
𝑞𝑧 = Velocity pressure evaluated at height z as
𝒒𝒉 = Velocity pressure calculated using Equation defined in Section 29.3, of the centroid of area
(29-1) at mean roof height h. 𝐴𝑓
29.3.2.2 The numerical coefficient 0.613 𝐺 = Gust-effect factor from Section 26.9
shall be used except where sufficient climatic data
𝐶𝑓 = Force from Figure 29-2 through Figure 29-4
are available to justify the selection of a different
value of this factor for a design application. 𝐴𝑓 = Projected area normal to the wind except
where 𝐶𝑓 is specified for the actual surface
29.4 —Design wind loads—Solid area, in m2
freestanding walls and solid
signs 29.5.2 Rooftop Structures and Equipment for
Buildings with h ≤ 18m.
29.4.1 Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid
Freestanding Signs. The design wind force for 29.5.2.1 The lateral force 𝐹ℎ on rooftop
solid freestanding walls and solid freestanding signs structures and equipment located on buildings with
shall be determined by the following formula: a mean roof height ℎ ≤ 18 𝑚, shall be determined
from Equation (29-4).
𝐹 = 𝑞ℎ 𝐺 𝐶𝑓 𝐴𝑠 (N) (29-2)
where, 𝐹ℎ = 𝑞ℎ (𝐺𝐶𝑟 ) 𝐴𝑓 (N) (29-4)
𝒒𝒉 = The velocity pressure evaluated at height h where,
(defined in Figure 29-1) as determined in (𝐺𝐶𝑟 ) = 1.9 for rooftop structures and
accordance with Section 29.3.2 equipment with 𝐴𝑓 less than (0.1𝐵ℎ).
𝑮 = Gust-effect factor from Section 26.9 (𝐺𝐶𝑟 ) shall be permitted to be reduced
linearly from 1.9 to 1.0 as the value of
𝑪𝒇 = Net force coefficient from Figure 29-1 𝐴𝑓 is increased from (0.1𝐵ℎ) to (Bh)
𝑨𝒔 = The gross area of the solid freestanding 𝑞ℎ = Velocity pressure evaluated at mean
wall or freestanding solid sign, in m2 roof height of the building
Table 29-1: Steps to determine wind loads on MWFRS rooftop equipment and other
structures
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, Figure 26-2 A, B
or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd, see Section 26.2 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Gust Effect Factor, G, see Section 26.9
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 29-2
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure qz or qh, see Equation (29-1)
Step 6: Determine force coefficient, Cf :
➢ Solid freestanding signs or solid freestanding walls, Figure 29-1
➢ Chimneys, tanks, rooftop equipment Figure 29-2
➢ Open signs, lattice frameworks Figure 29-3
➢ Trussed towers Figure 29-4
Step 7: Calculate wind force, F:
➢ Equation (29-2) for signs and walls
➢ Equation (29-4) and Equation (29-5) for rooftop structures and equipment.
➢ Equation (29-3) for other structures
Table 29-2
Cf, CASE C
Region
Region Aspect Ratio,
(horizontal Aspect Ratio, B/s
(horizontal B/s
distance
distance from
from
windward
windward 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 ≥ 45
edge)
edge)
0 to s 2.25 2.60 2.90 3.10* 3.30* 3.40* 3.55* 3.65* 3.75* 0 to s 4.00* 4.30*
s to 2s 1.50 1.70 1.90 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.35 2.45 s to 2s 2.60 2.55
2s to 3s 1.15 1.30 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.85 2s to 3s 2.00 1.95
3s to 10s 1.10 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.00 0.95 3s to 4s 1.50 1.85
Lr Reduction
*Values shall be multiplied 4s to 5s 1.35 1.85
Factor
by the following reduction 0.3 0.9 5s to 10s 0.90 1.10
factor when a return corner 1.0 0.75 >10s 0.55 0.55
is present: ≥2 0.60
Notes:
1. The term "signs" in notes below also applies to "freestanding walls".
2. Signs with openings comprising less than 30% of the gross area are classified as solid signs. Force coefficients for solid signs with
openings shall be permitted to be multiplied by the reduction factor (1 - (1 - ε)1.5).
3. To allow for both normal and oblique wind directions, the following cases shall be considered:
For s/h < 1:
CASE A: resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign through the geometric center.
CASE B: resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign at a distance from the geometric center toward the windward
edge equal to 0.2 times the average width of the sign.
For B/s ≥ 2, CASE C must also be considered:
CASE C: resultant forces act normal to the face of the sign through the geometric centers of each region.
For s/h = 1:
The same cases as above except that the vertical locations of the resultant forces occur at a distance above the geometric
center equal to 0.05 times the average height of the sign.
4. For CASE C where s/h > 0.8, force coefficients shall be multiplied by the reduction factor (1.8 - s/h).
5. Linear interpolation is permitted for values of s/h, B/s and Lr/s other than shown.
6. Notation:
B: horizontal dimension of sign, in meters;
h: height of the sign, in meters;
s: vertical dimension of the sign, in meters;
ε: ratio of solid area to gross area;
Lr: horizontal dimension of return corner, in meters
h/D
Cross-Section Type of Surface
1 7 25
Square (wind normal to face) All 1.3 1.4 2.0
Square (wind along diagonal) All 1.0 1.1 1.5
Hexagonal or octagonal All 1.0 1.2 1.4
Round Moderately smooth 0.5 0.6 0.7
(D√𝒒𝒛 > 5.3, D in m, qz in N/m2) Rough (D'/D = 0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9
Round Very rough (D'/D = 0.08) 0.8 1.0 1.2
(D√𝒒𝒛 ≤ 5.3, D in m, qz in N/m2) All 0.7 0.8 1.2
Notes:
1. The design wind force shall be calculated based on the area of the structure projected on a plane normal to the wind
direction. The force shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
2. Linear interpolation is permitted for h/D values other than shown.
3. Notation:
D: diameter of circular cross-section and least horizontal dimension of square, hexagonal or octagonal cross-
sections at elevation under consideration, in meters;
D': depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers, in meters; and
h: height of structure, in meters; and
qz: velocity pressure evaluated at height z above ground, in N/m2.
4. For rooftop equipment on buildings with a mean roof height of h ≤ 18 m., use Section 29.5.2.
Force coefficients, 𝑪𝒇
Figure 29-3
Open signs & lattice frameworks
Notes:
1. Signs with openings comprising 30% or more of the gross area are classified as open signs.
2. The calculation of the design wind forces shall be based on the area of all exposed members and elements projected
on a plane normal to the wind direction. Forces shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
3. The area Af consistent with these force coefficients is the solid area projected normal to the wind direction.
4. Notation:
∈: ratio of solid area to gross area;
D: diameter of a typical round member, in meters;
qz: velocity pressure evaluated at height z above ground in N/m2.
Notes:
1. For all wind directions considered, the area Af consistent with the specified force coefficients shall be the solid area
of a tower face projected on the plane of that face for the tower segment under consideration.
2. The specified force coefficients are for towers with structural angles or similar flatsided members.
3. For towers containing rounded members, it is acceptable to multiply the specified force coefficients by the following
factor when determining wind forces on such members:
0.51 ∈2 + 0.57, but not > 1.0
4. Wind forces shall be applied in the directions resulting in maximum member forces and reactions. For towers with
square cross-sections, wind forces shall be multiplied by the following factor when the wind is directed along a tower
diagonal:
1 + 0.75 ∈, but not > 1.2
5. Wind forces on tower appurtenances such as ladders, conduits, lights, elevators, etc., shall be calculated using
appropriate force coefficients for these elements.
6. Notation:
∈: ratio of solid area to gross area of one tower face for the segment under consideration.
30.6.3.2 𝑞 and 𝑞𝑖 shall be evaluated using 30.7.2.2.1 Design wind pressures on parapet
exposure defined in Section 26.7.4 . surfaces shall be based on wind pressures for the
applicable edge and corner zones in which the
Exception: In buildings with a mean roof height ℎ
parapet is located, as shown in Table 30-6, modified
greater than 18 m and less than 27 m, (𝐺𝐶𝑝 ) values
based on the following two load cases:
from Figure 30-1 through Figure 30-6 shall be
permitted to be used if the height to width ratio is (a) Load Case A shall consist of applying the
one or less. applicable positive wall pressure from the
table to the front surface of the parapet
while applying the applicable negative
30.7 —Building types-Part 4: edge or corner zone roof pressure from the
Buildings with h ≤ 50 m (simplified) table to the back surface.
30.7.1 The provisions of Section 30.7 are (b) Load Case B shall consist of applying the
applicable to an enclosed building having a mean applicable positive wall pressure from the
roof height ℎ ≤ 50 𝑚 with a flat roof, gable roof, table to the back of the parapet surface and
hip roof, monoslope roof, or mansard roof. The applying the applicable negative wall
steps required for the determination of wind loads pressure from the table to the front surface.
on components and cladding for these building 30.7.2.2.2 Pressures in Table 30-6 are based
types are shown in Table 30-5. on an effective wind area of 1 m2. Reduction in
30.7.2 Wind Loads—Components and wind pressure for larger effective wind area may be
Cladding taken based on the reduction factor shown in the
table.
30.7.2.1 Wall and Roof Surfaces.
30.7.2.2.3 Pressures are to be applied to the
30.7.2.1.1 Design wind pressures on the parapet in accordance with Figure 30-10. The height
designated zones of walls and roofs surfaces shall h to be used with Figure 30-10 to determine the
be determined from Table 30-6 based on the pressures shall be the height to the top of the
applicable ultimate wind speed V, mean roof height parapet. Determine final pressure from Equation
ℎ, and roof slope 𝜃. (30-5).
30.7.2.1.2 Tabulated pressures shall be
multiplied by the exposure adjustment factor (EAF)
shown in the table if exposure is different than
Exposure C. 30.7.2.3 Roof Overhangs.
30.7.2.1.3 Pressures in Table 30-6 are based 30.7.2.3.1 Design wind pressures on roof
on an effective wind area of 1 m2. Reductions in overhangs shall be based on wind pressures shown
wind pressure for larger effective wind areas may for the applicable zones in Table 30-6 modified as
be taken based on the reduction multipliers (RF) described herein.
shown in the table. Pressures are to be applied over
30.7.2.3.2 For Zones 1 and 2, a multiplier of
the entire zone shown in the figures.
1.0 shall be used on pressures shown in Table 30-6.
30.7.2.1.4 Final design wind pressure shall be
30.7.2.3.3 For Zone 3, a multiplier of 1.15
determined from the following equation:
shall be used on pressures shown in Table 30-6.
𝑝 = 𝑝𝑡𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 (𝐸𝐴𝐹)(𝑅𝐹)𝐾𝑧𝑡 (30-5)
30.7.2.3.4 Pressures in Table 30-6 are based
where, on an effective wind area of 1 m2. Reductions in
𝑹𝑭 = effective area reduction factor from wind pressure for larger effective wind areas may
Table 30-6 be taken based on the reduction multiplier shown in
Table 30-6 . Pressures on roof overhangs include the
𝑬𝑨𝑭 = Exposure adjustment factor from Table
pressure from the top and bottom surface of
30-6
overhang. Pressures on the underside of the
𝑲𝒛𝒕 = topographic factor as defined in Section overhangs are equal to the adjacent wall pressures.
26.8 Refer to the overhang drawing shown in Figure
30-11 . Determine final pressure from Equation
30.7.2.2 Parapets.
(30-5).
Table 30-1
Notes:
1. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz may be determined from the following
formula:
2/𝛼
𝑧
2.01 ( ) for 5 m ≤ 𝑧 ≤ 𝑧𝑔
𝑧𝑔
𝐾𝑧 = 2/𝛼
5
2.01 ( ) for 𝑧 < 5 m
{ 𝑧𝑔
Note: z shall not be taken less than 10 m in exposure B.
2. α and zg are tabulated in Table 26-2.
3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height z is acceptable.
4. Exposure categories are defined in Section 26.7.
Table 30-2: Steps to determine C&C wind loads enclosed and partially enclosed low-
rise buildings
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Enclosure classification, see Section 26.10
➢ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Section 26.11 and Table 26-3
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 30-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, Equation (30-1)
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient, (GCp)
➢ Walls, see Figure 30-1
➢ Flat, gable and hip roofs, see Figure 30-2A to Figure 30-2C
➢ Stepped roofs, see Figure 30-3
➢ Multispan gable roofs, see Figure 30-4
➢ Monoslope roofs, see Figure 30-5A and Figure 30-5B
➢ Sawtooth roofs, see Figure 30-6
➢ Domed roofs of all heights, see Figure 30-7 footnote 4
➢ Arched roofs, see footnote 4 of Figure 27-3
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation (30-2)
Table 30-3: Steps to determine C&C wind loads enclosed low-rise buildings (simplified
method)
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category see Figure 26-2 A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
Step 4: Enter figure to determine wind pressures at h = 10 m, pnet10, see Figure 30-8
Step 5: Enter figure to determine adjustment for building height and exposure, λ, Figure 30-8
Step 6: Determine adjusted wind pressures, pnet, see Equation (30-3).
Table 30-4: Steps to determine C&C wind loads enclosed or partially enclosed building
with h > 18 m
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Enclosure classification, see Section 26.10
➢ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Section 26.11 and Table 26-3
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 30-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, Equation (30-1)
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient, (GCp)
➢ Walls and flat roofs (θ < 10 deg), see Figure 30-9
➢ Gable and hip roofs, see Figure 30-2 per Note 6 of Figure 30-9
➢ Arched roofs, see Figure 27-3, footnote 4
➢ Domed roofs, see Figure 30-7.
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation (30-4)
Table 30-5: Steps to determine C&C wind loads enclosed building with h ≤ 50 m
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
Step 4: Enter Table 30-6 to determine pressure on walls and roof, p, using Equation (30-5). Roof types
are:
➢ Flat roof (θ < 10 deg)
➢ Gable roof
➢ Hip roof
➢ Monoslope roof
➢ Mansard roof
Step 5: Determine topographic factors, Kzt, and apply factor to pressures determined from tables (if
applicable), see Section 26.8 .
Notation:
h = mean roof height (m)
V = Ultimate wind speed (km/h)
Reduction Factors
Effective Wind Area
Roof Form Sign Pressure Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5
Flat Minus D D D C E
Flat Plus NA NA NA D D
Gable, Mansard Minus B C C C E
Gable, Mansard Plus B B B D D
Hip Minus B C C C E
Hip Plus B B B D D
Monoslope Plus A B D C E
Monoslope Minus C C C D D
Overhangs All A A B NA NA
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A,
B or C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Gust effect factor, G, see Section 26.9
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 30-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, Equation (30-1)
Step 6: Determine net pressure coefficients, CN
➢ Monosloped roof, see Figure 30-12
➢ Pitched roof, see Figure 30-13
➢ Troughed roof, see Figure 30-14
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation (30-6)
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or
C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Enclosure classification, see Section 26.10
➢ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Section 26.11 and Table 26-3
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kh, at top of the parapet see Table
30-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qp, at the top of the parapet using Equation (30-1)
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient for wall and roof surfaces adjacent to
parapet, (GCp)
➢ Walls with h ≤ 18 m., see Figure 30-1
➢ Flat, gable and hip roofs, see Figure 30-2A to Figure 30-2C
➢ Stepped roofs, see Figure 30-3
➢ Multispan gable roofs, see Figure 30-4
➢ Monoslope roofs, see Figure 30-5A and Figure 30-5B
➢ Sawtooth roofs, see Figure 30-6
➢ Domed roofs of all heights, see Figure 30-7
➢ Walls and flat roofs with h > 18 m., see Figure 30-9
➢ Arched roofs, see footnote 4 of Figure 27-3
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, using Equation (30-7) on windward and leeward
face of parapet, considering two load cases (Case A and Case B) as shown in Figure
30-15 .
Table 1-2: Risk category of buildings and other structures for flood, wind and earthquake
loads
Step 2: Determine the ultimate wind speed, V, for applicable risk category, see Figure 26-2 A, B or
C
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
➢ Wind directionality factor, Kd , see Section 26.6 and Table 26-1
➢ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section 26.7
➢ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section 26.8 and Figure 26-3
➢ Enclosure classification, see Section 26.10
➢ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see Section 26.11 and Table 26-3
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kh, see Table 30-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, at mean roof height h using Equation (30-1)
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient, (GCp), using Figure 30-2A through C for flat,
gabled and hip roofs.
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, using Equation (30-8). Refer to Figure 30-16.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Values of GCp for walls shall be reduced by 10% when θ ≤ 10°.
6. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either
4% of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. If a parapet equal to or higher than 1.0 m is provided around the perimeter of the roof with θ ≤ 7°,
the negative values of GCp in Zone 3 shall be equal to those for Zone 2 and positive values of GCp in
Zones 2 and 3 shall be set equal to those for wall Zones 4 and 5 respectively in Figure 30-1.
6. Values of GCp for roof overhangs include pressure contributions from both upper and lower
surfaces.
7. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either
4% of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Values of GCp for roof overhangs include pressure contributions from both upper and lower
surfaces.
6. For hip roofs with 7° < θ ≤ 27°, edge/ridge strips and pressure coefficients for ridges of gabled roofs
shall apply on each hip.
7. For hip roofs with θ ≤ 25°, Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
8. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either
4% of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Values of GCp for roof overhangs include pressure contributions from both upper and lower surfaces.
6. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4%
of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
h1 ≥ 3m
b = 1.5h1
b < 30m
hi / h = 0.3 to 0.7
Wi /W = 0.25 to 0.75
Notes:
1. On the lower level of flat, stepped roofs shown in Figure 30-3, the zone designations and
pressure coefficients shown in Figure 30-2A shall apply, except that at the roof-upper wall
intersection(s), Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2 and Zone 2 shall be treated as Zone 1.
Positive values of GCp equal to those for walls in Figure 30-1 shall apply on the cross-
hatched areas shown in Figure 30-3.
2. Notation:
b: 1.5h1 in Figure 30-3, but not greater than 30 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters.
hi: h1 or h2 in Figure 30-3; h = h1 + h2; h1 ≥ 3.0 m; hi/h = 0.3 to 0.7.
W: Building width in Figure 30-3.
Wi: W1 or W2 or W3 in Figure 30-3. W = W1 + W2 or W1 + W2 + W3; Wi/W = 0.25 to 0.75.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. For θ ≤ 10°, values of GCp from Figure 30-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension of a single-span module or 0.4h, whichever is smaller,
but not less than either 4 percent of least horizontal dimension of a single-span module or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
W: Building module width, in meters.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. For θ ≤ 3°, values of GCp from Figure 30-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4
percent of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
W: Building width, in meters.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4
percent of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters.
W: Building width, in meters.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. For θ ≤ 10°, values of GCp from Figure 30-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4
percent of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
W: Building module width, in meters.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Notes:
1. Values denote GCp to be used with q(hD+f) where hD + f is the height at the top of the dome.
2. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
3. Each component shall be designed for the maximum positive and negative pressures.
4. Values apply to 0 ≤ hD /D ≤ 0.5, 0.2 ≤ f /D ≤ 0.5.
5. θ = 0 degrees on dome springline, θ = 90 degrees at dome center top point. f is measured from springline to
top.
Notes:
1. Pressures shown are applied normal to the surface, for exposure B, at h=10 m. Adjust to other
conditions using Equation (30-3).
2. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
3. For hip roofs with θ ≤ 25°, Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
4. For effective wind areas between those given, value may be interpolated, otherwise use the value
associated with the lower effective wind area.
5. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4%
of least horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for roof angles <10°.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
2 0.9 0.43 -1.75 0.46 -1.91 0.50 -2.08 0.59 -2.44 0.68 -2.84 0.79 -3.25 0.90 -3.70 1.14 -4.68 1.40 -5.78
2 1.9 0.40 -1.56 0.44 -1.71 0.47 -1.86 0.56 -2.18 0.64 -2.53 0.74 -2.91 0.84 -3.31 1.06 -4.19 1.31 -5.17
2 4.6 0.36 -1.32 0.40 -1.44 0.43 -1.57 0.51 -1.84 0.59 -2.13 0.68 -2.45 0.77 -2.79 0.97 -3.53 1.20 -4.35
2 9.3 0.34 -1.13 0.37 -1.24 0.40 -1.35 0.47 -1.58 0.55 -1.83 0.62 -2.10 0.71 -2.40 0.90 -3.03 1.11 -3.74
3 0.9 0.43 -2.63 0.46 -2.88 0.50 -3.13 0.59 -3.68 0.68 -4.26 0.79 -4.90 0.90 -5.57 1.14 -7.05 1.40 -8.70
3 1.9 0.40 -2.18 0.44 -2.39 0.47 -2.60 0.56 -3.05 0.64 -3.54 0.74 -4.06 0.84 -4.61 1.06 -5.84 1.31 -7.21
3 4.6 0.36 -1.59 0.40 -1.73 0.43 -1.88 0.51 -2.21 0.59 -2.56 0.68 -2.95 0.77 -3.35 0.97 -4.24 1.20 -5.24
3 9.3 0.34 -1.13 0.37 -1.24 0.40 -1.35 0.47 -1.58 0.55 -1.83 0.62 -2.10 0.71 -2.40 0.90 -3.03 1.11 -3.74
1 0.9 0.60 -0.95 0.66 -1.04 0.71 -1.14 0.84 -1.33 0.97 -1.55 1.12 -1.77 1.27 -2.02 1.61 -2.55 1.99 -3.16
1 1.9 0.55 -0.93 0.60 -1.02 0.65 -1.10 0.77 -1.29 0.89 -1.50 1.02 -1.72 1.16 -1.96 1.47 -2.49 1.81 -3.07
1 4.6 0.48 -0.89 0.52 -0.98 0.57 -1.06 0.67 -1.25 0.77 -1.45 0.89 -1.66 1.01 -1.89 1.28 -2.39 1.58 -2.95
Roof > 7 to 27 degrees
1 9.3 0.43 -0.87 0.46 -0.95 0.50 -1.03 0.59 -1.21 0.68 -1.40 0.79 -1.61 0.90
1.14 -1.83 -2.32 1.40 -2.86
2 0.9 0.60 -1.66 0.66 -1.82 0.71 -1.98 0.84 -2.32 0.97 -2.69 1.12 -3.09 1.27 -3.52 1.61 -4.45 1.99 -5.49
2 1.9 0.55 -1.53 0.60 -1.67 0.65 -1.82 0.77 -2.14 0.89 -2.48 1.02 -2.84 1.16 -3.23 1.47 -4.09 1.81 -5.05
2 4.6 0.48 -1.35 0.52 -1.48 0.57 -1.61 0.67 -1.89 0.77 -2.19 0.89 -2.51 1.01 -2.86 1.28 -3.62 1.58 -4.47
2 9.3 0.43 -1.22 0.46 -1.33 0.50 -1.45 0.59 -1.71 0.68 -1.97 0.79 -2.27 0.90 -2.58 1.14 -3.27 1.40 -4.03
3 0.9 0.60 -2.46 0.66 -2.68 0.71 -2.92 0.84 -3.43 0.97 -3.98 1.12 -4.57 1.27 -5.20 1.61 -6.58 1.99 -8.12
3 1.9 0.55 -2.29 0.60 -2.51 0.65 -2.74 0.77 -3.21 0.89 -3.72 1.02 -4.27 1.16 -4.86 1.47 -6.15 1.81 -7.59
3 4.6 0.48 -2.08 0.52 -2.28 0.57 -2.48 0.67 -2.91 0.77 -3.38 0.89 -3.88 1.01 -4.41 1.28 -5.59 1.58 -6.89
3 9.3 0.43 -1.93 0.46 -2.11 0.50 -2.29 0.59 -2.69 0.68 -3.12 0.79 -3.58 0.90 -4.08 1.14 -5.16 1.40 -6.37
1 0.9 0.95 -1.04 1.04 -1.14 1.14 -1.24 1.33 -1.46 1.55 -1.69 1.77 -1.94 2.02 -2.21 2.55 -2.79 3.16 -3.45
1 1.9 0.93 -0.99 1.02 -1.08 1.10 -1.18 1.29 -1.38 1.50 -1.60 1.72 -1.84 1.96 -2.09 2.49 -2.65 3.07 -3.27
1 4.6 0.89 -0.92 0.98 -1.01 1.06 -1.09 1.25 -1.28 1.45 -1.49 1.66 -1.71 1.89 -1.94 2.39 -2.46 2.95 -3.04
Roof > 27 to 45 degrees
1 9.3 0.87 -0.87 0.95 -0.95 1.03 -1.03 1.21 -1.21 1.40 -1.40 1.61 -1.61 1.83 -1.83 2.32 -2.32 2.86 -2.86
2 0.9 0.95 -1.22 1.04 -1.33 1.14 -1.45 1.33 -1.71 1.55 -1.97 1.77 -2.27 2.02 -2.58 2.55 -3.27 3.16 -4.03
2 1.9 0.93 -1.16 1.02 -1.27 1.10 -1.39 1.29 -1.63 1.50 -1.89 1.72 -2.17 1.96 -2.47 2.49 -3.12 3.07 -3.86
2 4.6 0.89 -1.10 0.98 -1.20 1.06 -1.30 1.25 -1.53 1.45 -1.78 1.66 -2.04 1.89 -2.32 2.39 -2.94 2.95 -3.62
2 9.3 0.87 -1.04 0.95 -1.14 1.03 -1.24 1.21 -1.46 1.40 -1.69 1.61 -1.94 1.83 -2.21 2.32 -2.79 2.86 -3.45
3 0.9 0.95 -1.22 1.04 -1.33 1.14 -1.45 1.33 -1.71 1.55 -1.97 1.77 -2.27 2.02 -2.58 2.55 -3.27 3.16 -4.03
3 1.9 0.93 -1.16 1.02 -1.27 1.10 -1.39 1.29 -1.63 1.50 -1.89 1.72 -2.17 1.96 -2.47 2.49 -3.12 3.07 -3.86
3 4.6 0.89 -1.10 0.98 -1.20 1.06 -1.30 1.25 -1.53 1.45 -1.78 1.66 -2.04 1.89 -2.32 2.39 -2.94 2.95 -3.62
3 9.3 0.87 -1.04 0.95 -1.14 1.03 -1.24 1.21 -1.46 1.40 -1.69 1.61 -1.94 1.83 -2.21 2.32 -2.79 2.86 -3.45
4 0.9 1.04 -1.13 1.14 -1.24 1.24 -1.35 1.46 -1.58 1.69 -1.83 1.94 -2.10 2.21 -2.40 2.79 -3.03 3.45 -3.74
4 1.9 1.00 -1.08 1.09 -1.18 1.18 -1.29 1.39 -1.51 1.61 -1.76 1.85 -2.02 2.11 -2.29 2.67 -2.90 3.29 -3.58
4 4.6 0.93 -1.02 1.02 -1.12 1.11 -1.22 1.30 -1.43 1.51 -1.66 1.73 -1.90 1.97 -2.16 2.50 -2.74 3.08 -3.38
4 9.3 0.89 -0.98 0.97 -1.06 1.05 -1.16 1.24 -1.36 1.44 -1.58 1.65 -1.81 1.88 -2.06 2.38 -2.61 2.93 -3.22
4 46.5 0.78 -0.87 0.85 -0.95 0.92 -1.03 1.09 -1.21 1.26 -1.40 1.45 -1.61 1.64 -1.83 2.08 -2.32 2.57 -2.86
Wall
5 0.9 1.04 -1.39 1.14 -1.53 1.24 -1.66 1.46 -1.95 1.69 -2.26 1.94 -2.60 2.21 -2.96 2.79 -3.74 3.45 -4.61
5 1.9 1.00 -1.30 1.09 -1.42 1.18 -1.55 1.39 -1.82 1.61 -2.11 1.85 -2.42 2.11 -2.75 2.67 -3.49 3.29 -4.31
5 4.6 0.93 -1.18 1.02 -1.29 1.11 -1.40 1.30 -1.64 1.51 -1.91 1.73 -2.19 1.97 -2.49 2.50 -3.15 3.08 -3.89
5 9.3 0.89 -1.08 0.97 -1.18 1.05 -1.29 1.24 -1.51 1.44 -1.76 1.65 -2.02 1.88 -2.29 2.38 -2.90 2.93 -3.58
5 46.5 0.78 -0.87 0.85 -0.95 0.92 -1.03 1.09 -1.21 1.26 -1.40 1.45 -1.61 1.64 -1.83 2.08 -2.32 2.57 -2.86
Note: For effective areas between those given above the load may be interpolated, otherwise use the load associated with the lower effective area
The final value, including all permitted reductions, used in the design shall not be less than that required by Section 30.2.2 .
Figure 30-8
Design wind pressures
(cont’d) Walls & roofs
Enclosed buildings
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with appropriate qz or qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Use qz with positive values of GCp and qh with negative values of GCp.
5. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
6. Coefficients are for roofs with angle θ ≤ 10°. For other roof angles and geometry, use GCp values
from Figure 30-2A, B and C and attendant qh based on exposure defined in Section 26.7.
7. If a parapet equal to or higher than 1.0 m is provided around the perimeter of the roof with θ ≤ 10°,
Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
8. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension, but not less than 1.0 m.
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for θ ≤ 10°.
z: height above ground, in meters.
θ: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Windward Parapet
Load Case A
1. Windward parapet pressure (p1) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p 5) zones 4 or 5
from Table 30-6.
Leeward parapet pressure (p2) is determined using the negative roof pressure (p 7) zones 2 or 3 from
Table 30-6.
Leeward Parapet
Load Case B
1. Windward parapet pressure (p3) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p 5) zones 4 or 5
from Table 30-6.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p4) is determined using the negative wall pressure (p6) zones 4 or 5 from
Table 30-6.
Notes:
1. povh = roof pressure at overhang for edge or corner zone as applicable from figures in roof pressure table.
2. povh from figures includes load from both top and bottom surface of overhang.
3. Pressure ps at soffit of overhang can be assumed same as wall pressure pw.
CN
Roof Effective
Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
Angle Wind Area
Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 Zone Zone 1
≤ a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1.0 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
≤ a2 3.2 -4.2 2.4 -2.1 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -5.1 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
7.5º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 2.4 -2.1 2.4 -2.1 1.6 -1.4 1.2 -2.6 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
> 4.0 a2 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -1.4 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.7
≤ a2 3.6 -3.8 2.7 -2.9 1.8 -1.9 2.4 -4.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2.1
15º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 2.7 -2.9 2.7 -2.9 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -3.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2.1
> 4.0 a2 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1
≤ a2 5.2 -5.0 3.9 -3.8 2.6 -2.5 3.2 -4.6 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -2.3
30º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 3.9 -3.8 3.9 -3.8 2.6 -2.5 2.4 -3.5 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -2.3
> 4.0 a2 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3
≤ a2 5.2 -4.6 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -2.3 4.2 -3.8 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
45º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 3.9 -3.5 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -2.3 3.2 -2.9 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
> 4.0 a2 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9
Notes:
1. CN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%. Obstructed
wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of θ other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a : 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal
dimension or 1.0 m
h : mean roof height, m
L : horizontal dimension of building, measured in along wind direction, m
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
CN
Roof Effective
Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
Angle Wind Area
Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 Zone Zone 1
≤ a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1.0 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
≤ a2 2.2 -3.6 1.7 -1.8 1.1 -1.2 1.0 -5.1 0.8 -2.6 0.5 -1.7
7.5º > a2, ≤ 4.0 a2 1.7 -1.8 1.7 -1.8 1.1 -1.2 0.8 -2.6 0.8 -2.6 0.5 -1.7
> 4.0 a2 1.1 -1.2 1.1 -1.2 1.1 -1.2 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7
≤ a2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 1.0 -3.2 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
15º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.7 -1.7 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
> 4.0 a2 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
≤ a2 2.6 -1.8 2.0 -1.4 1.3 -0.9 1.0 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
30º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
2.0 -1.4 2.0 -1.4 1.3 -0.9 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> 4.0 a2 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
≤ a2 2.2 -1.6 1.7 -1.2 1.1 -0.8 1.0 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
45º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.7 -1.2 1.7 -1.2 1.1 -0.8 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> 4.0 a2 1.1 -0.8 1.1 -0.8 1.1 -0.8 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Notes:
1. CN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of θ other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a : 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension
or 1.0 m. Dimension “a” is as shown in Figure 30-12 .
h : mean roof height, m
L : horizontal dimension of building, measured in along wind direction, m
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
CN
Roof Effective
Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
Angle Wind Area
Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 Zone Zone 1
≤ a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1.0 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
≤ a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1.0 -4.8 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
7.5º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
> 4.0 a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
≤ a2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 1.0 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
15º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.7 -1.7 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> 4.0 a2 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
≤ a2 1.8 -2.6 1.4 -2.0 0.9 -1.3 1.0 -2.8 0.8 -2.1 0.5 -1.4
30º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.4 -2.0 1.4 -2.0 0.9 -1.3 0.8 -2.1 0.8 -2.1 0.5 -1.4
> 4.0 a2 0.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.5 -1.4 0.5 -1.4 0.5 -1.4
≤ a2 1.6 -2.2 1.2 -1.7 0.8 -1.1 1.0 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
45º > a , ≤ 4.0 a2
2
1.2 -1.7 1.2 -1.7 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> 4.0 a2 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Notes:
1. CN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%.
Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of θ other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a : 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension
or 1.0 m. Dimension “a” is as shown in Figure 30-12 .
h : mean roof height, m
L : horizontal dimension of building, measured in along wind direction, m
θ : angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
p1 p2 p3 p4
p7
hp
p5 p6
Windward Parapet
Load Case A
1. Windward parapet pressure (p1) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p 5) zones 4 or 5
from the applicable figure.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p2) is determined using the negative roof pressure (p 7) zones 2 or 3
from the applicable figure.
Leeward Parapet
Load Case B
1. Windward parapet pressure (p3) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p 5) zones 4 or 5
from the applicable figure.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p4) is determined using the negative wall pressure (p 6) zones 4 or 5
from the applicable figure.
Notes:
1. Net roof pressure povh on roof overhangs is determined from interior, edge or corner zones as applicable from
figures.
2. Net pressure povh from figures includes pressure contribution from top and bottom surfaces of roof overhang.
3. Positive pressure at roof overhang soffit p s is the same as adjacent wall pressure pw.
performance and seismic safety is existing and retrofit (if any) detailing
equivalent to that of a new structure. Such provided.
analysis shall consider the regularity,
overstrength, redundancy, and ductility of
the structure within the context of the
Notes:
1. Values are nominal design 3-
second gust wind speeds in m/s at
10 m above ground for Exposure
C category.
2. Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas
outside the last contour shall use
the last wind speed contour of the
coastal area.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges,
ocean promontories, and special
wind regions shall be examined
for unusual wind conditions
Figure CC-1: 10-Year MRI 3 sec gust wind speed in m/s at 10 m above ground in Exposure C.
Notes:
1. Values are nominal design 3-
second gust wind speeds in m/s at
10 m above ground for Exposure
C category.
2. Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas
outside the last contour shall use
the last wind speed contour of the
coastal area.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges,
ocean promontories, and special
wind regions shall be examined
for unusual wind conditions
Figure CC-2: 25-Year MRI 3 sec gust wind speed in m/s at 10 m above ground in Exposure C.
Notes:
1. Values are nominal design 3-
second gust wind speeds in m/s at
10 m above ground for Exposure
C category.
2. Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas
outside the last contour shall use
the last wind speed contour of the
coastal area.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges,
ocean promontories, and special
wind regions shall be examined
for unusual wind conditions
Figure CC-3: 50-Year MRI 3 sec gust wind speed in m/s at 10 m above ground in Exposure C.
Notes:
1. Values are nominal design 3-
second gust wind speeds in m/s at
10 m above ground for Exposure
C category.
2. Linear interpolation between
contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas
outside the last contour shall use
the last wind speed contour of the
coastal area.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges,
ocean promontories, and special
wind regions shall be examined
for unusual wind conditions
Figure CC-4: 100-Year MRI 3 sec gust wind speed in m/s at 10 m above ground in Exposure C.
.
the total stiffness in each principal axis the total stiffness in each principal axis
direction, and direction, and
4. The distance between the two most 4. The distance between the two most
separated lines of the MWFRS in each separated lines of the MWFRS in each
principal axis direction shall be at least principal axis direction shall be at least
45% of the effective building width 80% of the effective building width
perpendicular to the axis under perpendicular to the axis under
consideration. consideration.
D.6.2 Case B – Class 1 and Class 2 Buildings. D.6.4 Case D – Class 1 and Class 2 Buildings.
Square buildings with 𝐿/𝐵 = 1.0, where all the Rectangular buildings with 𝐿/𝐵 equal to 0.5 or 2.0
following conditions are satisfied: (𝐿/𝐵 = 0.5, 𝐿/𝐵 = 2.0), where all the following
conditions are satisfied:
1. The combined stiffness of the MWFRS in
each principal axis direction shall be equal, 1. The combined stiffness of the MWFRS in
and each principal axis direction shall be
2. The individual stiffness of the two most proportional to the width of the sides
separated lines of the MWFRS in each perpendicular to the axis under
principal axis direction shall be equal with consideration, and
all lines of the MWFRS symmetrically 2. The individual stiffness of the most
placed about the center of application of separated lines of the MWFRS in each
the wind load along the principal axis principal axis direction shall be equal with
under consideration, and all lines of the MWFRS symmetrically
3. The combined stiffness of the two most placed about the center of application of
separated lines of the MWFRS in each the wind load along the principal axis
principal axis direction shall be at least under consideration, and
66% of the total stiffness in each principal 3. The combined stiffness of the two most
axis direction, and separated lines of the MWFRS in each
4. The distance between the two most principal axis direction shall be at least
separated lines of the MWFRS in each 80% of the total stiffness in each principal
principal axis direction shall be at least axis direction, and
66% of the effective building width 4. The distance between the two most
perpendicular to the axis under separated lines of the MWFRS in each
consideration. principal axis direction shall be 100% of
the effective building width perpendicular
D.6.3 Case C – Class 1 and Class 2 Buildings.
to the axis under consideration.
Rectangular buildings with 𝐿/𝐵 equal to 0.5 or 2.0
(𝐿/𝐵 = 0.5, 𝐿/𝐵 = 2.0), where all the following D.6.5 Case E – Class 1 and Class 2 Buildings.
conditions are satisfied: Rectangular buildings having 𝐿/B between 0.5 and
1.0 (0.5 < 𝐿/𝐵 < 1.0) or between 1.0 and 2.0
1. The combined stiffness of the MWFRS in
each principal axis direction shall be (1.0 < 𝐿/𝐵 < 2.0), the stiffness requirements
proportional to the width of the sides and the separation distances between the two most
perpendicular to the axis under separated lines of the MWFRS in each direction
consideration, and shall be interpolated between Case A and Case C
and between Case B and Case D, respectively (see
2. The individual stiffness of each of the Figure D-1 ).
MWFRS in each principal axis direction
shall be equal and symmetrically placed D.6.6 Case F – Class 1 Buildings. Rectangular
about the center of application of the wind buildings having 𝐿/𝐵 between 0.2 and 0.5 (0.2 <
load along the principal axis under 𝐿/𝐵 < 0.5) or between 2.0 and 5.0 (2.0 <
consideration, and 𝐿/𝐵 < 5.0), see Figure D-2, where all of the
3. The combined stiffness of the two most following conditions are satisfied:
separated lines of the MWFRS in each 1. There shall be at least two lines of
principal axis direction shall be 100% of resistance in each principal axis direction,
and
2. All lines of the MWFRS shall be The individual stiffness of the most separated lines
symmetrically placed about the center of of the MWFRS in each principal axis direction shall
application of the wind load along the be equal and not less than (25 + 50/𝑛) percent of
principal axis under consideration, and the total stiffness where 𝑛 is the required number of
3. The distance between each line of lines of resistance in the principal axis direction as
resistance of the MWFRS in the principal required by conditions 1 and 3 of this section. The
axis direction shall not exceed 2 times the value of n shall be 2, 3, or 4.
least effective building width in a principal
axis direction, and